Page 1

Routledge Mental Health New Books catalog 2009 Psychotherapy and Counseling, Cognitive Behavior Therapy, Expressive Therapies, Child and Adolescent Mental Health, Clinical Problems, Couples and Family Therapy, Psychoanalysis, Jung and Analytical Psychology, Clinical Psychology and Psychiatry

Welcome to the Routledge Mental Health New Books Catalog 2009 This year we will be offering you access to over 200 new books from Routledge and Psychology Press, giving you a chance to read-up on the latest research from leading experts in your particular field of interest. You also have the opportunity to browse and purchase books in the more discrete topic areas.

Latest news Turn to page 24: to read more on The CBT Distinctive Features series edited by Windy Dryden. This exciting new series asks leading practitioners and theorists of the main CBT therapies to write simply and briefly on what constitutes the main features of their particular approach. Most recently published books in the series include: Behavioral Activation by Andrew Busch, Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Rhode Island, Jonathan Kanter and Laura Busch, both at the University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee. Constructivist Psychotherapy by Robert Neimeyer, University of Memphis, Tennessee. And the forthcoming Schema Therapy by Jeffrey Young and Eshkol Rafaeli both at Columbia University, New York, and David Bernstein, Maastricht University, the Netherlands. To order books online visit:

nEW fREE online SHIPPING LEVELS FOR us and cANADIAN ORDERS We’ve introduced a brand new free shipping threshold for customers in the US and Canada. From now on, US and Canadian customers will receive free shipping on their orders by spending $35 (USD) or more.

Turn to page 26: to read more about newly published books in the Practical Clinical Guidebooks series. This series provides clinicians, students and trainees with clear descriptions of practical, empirically supported treatments for specific disorders. Focusing largely on Cognitive Behavioral approaches to the assessment, diagnosis and treatment of a disorder, each volume presents a clear and focused structure to facilitate the transition from book to practice. To order books online visit:

Who to Contact

To order books: Either return the order form in the centre of this catalog to the address below, or contact them directly. Customer Services Taylor and Francis 7625 Empire Drive Florence, Kentucky KY 41042, USA Toll Free Phone: 1-800-634-7064 Toll Free Fax: 1-800-248-4724 Phone RoW: +1 859-525-2230 Fax RoW: +1 859-647-5027 email:

If you have a new book proposal for the Routledge list: If you would like to submit or discuss your mental health book proposal with our Publisher, George Zimmar, please email If you would like to submit or discuss your Psychoanalysis book proposal please email our Publisher, Kate Hawes,, or our Assistant Editor Kristopher Spring,

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

For review requests, mailing list changes (removal or address change) or further copies of the catalog: email: Fax: +44 207 017 6717

Contents Psychotherapy and Counseling ................................... 4 Adlerian Psychotherapy and Counseling .......................... 14 Cross Cultural Counseling ....................................................... 15 Coaching . ...................................................................................... 15 Hypnotherapy ............................................................................. 16 Professional Issues and Resources ....................................... 16 Social Work / Crisis Counseling ............................................. 18 Spirituality . ................................................................................... 20 Grief and Bereavement ............................................................ 21 Cognitive Behavior Therapy ....................................... 23 Expressive Therapies .................................................. 30 Art Therapy . ................................................................................. 30 Dance Therapy ............................................................................ 31 Dramatherapy ............................................................................. 32 Play Therapy ................................................................................. 32 Child and Adolescent Mental Health ......................... 33 Child and Adolescent Clinical Problems ............................ 37 Child and Adolescent Development ................................... 40 School-Based Mental Health and Learning Disabilities ................................................................ 41 The Peer Power Program ....................................................... 42 Family Therapy ............................................................ 43 Parenting ....................................................................................... 44 Couples Therapy . ....................................................................... 45

READ and Recommend Changepower!


37 Secrets to Habit Change Success Meg Selig Page 4

The Psychology of Executive Coaching Theory and Application Second Edition Bruce Peltier

Vital Information and Review Questions for the NCE, CPCE, and State Counseling Exams Special 15th Anniversary Edition Howard Rosenthal

Page 18

People in Crisis Clinical and Diversity Perspectives Sixth Edition Lee Ann Hoff, Bonnie Joyce Hallisey, and Miracle Hoff

Page 19

Developing Resilience A Cognitive-Behavioural Approach Michael Neenan Page 23

The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy

Psychoanalysis . ........................................................... 48

Psychoanalytic Approaches Second Edition Edited by Monica Lanyado, and Ann Horne

Jung and Analytical Psychology ................................ 56

Discovering Your Couple Sexual Style

Clinical Psychology and Psychiatry ........................... 59 Clinical Tests and Assessments . ............................................ 61 Forensic Psychiatry .................................................................... 62

Page 15

Page 33

Sharing, Desire, Pleasure, and Satisfaction Barry W. McCarthy, and Emily McCarthy Page 45

Clinical Problems ......................................................... 63 Addictions ..................................................................................... 63 Eating Disorders . ........................................................................ 65 Gerontology ................................................................................. 66 Mood Disorders .......................................................................... 66 Personality Disorders ................................................................ 67 Physical and Sexual Abuse . .................................................... 68 Schizophrenia and Psychosis ................................................. 69 Self-Harm and Suicide .............................................................. 71 Stress and Trauma ...................................................................... 71

Reading French Psychoanalysis

Author Index ................................................................ 72

Second Edition Ralph Slovenko

Edited by Dana Birksted-Breen, Sara Flanders, and Alain Gibeault Page 52

Dissociation and the Dissociative Disorders DSM-V and Beyond Edited by Paul F. Dell, and John A. O’Neil

Page 60

Psychiatry in Law / Law in Psychiatry

Page 62

Bipolar Disorder A Clinician’s Guide to Treatment Management Second Edition Edited by Lakshmi N. Yatham, and Vivek Kusumakar

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

Page 67

Advancing Theory in Therapy Series

Essential Coaching Skills and Knowledge Series

Series Editor: Keith Tudor

Series Editors: Gladeana McMahon, Stephen Palmer, and Averil Leimon

Most books covering individual therapeutic approaches are aimed at the trainee/student market. This series, however, is concerned with advanced and advancing theory, offering the reader comparative and comparable coverage of a number of therapeutic approaches. Aimed at professionals and postgraduates, Advancing Theory in Therapy will cover an impressive range of theories. Page 6

Series in Death, Dying and Bereavement

100 Key Points Series Series Editor: Windy Dryden The 100 Key Points series are concise and practical introductions to approaches and modalities in counseling and psychotherapy. Ideal for those in training, or for professionals wishing to improve their practice.

The Essential Coaching Skills and Knowledge series provides an accessible and lively introduction to key areas in the developing field of coaching. Each title in the series is written by leading coaches with extensive experience and has a strong practical emphasis, including illustrative vignettes, summary boxes, exercises and activities. Page 15

Series Editor: Robert Neimeyer

Page 6, 43

Counseling and Psychotherapy series: Investigating Practice from Scientific, Historical, and Cultural Perspectives Series Editor: Bruce Wampold This innovative new series is devoted to grasping the vast complexities of the practice of counseling and psychotherapy. As a set of healing practices delivered in a context shaped by health delivery systems and the attitudes and values of consumers, practitioners, and researchers, counseling and psychotherapy must be examined critically. By understanding the historical and cultural context of counseling and psychotherapy and by examining the extant research, these critical inquiries seek a deeper, richer understanding of what is a remarkably effective endeavour. Page 10

Routledge Series on Counseling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men Series Editor: Mark S. Kiselica The Routledge Series on Counseling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men captures the burgeoning body of knowledge about the emotional and psychological lives of boys and men and the process of counseling them in a male-friendly manner. This series will appeal to mental health practitioners (psychologists, counselors, social workers, psychiatrists, clinical and counseling psychologists, marriage and family therapists, nurses and psychotherapists) and educators who wish for in-depth and Page 12 practical suggestions for helping men and boys.

Volumes published within the prestigious Series in Death, Dying, and Bereavement are representative of the multidisciplinary nature of the intersecting fields of death studies, suicidology, end-of-life care, and grief counseling. The series meets the needs of clinicians, researchers, paraprofessionals, pastoral counselors, and educators by providing cutting edge research, theory, and best practices on the most important topics in these fields – for today and tomorrow. Page 21

The CBT Distinctive Features Series Series Editor: Windy Dryden This exciting new series asks leading practitioners and theorists of the main CBT therapies to write simply and briefly on what constitutes the main features of their particular approach. Each Distinctive Features book will highlight the thirty main features – practical and theoretical – of its respective approach. The series as a whole will be essential reading for psychotherapists, counselors, clinical and counseling psychologists of all orientations who wish to learn more about the range of new and developing cognitive-behavioral approaches.

Page 24

Practical Clinical Guidebooks series The Practical Clinical Guidebooks series provides clinicians, students, and trainees with clear descriptions of practical, empirically supported treatments for specific disorders and their sequelae. Focusing largely on CognitiveBehavioral approaches to the assessment, diagnosis, and treatment of a disorder, each volume presents a clear and focused structure to facilitate the transition from book to practice. Page 26

Supervision in the Arts Therapies Series

The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching Series

Series Editor: Joy Schaverien This innovative series comprises five edited volumes, each focusing on one of the arts therapies – art, music, drama, dance or sandplay – and reflects on the dynamic nature of the presentation of that art form in supervision. Supervision in the Arts Therapies series makes a timely contribution to the literature and will be essential reading for experienced practitioners, and students of the arts therapies as well as psychotherapists and other professionals engaged in supervision.

Page 30

CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Series

Series Editor: Dana Birksted-Breen Assistant Editor: Alessandra Lemma The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching series extends the aims and achievements of The New Library of Psychoanalysis to those studying psychoanalysis and related fields such as the social sciences, philosophy, literature and the arts. Each text provides a comprehensive yet accessible introduction to the central subjects in psychoanalysis, expressing even the most complex psychoanalytic concepts in clear and simple language whilst avoiding over simplification. Page 52

The New Library of Psychoanalysis Series Series Editor: Dana Birksted-Breen Assistant Editor: Alessandra Lemma

Series Editor: Paul Stallard The CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families series is designed to provide clinicians and trainees with the latest evidence-based clinical programmes and materials for a range of common problems in a concise and accessible format. Page 35

Adolescence and Society Series

The New Library of Psychoanalysis is published by Routledge in association with the Institute of Psychoanalysis, London. Its purpose is to facilitate a greater and more widespread appreciation of what psychoanalysis is really about and to provide a forum for increasing mutual understanding between psychoanalysts and those in other disciplines such as linguistics, literature, medicine, philosophy, psychology, and the social sciences. Page 53

Series Editor: John Coleman

Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series

In the 20 years since it began, this series has published some of the key texts in the field of adolescent studies. The series has covered a very wide range of subjects, almost all of them being of central concern to students, researchers and practitioners. The primary aim of the series is to make accessible to the widest possible readership important and topical evidence relating to adolescent development.

Series Editor: Donnel B. Stern

Page 40

school- based practice in Action Series Series Editors: Rosemary B. Mennuti, and Ray W. Christner This series provides school-based practitioners with concise practical guidebooks that are designed to facilitate the implementation of evidence-based programs into school settings, putting the best practices in action.

Relational Perspectives book Series Page 41

The Peer Power Program The Peer Power Program is a peer training program designed for middle and high school students, focusing on 8 core skills: Attending, Empathizing, Summarizing, Questioning, Genuineness, Assertiveness, Confrontation, and Problem Solving. Through a series of exercises, games, and selfawareness techniques, children and adolescents involved in the program gain the basic communication and mediation skills necessary to effectively help their peers.

The “new key” in which volumes in this series are written is an intentional focus on innovative and unsettling clinical thinking that, while contributing to the Interpersonal and Relational psychoanalytic traditions, grows from sources not usually tapped in the psychoanalytic literature. The series encompasses ideas from other fields, such as trauma theory or literary criticism, and topics that are typically excluded from formal psychoanalytic discourse. Page 54

Page 42

Series Editors: Lewis Aron, and Adrienne Harris The Relational Perspectives Book series publishes books that grow out of the relational tradition in contemporary psychoanalysis. Various tributaries – interpersonal psychoanalysis, object relations theory, self psychology, empirical infancy research, and certain currents of contemporary Freudian thought – flow into this tradition, which understands relational configurations between self and others, real and fantasized, as the primary subject of psychoanalytic investigation. Page 55

international Perspectives on Forensic Mental Health Series Series Editors: Ronald Roesch and stephen hart The goal of this series is to improve the quality of health care services in forensic settings by providing a forum for discussing issues related to policy, administration, clinical practice, and research. The series will cover topics such as mental health law; the organization and administration of forensic services for people with mental disorder; the development, implementation and evaluation of treatment programs for mental disorder in civil and criminal justice settings; the assessment and management of violence risk, including risk of sexual violence and family violence; and staff selection, training, and development in forensic systems. Page 62

Maudsley Monographs Series Series Editor: Professor A. S. David Henry Maudsley, founder of the Maudsley Hospital, was the most prominent English psychiatrist of his generation. The Maudsley Hospital was united with the Bethlem Royal Hospital in 1948 and its medical school renamed the Institute of Psychiatry. It is now entrusted with the duty of advancing psychiatry by teaching and research. The South London and Maudsley (SLAM) NHS Trust, together with the Institute of Psychiatry, are jointly known as The Maudsley. The series reports work carried out at The Maudsley. Some of the books are directly concerned with clinical problems; others, less obviously relevant, are in scientific fields that are cultivated for the furtherance of psychiatry. Page 63

ISPS SERIES Series Editor: Brian Martindale The ISPS (The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses) series contributes to the psychological understanding and therapeutic treatment of psychosis. It is composed of an increasing number of groups of professionals, family members, those with vulnerability to psychosis and others, who are organised at national, regional and more local levels around the world. Such persons recognise the potential humanitarian and therapeutic potential of skilled psychological understanding and therapy in the field of psychosis. Our members cover a wide spectrum of approaches from psychodynamic, systemic, cognitive, and arts therapies to the need-adaptive approaches, group therapies and therapeutic institutions. Page 69

Psychotherapy and Counseling

Routledge Recommends!

Changepower! 37 Secrets to Habit Change Success Meg Selig, St. Louis Community College, Florissant Valley, USA In Changepower!, author Meg Selig guides the readers through a stepby-step process to help change their behavior – whether breaking a long-time habit such as smoking, heavy drinking, or habitual speeding or trying to integrate a new, positive habit into their life, this book presents a platform for change. The book takes a practical approach to behavioral change, helping the reader along the way from precontemplation all the way through termination. Selig provides a detailed, step-by-step plan for each stage, but with plenty of room for flexibility depending on each individual’s needs. Lively and engaging stories, from the author as well as clients and friends, provide humor and encouragement through anecdotal successes, failures, and pitfalls. The book is littered with asides, affirmations, quoteable quotes, illustrative figures, and boxed exercises for the reader. The consistent and methodical organization of each chapter (stage) into a series of smaller goals and “springboard secrets” helps the reader to feel a sense of accomplishment and encouragement throughout the change process. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Springboard: Change by Choice. Secret 1: Discover Your Place on the Wheel of Change. Secret 2: Try the Quick-change Path. Secret 3: Detect Your Success Pattern. Secret 4: Respect the Power of Habit and Addiction. Secret 5: Know the Key Factor in Habit Change Success. Part II: The Precontemplation Stage: Open the Door. Secret 1: View Your Habit with a Compassionate Eye. Secret 2: Know When True Self-care has Morphed into False Self-care. Secret 3: Reduce Harm. Secret 4: Define Your “Change Point.” Secret 5: When Your Habit is Stronger Than You Are, Seek Help. Secret 6: Open the Door. Part III: The Contemplation Stage: Discover Your Motivators. Secret 1: Wake Up from Your Habit Trance. Secret 2: Keep Score. Secret 3: Welcome the Pain. Secret 4: Think Big: Spark Your Change with these Eight Great Motivators. Secret 5: Pump Up Your Motivation. Secret 6: Create an Encouraging Inner Friend. Secret 7: Dare to Decide. Part IV: The Preparation Stage: Use Plan Power. Secret 1: Think Small: Glide into Change with a Gentle Mini-goal. Secret 2: Build Your Plan with These 12 Super-tools of Change. Secret 3: Back Up Wimpy Willpower. Secret 4: Recruit Your Support Team. Secret 5: Vaccinate Yourself Against Lapses and Relapses. Secret 6: Make Your Plan – and Tweak it as You Go. Part V: The Action Stage: Do It! Secret 1: Use the Action Super-tools on Change Day – and Every Day. Secret 2: Ride Out the Cravings with these Proven Techniques. Secret 3: Speak Up. Secret 4: Brace Yourself for the Change-back Squad. Secret 5: Shape Up a Flabby Plan with These Easy Fixes. Part VI: Relapse: Turn Setbacks into Success. Secret 1: Prevent Lapses and Relapses. Secret 2: Deal with the Dreadful “D Feelings” of Relapse. Secret 3: Try Again. Part VII: The Maintenance Stage: Keep On Keeping On. Secret 1: Keep On Keeping On with Maintenance Supertools. Secret 2: Keep Your Life in Balance. Secret 3: Climb a Few Rungs on the Happiness Ladder. Part VIII: The Termination Stage: Move On. Secret 1: Know Your Final Destination. Secret 2: Build a Better Life with Habit Change Skills. November 2009: 170pp. Pb: 978-0-415-80066-2: $19.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

Psychotherapy and Counseling

Principles of Counseling and Psychotherapy Learning the Essential Domains and Nonlinear Thinking of Master Practitioners

Gerald J. Mozdzierz, Loyola University Stritch School of Medicine, Illinois, USA, Paul R. Peluso, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA, and Joseph Lisiecki, Licensed Clinical Social Worker (LCSW) and a Certified Supervisor Alcohol – and Other Drug – Dependence Counselor (CSADC) “Find out what master practitioners do, then do that. This is a simple approach, yet a missing one in the history of therapist and counselor training. This book opens up this new world of the master practitioner. It is rich and thick – a must read gift to the profession!” - Tom Skovholt,

philosophical underpinnings of each theory, and also includes theoryspecific information on diagnosis, psychopharmacology, multicultural issues, spirituality, and gender issues. The second edition includes a brand new chapter on constructivist approaches to counseling, and information has been updated throughout. Even more case examples are included, along with additional reflective questions and exercises. The availability of a newly created online Instructor’s Manual (upon publication) has increased the teachability of the material and enhances the pedagogical features of the text, making for a more engaging learning experience. January 2010: 448pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99476-7: $59.95

60 day examination copy available

The University of Minnesota, USA

This text presents a novel approach to teaching and learning the fundamental skills and techniques of counseling and psychotherapy, based on a “non-linear” process of thinking that more accurately reflects the reality of mental health practice. At the core of this text lies the idea that to best prepare students for practice with real clients, they have to learn how to think in a new way, the way that research has shown the most effective practitioners think. This non-linear approach to therapy is based on the authoritative research of Tom Skovholt and colleagues, who have studied “master therapists” in action for years, from which these authors have drawn seven core competencies of effective practice. These competencies also line up with a three-level model of counselor experience developed and researched by Cal Stoltenberg. The result is a paradigm shift in how to teach and learn basic counseling skills, which separates this text from the competition and brings training up to speed with current practice. selected Contents: Part I: Introduction. Part II: The Level I Practitioner

Profile. Part III: The Level II Practitioner: Supervisory and Developmental Considerations. Part IV: The Level III Practitioner Profile. March 2009: 470pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99751-5: $125.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99752-2: $49.95


What Works with Children, Adolescents, and Adults? A Review of Research on the Effectiveness of Psychotherapy Alan Carr, University College Dublin, Ireland

“This book offers a unique and comprehensive up-to-date review of the research into the effectiveness of psychotherapy and psychological interventions with children, adolescents, adults, people in later life, and people with intellectual and pervasive developmental disabilities. Thanks to Alan Carr who has done an admirable job, the book presents a helpful guide to mental health professionals who aim to provide evidence based interventions. I highly recommend this book as a valuable source of information for students, clinicians, and researchers in clinical psychology and psychiatry.” - Anegen Trillingsgaard, University of Aarhus, Denmark

What Works with Children, Adolescents, and Adults? provides an up-todate review of research on the effectiveness of psychotherapy and psychological interventions with children, adolescents, adults, people in later life, and people with intellectual and pervasive developmental disabilities.

60 day examination copy available

Drawing on recent meta-analyses, systematic reviews, and key research studies in psychotherapy, this volume presents evidence for:

New Edition!

• the overall effectiveness and cost-effectiveness of psychotherapy

Theoretical Models of Counseling and Psychotherapy

• the contribution of common factors to the outcome of successful psychotherapy

Second Edition Kevin A. Fall, Loyola University – New Orleans, USA, Janice Miner Holden, The University of North Texas, Denton, USA, and Andre Marquis, University of Rochester, New York, USA Theoretical Models of Counseling and Psychotherapy presents a comprehensive overview of a variety of major counseling theories. Written for both student and practitioner, this text gives the reader an easily accessible venue through which to explore the deeper layers of each theory, and provides a bridge from classroom study to practice. Chapters blend current literature with primary source material and include illustrative case examples, which help the reader more readily apply theory to practice. This book is unique in its attention to the

• the effectiveness of specific psychotherapy protocols for particular problems. This comprehensive, user-friendly guide will inform clinical practice, service development and policy. It will be invaluable to psychotherapists, service managers, policymakers, and researchers. Contents: Psychotherapy, Psychotherapy Research, and Translating Science into Practice. The Overall Effectiveness and Cost-effectiveness of Psychotherapy. Common Factors in Psychotherapy. Effectiveness of Psychotherapy and Psychological Interventions with Specific Problems in Children, Adolescents, and People with Intellectual Disabilities and Pervasive Developmental Disorders. Effectiveness of Psychotherapy and Psychological Interventions with Specific Problems in Adulthood and Later Life. Additional Elements in the Psychotherapy Evidence-base. Conclusions. 2008: 400pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45290-8: $110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45291-5: $43.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at


Advancing Theory in Therapy Series

100 key points Series



Transactional Analysis

Constructivist Psychotherapy

100 Key Points and Techniques

A Narrative Hermeneutic Approach Gabriele Chiari, University of Florence, Italy, and Maria Laura Nuzzo, was a clinical psychologist and chartered psychotherapist and President of the Italian Association of Constructivist Psychology and Psychotherapy (AIPPC) “This book represents the culmination of over a quarter of a century of careful work by the authors in developing their particular approach to constructivist psychotherapy. Not only does it contain an unusually detailed exposition of the assumptions underlying the approach, but it is also a rich source of clinical wisdom.” - David Winter, University of

Hertfordshire and Barnet, Enfield, and Haringey Mental Health NHS Trust

Psychotherapy has undergone major changes in recent years, with a variety of new approaches including cognitive-behavioural therapy joining the more traditional and widespread schools of thought. These new approaches all share the epistemological assumption of constructivism, which states that there are alternative ways of looking at events and that we interpret events according to how we see the world. Constructivist Psychotherapy reviews the constructivist trends in psychotherapy which link these new approaches, allowing the reader to enter an entirely new dialogue. The book traces constructivist thought, elaborating on Kelly’s personal construct theory and the implications for psychotherapeutic theory and practice. Contents: Personal Construct Psychotherapy: Forerunner of Constructivist Psychotherapies. Psychological Constructivism and Constructivist Trends in Psychotherapy. A Constructivist Understanding of the Person. The Therapist’s Understanding of the Client’s Narrative. The Therapist’s Construction of the Client’s Narrative. An Ontological Venture: The Psychotherapy Process.

December 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41312-1: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41313-8: $35.95

Series: Advancing Theory in Therapy

Also in the Series Wake: Neurolinguistic Psychotherapy: A Postmodern Perspective Hb: 978-0-415-42540-7: 2008: 208pp. $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42541-4: 2008: 208pp. $35.95

Baim et al., Eds.: Psychodrama: Advances in Theory and Practice Hb: 978-0-415-41913-0: 2007: 344pp. $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41914-7: 2007: 344pp. $35.95

Tudor/Worrall: Person-Centred Therapy: A Clinical Philosophy Hb: 978-1-58391-123-5: 2006: 320pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-124-2: 2006: 320pp. $35.95

for a complete list of books in this series please visit

Mark Widdowson, Psychotherapist, in private practice, Glasgow, UK “Consistently stimulating and informative, this book is essential reading for anyone interested in learning about current developments in Transactional Analysis theory and practice. The structure of the book makes it easy to identify ways in which TA addresses fundamental practice issues, and is highly accessible both to TA specialists and those trained in other orientations who are seeking to integrate TA perspectives into their work with clients.” - John McLeod, Professor of Counselling, University of Abertay Dundee, UK

Transactional Analysis: 100 Key Points and Techniques synthesises developments in the field, making complex material accessible and offering practical guidance on how to apply the theory and refine TA psychotherapy skills in practice. Divided into seven manageable sections, the 100 key points cover: • the philosophy, theory, methods and critique of the main approaches to TA • TA perspectives on the therapeutic relationship • diagnosis, contracting and treatment planning using TA • a trouble shooting guide to avoiding common pitfalls • refining therapeutic skills. As such this book is essential reading for trainee TA therapists, those preparing for examinations as well as experienced practitioners. November 2009: 400pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47386-6: $85.95 Pb: 978-0-415-47387-3: $21.95

Series: 100 Key Points

for a further book in this series please see page 43 Also in the Series Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy 100 Key Points and Techniques Windy Dryden, and Michael Neenan

Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques presents 100 main features of this system, to help therapists improve their practice. Hb: 978-1-58391-740-4: 2006: 288pp. $85.95 Pb: 978-1-58391-741-1: 2006: 288pp. $21.95

Cognitive Therapy 100 Key Points and Techniques Michael Neenan, and Windy Dryden Cognitive Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques is a crisp, concise elaboration of the 100 main features of the most popular and best validated approach within the field of cognitive behaviour therapy. Hb: 978-1-58391-880-7: 2004: 280pp. $69.95 Pb: 978-1-58391-858-6: 2004: 280pp. $21.95

for further books by Windy Dryden and Michael Neenan please see pages 23, 25, 26

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

psychotherapy and counseling

The Creative Therapist The Art of Awakening a Clinical Session Bradford Keeney, California Institute of Integral Studies, San Francisco, USA

In The Creative Therapist, Bradford Keeney makes the case that “creativity” is the most essential aspect of vibrant, meaningful, and successful therapy. No matter what therapeutic orientation one practices, it must be awakened by creativity in order for the session to come alive. This book presents a theoretical framework that provides an understanding of how to go outside habituated ways of therapy in order to bring forth new and innovative possibilities. A basic structure for creative therapy, based on the outline of a threepart theatrical play, is also set forth. With these frameworks, practical guidelines detail how to initiate and implement creative contributions to any therapeutic situation. Contents: Erickson, Preface. Introduction: Therapy: Dead or Alive? Part I:

Bringing it Forth. Theatre of Creative Transformation. Three-act Therapeutic Performances. In-and-Out-of-the-Box Musings. Part II: Awakening a Session. “Man of Plenty”. “A Night in the Love Corral”. “Weight-ing to Leave”. “Cody”. “Pea Shooter Love”. “Seaman’s Song for His Son”. “Spiritual Eyes for Trance”. “Making the News”. “Magmore”. Part III: “Therapy of Therapy”. Christine Apple Nut’s Theatre of Therapy. The Psychoanalyst Who Wanted to be a Priest. Funny Medicines for Children. Absurd Action Koans for Therapists. The Therapeutic Crossroads. July 2009: 273pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99703-4: $34.95


Core Competencies in Psychotherapy Len Sperry, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA Core Competencies in Psychotherapy addresses the core competencies common to the effective practice of all psychotherapeutic approaches, and includes specific intervention competencies of the three major orientations. The book provides a research-based framework to aid clinicians in applying these competencies in their own practice. It begins by identifying and describing the core competencies and skills of expert therapists, then elaborates six core competencies and related supporting competencies and skill-sets. Core Competencies in Psychotherapy is a highly readable and easily accessible book that can enhance the knowledge and skill base of clinicians – both novice and experienced – in all the mental health specialties. Contents: Competency in Counseling and Psychotherapy. Competency 1: Establishing a Treatment Frame. Competency 2: Establishing a Therapeutic Relationship. Competency 3: Conceptualizing and Planning and Treatment. Competency 4: Implementing Treatment and Change. Competency 5: Maintaining a Therapeutic Relationship. Competency 6: Maintaining Treatment Gains and Terminating Treatment. Beyond Competency: Becoming and Being a Master Therapist. March 2010: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95249-1: $39.95

for further books by Len Sperry please see pages 16, 20


Psychotherapy as a Developmental Process

Michael Basseches, Suffolk University, Massachusetts, USA, and Michael F. Mascolo, Merrimack College, Massachusetts, USA This book provides a basis for improving psychotherapy practice, research, and training, offering therapists ways of improving their success rate by means of disciplined attention to and reflection upon therapeutic processes across all psychotherapy. It is based upon four main components: a presentation of the conceptual framework that underlies the proposed way of understanding the nature of psychotherapy in general, as well as the differences among various theoretical and technical approaches; a discussion of the research method, derived from the conceptual framework, for examining psychotherapy case material and determining how psychological development is occurring or how it may be being obstructed; a presentation of case material, illustrating the application of the research method and conceptual framework to particular cases; and a summary and discussion of the potential contributions of the theory and method in the contexts of psychotherapy research, practice, and training. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Psychotherapy and Development – Goals of

this Book. Part II: Conceptual Foundations. The Concept of Development and its Implications for Psychotherapy. A Coactive Systems Model of Psychotherapy and Development. How Psychotherapy Fosters Development. Multiple Traditions, Multiple Paths: How Different Therapeutic Approaches Foster Development. Part III: Method. The Developmental Analysis of Psychotherapy Process (DAPP) Method. Part IV: Case Analyses. From Isolation to Intimacy: The Transformation of Eva’s Communicative Repertoire. The Lady Cloaked in Fog: Developing a Construction of the Therapist as a “Harbor Light.” Sam I am Not: Affective Splitting and the Reintegration of Self in an Autistic Child. Tracking the Role of Emotion in Psychotherapy: Case Illustrations. Part V: Implications. Psychotherapy as a Developmental Process: Implications and Future Directions for Psychotherapy Research, Practice, and Training. July 2009: 376pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5730-6: $54.95

Psychotherapist Revealed Therapists Speak About Self-Disclosure in Psychotherapy Edited by Andrea Bloomgarden, in private practice, Philadelphia, USA, and Rosemary B. Mennuti, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA

In this edited volume, the real dialogue begins. Therapists speak openly and honestly about their selfdisclosure practices, decisions and clinical dilemmas. Bloomgarden and Mennuti bring together research, training and tales from their clinical experience to illuminate lessons derived from their own journeys toward judicious, balanced self-disclosure practices. In a readable fashion, the stories highlight a variety of self-disclosure and boundary issues that occur in the course of psychotherapy. Numerous treatment modalities and clinical orientations are represented. The collective wisdom offered through these stories, which includes suggested guidelines and a standard of care for good practice, will assist the reader in developing a better understanding of what it means

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

psychotherapy and counseling


to self-disclose appropriately, recognizing a flexible middle ground between “too much” and “too little” along with responsiveness to client need. The Freudian based taboo that rigidly warns against all selfdisclosure is antiquated, and a more reasonable, balanced perspective is under way. Contents: Part I: Foundations. Bloomgarden, Mennuti, Therapist SelfDisclosure: Beyond the Taboo. Maroda, Less is More: An Argument for the Judicious Use of Self-Disclosure. Zur, Therapist Self-Disclosure: Standard of Care, Ethical Considerations and Therapeutic Context. Part II: Case Examples by Clinical Orientation and Clientele. Rabinor, Self-Disclosure as a Turning Point in Psychotherapy. Filetti, Mattei, To Share or Not to Share – Self-Disclosure in the Treatment of Borderline Personality Disorder. Prenn, I Second that Emotion! On Self-Disclosure and its Metaprocessing. Bloomgarden, Mennuti, Lessons Learned from Adolescent Girls. Malatesta, Behavioral Treatment of a Case Involving Obsessive Compulsive Hoarding: Case Formulation, The Therapeutic Relationship, and In Vivo Therapy. Nerenberg, Treating Addictions: A Balanced Approach to Boundaries and Therapist Self-Disclosure. Part III: Interface of Therapist and Client Ethnic/Racial/Cultural Factors. Laliotis, Attachment and Healing: An EMDR Relational Approach. Sparks, Learning to Be Authentic with Clients: The Untold Journey of a Relational Practitioner. Patton, Engendering a New Paradigm: Self-Disclosure with Queer Clients. Part IV: Treatment Variations. Gerstein, Family Therapist/Family Member: Family Dynamics at Work and at Home. Barber, The Perils of Rigid Adherence: A Look Back at a Group. McNiff, Creative Expression in Service of Others: Reflections on Transparency in Art Therapy Practice. Billock Tropea, The Therapeutic Relationship in Motion: A Dance/Movement Therapist’s Perspective. Part V: Therapists Losses and Personal Challenges. Gottlieb, Bloomgarden, Mennuti, McCoubrey, Nobody Gets to See the Wizard: An Interview with Dan Gottlieb. Comstock, Confronting Life’s Adversities: SelfDisclosure in Print and in Session. Treadway, For Your Client’s Sake: Practicing Clinically Constructive Self-Disclosure. Part VI: Supervision, Best Practice Guidelines. Feindler, Padrone, Self-Disclosure in Clinical Supervision. Bloomgarden, Mennuti, Collective Wisdom for Good Practice: Themes for Consideration.

May 2009: 303pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96383-1: $49.95

The Therapist’s Notebook More Homework, Handouts, and Activities for Use in Psychotherapy Volume 3 Catherine Ford Sori, Governors State University, Illinois, USA, and Lorna L. Hecker, Purdue University Calumet, USA

The Therapist’s Notebook, Volume 3 includes clinician field-tested activities for therapists who work with individuals, children and adolescents, couples, families, and groups. The reproducible handouts are designed to be practical and useful for the clinician, and cover the most salient topics that counselors are likely to encounter in their practices, with various theoretical approaches. Each chapter includes a “Reading and Resources for the Professional” section that guides readers toward useful books, videos, or websites that will further enhance their understanding of the chapter contents. This book is an excellent tool for both experienced and novice counselors for increasing therapeutic effectiveness. selected contents: Part I: Children and Adolescents. Part II: Adult Clients.

Part III: Couples. Part IV: Families and Groups. 2008: 248pp. Pb: 978-0-7890-3522-6: $49.95

The Therapist’s Notebook on Strengths and Solution-Based Therapies Homework, Handouts, and Activities

Bob Bertolino, and Michael Kiener, both at Maryville University, St. Louis, Missouri, USA, and Ryan Patterson, licensed clinical social worker and director of clinical services at Youth in Need, Inc., St. Louis, Missouri, USA The Therapist’s Notebook on Strengths and Solution-Based Therapies offers multiple pathways for those in helping relationships to employ strengths and solution-based (SSB) principles and practices as a vehicle for promoting positive change with individuals, couples, and families. The 100 exercises in this book are based on a series of core principles that are not only central to solution-based therapies; they have been demonstrated through research as essential to successful outcome. Readers will learn about processes and practices that are supported by research and are collaborative, competency-based, culturally sensitive, client-driven, outcome-informed, and changeoriented. The text is categorized into seven parts, each formatted similarly to ensure easy accessibility. SELECTED Contents: Part I: Becoming Strengths and Solution-Based (SSB):

Creating a Context for Change. Part II: Getting Focused: Exploring Strengths and Solutions in Information-gathering. Part III: Reconnection to Self: Experience, Affect, and Emotion. Part IV: Exploring New Worlds of Possibility: Changing Perspectives and Perceptions. Part V: Lives in Motion: Changing Patterns of Action and Interaction. Part VI: Narratives of Transformation? Change, Progress, Transitions, and Endings. Part VII: Creating a Culture of Care and Respect: Consultation, Supervision, and Development. May 2009: 200pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99415-6: $49.95

Trauma-Centered Group Psychotherapy for Women A Clinician’s Manual Hadar Lubin, and David Read Johnson, both Co-Director’s, Post Traumatic Stress Center, New Haven, Connecticut, USA

The awareness of psychological trauma has grown exponentially in the past decade, and clinicians in many areas have increasingly found themselves confronted with the need to provide trauma-related services to clients. Still, there remains a serious lack of manuals that guide clinicians using group therapy to treat posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD). Trauma-Centered Group Psychotherapy for Women is the important, “how-to” resource that fills this void with a successful theory-based, field-tested model of group therapy for traumatized women. selected Contents: Courtois, Foreword. Part I: The Trauma-Centered Group Psychotherapy Model. Part II: Session-by-session Lecture Series. Part III: Ensuring Success with Trauma-Centered Group Psychotherapy. Appendices.

2008: 176pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3682-7: $49.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3683-4: $29.95

60 day examination copy available FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

psychotherapy and counseling

The Past in the Present Therapy Enactments and the Return of Trauma

Edited by David Mann, NHS Trust, Kent, UK, and Valerie Cunningham, in private practice, Tunbridge Wells, UK “Mann and Cunningham have brought together a fine collection of clinicians, from diverse backgrounds and both sides of the Atlantic, providing an unprecedented depth and breadth of exploration of enactment. This will be of great importance and interest to seasoned practitioners as well as those in training.” - Phil Mollon, Psychoanalyst (British Psychoanalytic Society), Psychotherapist (Tavistock Society), and Clinical Psychologist

The Past in the Present brings together, for the first time, contemporary ideas from both the psychoanalytic and humanistic therapy traditions, looking at how trauma and enactments affect therapeutic practice. Enactments are often experienced as a crisis in therapy and are understood as symbolic interactions between the client and therapist, where personal issues of both parties become unconsciously entwined. This is arguably especially true if the client has undergone some form of trauma. This trauma becomes enacted in the therapy and becomes a turning point that significantly influences the course of therapy, sometimes with creative or even destructive effect. Using a wealth of clinical material throughout, the contributors show how therapists from different therapeutic orientations are thinking about and working with enactments in therapy, how trauma enactment can affect the therapeutic relationship and how both therapist and client can use it to positive effect. 2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43369-3: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43370-9: $35.95

Contemporary Body Psychotherapy The Chiron Approach Edited by Linda Hartley, Transpersonal and Body Psychotherapist, Cambridge Body Psychotherapy Centre, UK “Essential reading for anyone seriously interested in body psychotherapy.” - Nick Totton, body psychotherapy trainer and author

Contemporary Body Psychotherapy: The Chiron Approach looks at the ground-breaking work of the London based Chiron Centre for Body Psychotherapy, a training centre recognised worldwide by professionals in the field. The book brings together Chiron trainers and therapists, describing how their integrative approach has enabled cutting-edge thinking. At a time when the psychotherapeutic profession has turned its interest towards the body and its intrinsic psychological dimension, Contemporary Body Psychotherapy: The Chiron Approach offers a timely and valuable contribution to the literature. It will provide essential reading for those practicing or involved with body psychotherapy, offering a new synthesis with the psychoanalytic tradition, as well as appealing to a wider audience of mental health professionals and academics with an interest in the area.


What Should I Believe? Why Our Beliefs about the Nature of Death and the Purpose of Life Dominate Our Lives Dorothy Rowe, Clinical Psychologist

“Dorothy Rowe casts a bracingly cool eye on the fantasies which can inform religious belief. An important and robust attack on the self-serving aspects of religion.” - Gwyneth Lewis “Dorothy Rowe uses her exceptional gifts of wisdom, common sense and clarity of thought to explain the nature of religious belief and to show us, as only she can, how to confront the problem of death.” - Carmen Callil Suddenly, in the twenty-first century, religion has become a political power. It affects us all, whether we’re religious or not. We want to make up our own minds about what we believe, but it’s difficult to do this. Everyone has to face the dilemma that we all die but no one knows for certain what death actually is. All religions promise to overcome death, but there’s no set of religious or philosophical beliefs that ensures that our life is always happy and secure. Moreover, for many of us, what we were taught about a religion severely diminished our self-confidence and left us with a constant debilitating feeling of guilt and shame. Through all this turmoil comes the calm, clear voice of eminent psychologist Dorothy Rowe. She separates the political from the personal, the power-seeking from the compassionate. She shows how, if we use our beliefs as a defence against our feelings of worthlessness, we feel compelled to force our beliefs on to other people by coercion or aggression. However, it is possible to create a set of beliefs, expressed in the religious or philosophical metaphors most meaningful to us, which allow us to live at peace with ourselves and other people, and to face life with courage and optimism. Contents: Religion in the Twenty-first Century. What it is to Be Human. ‘Hemmed in a Cirque of Our Own Creating’. Very Different Points of View. Being Good and the Just World. Trying to Be Good. How We Acquire Our Beliefs. The Consequences of Our Beliefs. 2008: 312pp. Pb: 978-0-415-46679-0: $17.00 for further books on Spirituality please see page 20 Also by Dorothy Rowe

My Dearest Enemy, My Dangerous Friend Making and Breaking Sibling Bonds Pb: 978-0-415-39048-4: 2007: 376pp. $17.95


Depression The Way Out of Your Prison Third Edition Pb: 978-1-58391-286-7: 2003: 344pp. $17.95

2008: 272pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43938-1: $98.95 Pb: 978-0-415-43939-8: $35.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at


Counseling and Psychotherapy series: Investigating Practice from Scientific, Historical, and Cultural Perspectives



Therapeutic Assessment

The Resilient Practitioner

Using Psychological Testing to Help Clients Change

Second Edition

Stephen Finn, University of Texas, USA Collaborative Assessment, or Therapeutic Assessment, has been a recognized concept in clinical and counseling psychology for twenty years and one that is now rapidly growing in popularity. Finn has prepared this very detailed handbook for masters and doctoral students in clinical psychology and counseling. He discusses the principles and background of therapeutic assessment, procedures for using it with clients, and special issues that need to be considered. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Paradigm. A Model of Therapeutic Assessment.

History and Context of Therapeutic Assessment. Part II: Procedures. The Phone Contact, Observation, and Initial Interview. Early Assessment Sessions. Assessment Intervention Sessions. Summary/Discussion Sessions. Writing Feedback to Clients. Follow-up Sessions. Part III: Special Topics. Adults Referred by Another Professional. Testing One’s Own Clients During Therapy. Involuntary Assessments. Part IV: Conclusion. Concluding Remarks. September 2010: 448pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5763-4: $90.00

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy


Culture and the Therapeutic Process A Guide for Mental Health Professionals Edited by Mark M. Leach, and Jamie D. Aten, both at the University of Southern Mississippi, USA Leach and Aten take a “start to finish” approach to incorporating culture into the treatment stages of counseling and psychotherapy. This book goes beyond the brief introduction to bridge culture and mental health theory and research with practice. Each expert author provides practical strategies, techniques, examples, and case studies highlighting the incorporation of culture at each stage of treatment. Contents: Leach, Aten, An Introduction into the Practical Incorporation of Culture into Practice. Leach, Aten, Boyer, Strain, Bradshaw, Developing Therapist Self-awareness and Knowledge. Fontes, Considering Culture in the Clinical Intake Interview and Report. Paniagua, Assessment and Diagnosis in a Cultural Context. Constantine, Mivilee, Kindaichi, Owens, Case Conceptualizations of Mental Health Counselors: Implications for the Delivery of Culturally Competent Care. Johnson, Sandhu, Treatment Planning in a Multicultural Context: Some Suggestions for Counselors and Psychotherapists. Roysircar, Gill, Cultural Encapsulation and Decapsulation of Therapist Trainees. Utsey, Fischer, Belvet, Culture and Worldview in Counseling and Psychotherapy: Recommended Approaches for Working with Persons from Diverse Sociocultural Backgrounds. Ridley, Shaw-Ridley, Termination within the Context of Culture: A Three-phase Model. Fukuyama, Phan, Looking through a Kaleidoscope: A Case Study.

November 2009: 320pp. Pb: 978-0-8058-6247-8: $44.95

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy

Thomas Skovholt, University of Minnesota, USA This informative and inspirational volume creates a map for new mental health practitioners – one that provides a positive trinity of validity, clarity, and hope for novices, their teachers, and their supervisors. Contents: Opening Up Your Life to the Excitement of the Helping Professions.

The Novice Advantage. The Curse of Ambiguity and Other Ills and What to Do About Them. Who Am I Becoming? Novice Critical Incidents. Developing Habits of Culturally Competent Practice. Issues, Concerns and Tips for the Novice Practitioner. Clash of Cultures. The Holding World of Supervisors, Mentors and Peers. Accelerating Development Along the Novice to Expert Path. The Cycle of Caring. Developing Practitioner Resiliency. The Enormous Meaning of the Work. November 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98938-1: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-98939-8: $39.95

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy

Pharmacology and Treatment of Substance Abuse Evidence and Outcome Based Perspectives

Edited by Lee M. Cohen, Texas Tech University, USA, Frank L. Collins, Jr., University of North Texas, USA, Alice Young, Texas Tech University, USA, Dennis E. McChargue, University of Nebraska, USA, Thad R. Leffingwell, Oklahoma State University-Stillwater, USA, and Katrina L. Cook, Texas Tech University, USA Given the prevalence of substance abuse in general clinical populations, it is important for healthcare providers to have knowledge and skill in the treatment of these problems. Evidence-Based Practice (EBP) involves the integration of the best evidence with clinical expertise and patient values. This text is designed as a bridge for practitioners that will provide up-to-date evidence reviews as well as information on how to best keep up with emerging trends in the field. The editors have gathered expert authors to provide a much needed summary of the current status of the evidence based practice for both the assessment and treatment of specific substance use disorders. Contents: Young, Cohen, Part I: Psychopharmacology and Neurobiology of Substance Abuse. Paronis, Principles of Drug Action. Cooper, Comer, Actions of Drugs Pertinent to their Abuse. Vandrey, Mintzer, Performance and Cognitive Alterations. Allen, Tolerance, Sensitization, and Physical Dependance. Koob, The Neurobiology of Addiction. Ray, Hutchison, Genetics of Addiction. Callahan, Evidence-Based Practice. Collins, Leffingwell, Part II: Conceptual Models and Principles of Substance Abuse Treatment. Pierce, King, Brooner, From Individual Therapy to Individualized Treatment. Morrell, Myers, Group Therapy for Substance Abuse. Gianini, Lundy, Smith, The Community Reinforcement Approach: CRA and CRAFT Programs. Steiker, Hopson, Goldbach, Sagun, Laird, Prevention. Cohne, McChargue, Part III: Assessment and Treatment of Substance Abuse. Blume, Resor, Villanueva, Braddy, Evidence-Based Practices to Treat Alcohol Problems. Brandon, Droves, Ditre, Elibero, Nicotine. Looby, Earleywine, Assessment and Treatment of Marijuana and Use Disorders. Barry, Petry, Alessi, Cocaine. Rush, Vansickel, Lile, Stoops, Evidence-Based Treatment

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

Counseling and Psychotherapy series of Amphetamine Dependance: Behavioral and Pharmacological Approaches. Marsch, Bickel, Heroin and Other Opioids. Crano, Ting, Hemovich, Inhalants. Suzuki, Halpern, Passie, Huertas, Hallucinogens and Dissociative Drugs. Echevery, Nettles, Club Drugs: An Overview. Collins, Cohen, Part IV: Special Topics. Rowe, Liddle, Dakof, Henderson, Development and Evolution of an Evidence-Based Practice: Multidimensional Family Therapy as a Treatment System. Roman, Knudsen, Drug Testing, the Workplace, and Other Applications. al’Absi, Mechanisms of Stress on Substance Abuse Initiation, Maintenance, and Relapse: Intervention Implications. Murphy, Correia, Vuchinich, The Behavioral Economics of Substance Abuse. Caldeiro, Meredith, Saxon, Calsyn, Pharmacological Approaches to the Treatment of Substance Abuse. Hartzler, Rosengren, Baer, Motivational Interviewing. Johnson, Bennett, Faith-based Approaches. Sher, Martinez, The Future of Treatment for Substance Use: A View from 2009. June 2009: 704pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5968-3: $200.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5969-0: $79.95

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy

Intersections of Multiple Identities A Casebook of Evidence-Based Practices with Diverse Populations Edited by Miguel E. Gallardo, Pepperdine University, Irvine, USA, and Brian W. McNeill, Washington State University, Pullman, USA

This casebook provides demonstrations of Evidence-Based Practice in Psychology (EBPP) with diverse clientele, focusing on multiple dimensions and intersections of identity and diversity. The integration of research and clinical expertise described in this volume allows the reader to examine, conceptualize and treat the multiple ways individuals identify themselves (ethnicity/race, religion/spirituality, disability, and sexual orientation). Each chapter is written by experts who illustrate their work in therapeutic encounters from an EBPP perspective, addressing various expressions of diversity in a culturally sensitive manner. Contents: Goodheart, Foreword. McNeill, Gallardo, Introduction: Psychotherapy as a Healing Process. Cervantes, In Search of a Bi-ethnic Identity: Clinical and Ethical Issues in the Treatment of a Latino/African American Adolescent Boy. Mejia, Struggling with Research and Practice with a Mexican American Family: The Case of Robert. Rowe, Rowe, Conversations in Marriage: An African-centered Marital Intervention. McCubbin, Intersecting Multiple Identities: The Case of Lehua. King, Psychotherapy with an American Indian Perspective. Ortiz, Spirituality and Psychotherapy: A Gay Latino Client. Miville, Romero, Corpus, Incorporating Affirming, Feminist, and Relational Perspectives: The Case of Juan. Englar-Carlson, Rath, The Conflict of Navigating Cultural Expectations: The Case of Sam. Sayyedi, Psychotherapy with a 17-year-old Iranian American Female: Therapeutic Guidelines. Gibson, Clinical Competency and Culturally Diverse Clients with Disabilities: The Case of Linda. Gallardo, McNeill, Conclusion: Evidence-Based Practice and Multiple Implications: Reflections and Future Directions. Parham, Afterword. April 2009: 334pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6189-1: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6190-7: $49.95

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy


Beyond Evidence-Based Psychotherapy Fostering the Eight Sources of Change in Child and Adolescent Treatment George W. Rosenfeld, Sutter Counseling Center, California, USA

Beyond Evidence-Based Psychotherapy teaches students through a common factors pointof-view, combining research, case studies, multiple treatment orientations, and a perspective that describes the personal growth of a clinician’s career. It differs from previous texts in that it presents the recent research on psychotherapy in a format that is understandable, memorable, and relevant to student concerns, while integrating research and clinical experience to pragmatically guide clinical decisions. This book provides students of child and adolescent psychotherapy that are pursuing degrees in psychiatry, clinical psychology, social work, and marriage and family counseling with an insight into the practice of a child psychologist with 40,000 hours of experience working with thousands of clients and families. Contents: What Are Reasonable Expectations for Psychotherapy? The 8 Sources of Change in Psychotherapy. The Therapist’s Contribution to Treatment. Using the Therapeutic Relationship as a Treatment Tool. How Can I Keep Clients in Treatment so They can Benefit? Managing Treatment. Engaging Clients Through Seeking Greater Happiness. Has Being a Therapist Been a Good Career Choice? We Are Like Chefs Who Never Eat Out: A Typical Day. Seven and Eleven Week Follow-up.

2008: 284pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99335-7: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99336-4: $39.95

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy

Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Deaf and Hearing Persons with Language and Learning Challenges Neil Glickman, Westborough State Hospital, Massachusetts, USA

Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Deaf and Hearing Persons with Language and Learning Challenges provides a model for adapting best practices in cognitive-behavioral therapy to consumers whose language and cognitive deficits make it difficult for them to benefit from traditional talk oriented psychotherapy. The book focuses primarily upon the mental health care of those deaf clients, sometimes referred to as “low functioning” or “traditionally underserved,” who are particularly difficult to engage in meaningful treatment. Drawing most heavily upon the work of Donald Meichenbaum, Marsha Linehan and Ross Greene, this book presents adaptations and simplifications of psychotherapy which make it accessible and meaningful for persons often viewed as “poor candidates.” The heart of the book is a greatly simplified approach to psychosocial skills training, especially in the domains of coping, conflict resolution and relapse prevention skills. Contents: Introduction. Language and Learning Challenges in the Deaf Psychiatric Population. Do You Hear Voices? Gaines, Meltzner, Glickman, Language and Learning Challenges in Adolescent Hearing Psychiatric

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at


Counseling and Psychotherapy series

Inpatients. Pre-treatment Strategies to Engage and Motivate Clients. Coping Skills. Conflict Resolution Skills. Relapse Prevention and Crisis Management Skills. Staff and Program Development.

2008: 420pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6398-7: $125.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6399-4: $59.95

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy

Principles of Multicultural Counseling and Therapy

Edited by Uwe P. Gielen, St. Francis College, New York, USA, Juris G. Draguns, Pennsylvania State University, USA, and Jefferson M. Fish, St. John’s University, New York, USA Principles of Multicultural Counseling and Therapy focuses on general cultural principles of importance for psychological intervention. Each chapter explores the role of culture in defining, interpreting, and managing interpersonal situations that center around client distress and confusion, providing a global approach that leads readers to a deeper understanding of the international aspects that govern a variety of counseling and therapeutic situations. This concise, teachable volume, covering both models and practice of multicultural counseling, is designed for instructors and students in multicultural counseling and clinical psychology.

Routledge Series on Counseling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men


Culturally Responsive Counseling with Asian American Men Edited by William Liu, University of Iowa, USA, Derek Kenji Iwamoto, Yale University, Connecticut, USA, and Mark H. Chae, Seton Hall University, New Jersey, USA With this book, the editors fill a gap in the current literature by providing practitioners with a comprehensive and current review of the most relevant issues that Asian American men experience, as well as by presenting culturally-responsive techniques and novel strategies on how to work with them. Each chapter is written by leading figures in the field and follows a useful and practical format: they begin with a relevant case-study and an introduction to the content of the chapter, highlighting the key research findings and limitations. Next, the authors explore the treatment considerations and key issues that clinicians need to be aware of. They conclude with strategies and interventions based on the case-study discussed at the beginning of the chapter. Contents: Liu, Iwamoto, Chae, General Overview and Introduction. Park, Clinician’s Self-assessment. Kim, Acculturation and Asian Values. Liang, Alvarez, Racial Identity and Racism. Lee, Intergeneration Conflict with Parents. Chae, Fatherhood and Family Issues. Liu, Iwamoto, Asian American Identity and Masculinity Redefined. Alvarez, Chang, Substance Use. Leong, Career Counseling. Hall, Violence and Aggression. Chung, Sexual Orientation and Coming Out. Okazaki, Anxiety, Depression, and Suicide. Fujino, Interracial and Interethnic Relationships. Sue, Being an Asian-American Man Across the Life-span.

January 2010: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-80007-5: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80008-2: $37.95

2008: 488pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6205-8: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6204-1: $34.95

Routledge Series on Counseling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men

Series: Counseling and Psychotherapy

60 day examination copy available Also in the Series Finn: In Our Clients’ Shoes: Theory and Techniques of Therapeutic Assessment Hb: 978-0-8058-5764-1: 2007: 320pp. $35.95

Grawe: Neuropsychotherapy: How the Neurosciences Inform Effective Psychotherapy Hb: 978-0-8058-6121-1: 2006: 504pp. $145.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6122-8: 2006: 504pp. $62.95

Blustein: The Psychology of Working: A New Perspective for Career Development, Counseling, and Public Policy Hb: 978-0-8058-4376-7: 2006: 384pp. $99.95 Pb: 978-0-8058-5879-2: 2006: 384pp. $41.95

Glidden-Tracey: Counseling and Therapy with Clients Who Abuse Alcohol or Other Drugs: An Integrative Approach Hb: 978-0-8058-4550-1: 2005: 312pp. $110.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-4551-8: 2005: 312pp. $41.95

Wampold: The Great Psychotherapy Debate: Models, Methods, and Findings Hb: 978-0-8058-3201-3: 2001: 280pp. $69.95 Pb: 978-0-8058-3202-0: 2001: 280pp. $37.95


Counseling Boys and Men with ADHD George Kapalka, Monmouth University, New Jersey, USA This book fills a void in the current literature by providing a detailed and comprehensive discussion of a wide variety of specific interventions – individual counseling, parenting techniques, classroom interventions, group counseling techniques, and (where appropriate) the use of medications as adjuncts to those counseling techniques and the methods of coordinating this multimodal treatment. The author begins by reviewing issues of description, etiology, course, assessment, and differential diagnosis. Next, he discusses counseling and psychotherapy techniques, focusing on individual and group approaches, as well as the involvement of parents and spouses/ partners in treatment. Contents: Part I: Diagnosis, Epidemiology, and Course Symptoms of ADHD. Epidemiology and Course of ADHD. Assessment Techniques. Differential Diagnosis. Part II: Counseling and Psychotherapy Individual Techniques: Boys and Teens. Individual Techniques: Men. Group Techniques. Parenting Techniques. Working with Spouses and Partners of Men with ADHD. Part III: Educational Interventions. Classroom Behavior Management. Instructional Modifications. Part IV: Medical Approaches. Stimulant Medications. Non-stimulant Medications. Alternative Treatments.

October 2009: 376pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99344-9: $39.95

Routledge Series on Counseling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

Routledge Series on Counseling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men

Counseling Fathers

psychotherapy and counseling

Biennial Review of Counseling Psychology

Edited by Chen Z. Oren, and Dora Chase Oren, both at the Phillips Graduate Institute, California, USA

Volume 1, 2008

Men do not often come for counseling because they are having difficulties with being a father, but many of the presenting problems and reasons for seeking help can be related to the roles and responsibilities of fathering.

Co-published with APA Division 17 (Counseling Psychology)

Counseling Fathers is designed to bridge the gap between fathers and professional helpers. This book provides the mental health practitioners with a guide for working with fathers in therapy, whether the issues of fathering are at the center of the discussions or in the background. The organization of the book speaks to the variety of today’s fathers and the issues that they face. Part I provides an historical overview of the fathering movement, a strength-based approach to working with fathers, and an assessment paradigm using gender role conflict theory. Part II takes a crosscultural approach, with a series of chapters that look at counseling with Latino, Asian, Black, and Caucasian fathers. Part III looks at specific populations of fathers, including first time fathers, teen fathers, stayat-home fathers, gay fathers, and older fathers. Counseling Fathers provides the most up-to-date and comprehensive resource for family and individual practitioners who work with men who father. Contents: Pleck, Foreword. C. Z. Oren, D. C. Oren, Preface: Counseling

Diverse Populations of Fathers. Part I: Historical Perspectives and Current Directions. Levant, Wimer, The New Fathering Movement. Oren, Englar-Carlson, Stevens, Oren, Counseling Fathers from a Strength-based Perspective. O’Neill, Luan, An Assessment Paradigm for Fathers and Men in Therapy Using Gender Role Conflict Theory. Part II: Counseling Fathers Across Ethnic Groups. Cervantes, Mexican American Fatherhood: Culture, Machismo, and Spirituality. Seto, Becker, Narang, Working with Asian American Fathers. Franklin, Another Side of Invisibility: Present and Responsible Black Fathers. Owen, Glass, Counseling Caucasian Fathers: Affirming Cultural Strengths While Addressing White Male Priviledge. Part III: Counseling Specific Populations of Fathers. Robertson, Challenges and Clinical Issues in Counseling Religously Affiliated Fathers. Berger, Increasing Clinical and Contextual Awareness When Working with New Fathers. Rochlen, McKelley, Working Therapeutically with Stay-at-Home Fathers. Arcinue, Prince, Counseling Teen Fathers: A Developmentally Sensitive Strength-based Approach. Alonzo, Counseling Gay Fathers: Stepping into the New Frontier. Remer, Massoth, Crumpton, Oren, Oren, Counseling Older Fathers. June 2009: 344pp. Pb: 978-0-415-98864-3: $34.95

Routledge Series on Counseling and Psychotherapy with Boys and Men

also in the series Kiselica et al., Eds.: Counseling Troubled Boys: A Guidebook for Professionals Pb: 978-0-415-95547-8: 2007: 336pp. $34.95

Mortola et al.: BAM! Boys Advocacy and Mentoring Pb: 978-0-415-96318-3: 2007: 192pp. $34.95

for further books on Child and Adolescent Mental Health please see page 33


W. Bruce Walsh, The Ohio State University, Columbus, USA

Created to keep pace with changes in the psychological fields, the Biennial Review of Counseling Psychology addresses key developments in theory, research, and practice. New areas that have evolved in counseling psychology are discussed, and each chapter is written by current front-runners in the field. Contents: Baker, Subich, Counseling Psychology. Minami, Wampold, Adult Psychotherapy in the Real World. Goodheart, Carter, The Proper Focus of Evidence-based Practice in Psychology. Stoltenberg, Pace, Science and Practice in Supervision. Constantine, Fuertec, Kindaichi, Multicultural Competence. Blustein, Fouad, The Changing Face of Vocational Psychology. Magyar-Moe, Lopez, Human Agency, Strengths-based Development, and Well-being. Bieschke, Hardy, Fassinger, Croteau, Intersecting Identities of Gendertransgressive Sexual Minorities. Cooper, Resnick, Rodolfa, Douce, College Counseling and Mental Health Services. Heppner, Leong, Gerstein, Counseling Within a Changing World. Santiago-Rivera, Guzman, Psychosocial Issues and Psychotherapeutic Treatment Considerations with Recent Immigrants. Elliott, Hurst, Social Problem Solving and Health.

2008: 344pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6279-9: $125.00

Counseling Military Families What Mental Health Professionals Need to Know

Lynn K. Hall, Western New Mexico University, USA Foreword by Mary Edwards Wertsch The objectives of Counseling Military Families are to help the practicing counselor understand how the military works, what issues are constants for the military family, and what stressors are faced by the military member and the family. The book begins with an overview of military life, including demographic information and examples of military family issues, before delving into specific chapters focused on the unique circumstances of reservists, career service personnel, spouses, and children. The final section of the book presents treatment models and targeted interventions tailored for use with military families. 2008: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95687-1: $85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95688-8: $29.95


The Quest to Feel Good Paul R. Rasmussen, Furman University, South Carolina, USA This volume describes how emotions, rather than being the result of random or disordered biochemical processes, are adaptive mechanisms that are often over relied upon as a function of basic learning processes. The contemporary view that if one is depressed or anxious (for example), then one is “chemically imbalanced” pervades the United States and advanced societies. This has led many people to

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at


psychotherapy and counseling

believe that life should be lived without any unhappiness or distress and that any negative emotion is a sign of a disordered physiology; neither of which is true. This book addresses the role of emotions as adaptive components, in combination with cognitive and behavioral processes, to our overall orchestration of life.

adlerian psychotherapy and counseling

Adlerian Counseling and Psychotherapy

selected Contents: Part I: Theoretical Foundation. Part II: Validating Emotions. Part III: Compelling Emotions. Part IV: Case Conceptualization and Clinical Treatment.

January 2010: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96531-6: $44.95


Self-Esteem Across the Lifespan Issues and Interventions Edited by Mary Guindon, Johns Hopkins University, Maryland, USA This book provides an overview of the self-esteem construct and defines it, reviews its history, explains its development, draws comparisons of it across gender, racial, and ethnic groups, and discusses its significance in counseling and therapy. It is organized around the five developmental stages of life: childhood, adolescence, early adulthood, midlife, and late life. Each chapter incorporates principles of self-esteem to target an identified self-esteem issue at one of these developmental stages and provides intervention strategies suitable for enhancing or changing self-esteem. selected Contents: Part I: Introduction. Part II: Childhood: Introduction.

Part III: Adolescence: Introduction. Part IV: Early Adulthood: Introduction. Part V: Midlife: Introduction. Part VI: Late Life: Introduction. Part VII: Conclusion. October 2009: 353pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99699-0: $44.95

Anger, Rage and Relationship An Empathic Approach to Anger Management Sue Parker Hall, BACP accredited therapist

“This is a powerful and timely work that enhances and extends the field of ‘anger management’ considerably. Reading it has given me many points of reflection and its richness and clarity have already helped me personally as well as professionally in the role of therapist. An inspiring read.” - Jim Holloway, Independent Counsellor and Psychotherapist Anger, Rage and Relationship presents a radically new way to understand and work with anger and rage issues. Taking a relational approach to anger and rage, the book presents a positive view of human nature, supported by recent research findings and illustrated with case studies, with individuals trusted to be essentially pro-social. Rather than promoting strategies and techniques for eradicating anger, Sue Parker Hall, puts forward an approach which seeks to not only work with, but to differentiate between, anger and rage. Anger and rage are constructed as entirely different phenomena, originating at different developmental stages, having different functions and relational needs and requiring different aspects of relationship in the therapeutic process. 2008: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41347-3: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41348-0: $34.95

New Edition!

A Practitioner’s Approach Fifth Edition Thomas J. Sweeney, Ohio University, Athens, USA Adlerian Counseling and Psychotherapy, now it its fifth edition, remains a classic text for students and an essential resource for practitioner’s of all levels of experience. Reviewers have consistently lauded the book in previous editions for its clarity, concise focus, and use of many practical applications. It explains and illustrates individual, group, and couples work with children, adolescents, and adults of all ages. The fifth edition presents a fresh organization and an even clearer structure. Contents: Part I: Foundations for Understanding Human Nature. Individual Psychology: The Man, the Movement, and the Psychology of Alfred Adler. Wellness Through Social Interest: The Goal of Helping. Part II: What We Learn from Life. Life’s Rules are for Everyone: Natural and Logistical Consequences. Encouragement: The Essential Element in Helping. Part III: First vs. Second Order Change: Counseling vs. Psychotherapy. Adlerian Psychotherapy in Practice. Life Style Assessment: Uncovering the Unconscious. Part IV: Life Task Applications of Individual Psychology. Work: Career Style Assessment and Counseling. Friendship: Guiding Children Through Social Interest and Cooperation. Love: Counseling Couples. Love: Counseling with Families. Self and Spirit: Working with Groups. Adlerian Supervision: Passing on the Legacy. Appendix A: Family Counseling. Appendix B: Family Council.

May 2009: 438pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99348-7: $49.95

60 day examination copy available

The Psychology of Courage An Adlerian Handbook for Healthy Social Living

Julia Yang, and Alan Milliren, both at Governors State University, USA, and Mark Blagen, University of Illinois, Springfield, USA Courage refers to the willingness for risk taking and to move ahead in the presence of difficulties. The purpose of this book is to present courage as the main thrust of understanding and training for mental health in three life task areas: Work, Love, and Friendship. The authors discuss the theoretical basis of courage in combination with the assessment and change strategies of Adlerian psychology. The processes that bring out the courage of change serve as the major framework by which practical Adlerian techniques (i.e. early recollection, family constellation, lifestyle assessment, consequences, and Socratic questioning), counseling scripts, and case stories are illustrated. Contents: Carlson, Foreword. Part I: Foundation. What is Courage? Gemeinschaftsgefuhl. Tasks of Life. Part II: The Courage of Social Living. The Courage to Work. The Courage to Love. The Courage for Friendship and Family. The Courage to Belong. The Courage to Be. The Courage of Spiritual Wellbeing. Part III: Implications. The Art of Facilitating Courage. Tools to Facilitate Courage.

July 2009: 294pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96519-4: $39.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20




Multicultural Counseling

Theory and Application

Aretha Marbley, Texas Tech University, Counselor Education, USA

Second Edition

Multicultural Counseling contains the firsthand telling of cultural stories (that encompass race, ethnicity, class, gender, and life cycle) of African American, Asian, Hispanic/Latino, and Native American Indian people’s experiences of mental health services. Using real cases, narratives, and biographical material, each chapter motivates the reader to ponder and challenge how issues related to mental health intersect with race and ethnicity within a broader diversity framework.

Bruce Peltier, in private practice, San Francisco, USA Coaching has become an important way for psychotherapists and other mental health professionals to adapt their skills to a changing environment. This book provides a comprehensive translation of psychotherapy theory and skills for the would-be executive coach. It was written to help clinical mental health practitioners understand the culture and expectations of the corporate and business world, as well as how to use their hard-earned skills effectively in executive coaching.

Contents: Background Information. The Themes Emerging from Their Stories. The African Experience in America. The Asian Experience in America. The Hispanic Client’s Experience. The Native American Indian Client’s Story. Stories of a Proud People. Gender: Gunpowder and Lead. Drum Majors for Justice: Social Justice Efforts for Women and People of Color. The Follow-up Interviews – 12 Years Later. Engendering Hope: Reconciliation and the Power of Forgiveness.

The book begins with a clear explanation of how coaching differs from counseling and how to explain this to prospective new clients. Eight chapters translate popular therapies into coaching strategies, along with a guide for assessing executives.

March 2010: 256pp. Pb: 978-0-415-95686-4: $34.95

60 day examination copy available

Contents: Introduction. Assessment. Developmental Psychology and Adult Development. The Psychodynamic View. Behavioral Concepts. The Person-centered Approach. Cognitive Psychology and Cognitive Therapy. Family Therapy and Systems Thinking. The Existential Stance. Social Psychology and Coaching. Hypnotic Communication. Emotional Intelligence. Lessons from Athletic Coaches. Coaching Women. Psychopathology. Leadership. Workers, Managers, and Leaders. Ethics in Coaching. Making the Transition.

Cross Cultural Awareness and Social Justice in Counseling Edited by Cyrus Marcellus Ellis, and Jon Carlson, both at Governors State University, Illinois, USA

September 2009: 448pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99341-8: $37.95

The theoretical foundation for this book rests on research into diversity, spirituality, religion, and color-specific issues. Each chapter addresses the unique needs and relevant issues in working with a specific population, such as women, men, African Americans, Asian Americans, Spanishspeaking clients, North America’s indigenous people, members of the LGBT community, new citizens, and the poor, underserved, and underrepresented. Issues that enter into the counselor-patient relationship are discussed in detail for all of these groups. Contents: Toporek, Counseling from a Cross Cultural and Social Justice Posture. Manis, Brown, Paylo, The Helping Professional as an Advocate. Farrell, Developing a Diverse Counseling Posture. Brown, May, Counseling with Women. Englar-Carlson, Counseling with Men. Grimmett, Locke, Counseling with African Americans. Singh, Counseling with Asian Americans. Smith, Montilla, Counseling with Spanish Speaking Clients. Turner, Pope, Counseling with North America’s Indigenous People. Tollerud, Slabon, Counseling with Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual, and Transgender People. Zagelbaum, Counseling with New Citizens. Caldwell, Counseling with the Poor, Underserved and Underrepresented. Ellis, Carlson, The Next Step.

2008: 335pp. Pb: 978-0-415-95452-5: $41.95

Routledge Recommends!

The Psychology of Executive Coaching

Perspectives from Counselors as Clients of Color


60 day examination copy available

Essential coaching skills and knowledge series


Essential Life Coaching Skills Angela Dunbar, Managing Director, Dunbar Training and Development Consultancy, UK “This is a refreshing new take on areas which have been explored in other books... this book provides an entertaining and easy to follow guide to what coaching is, what it does, how it works and where to go for the next stage of the journey.” - Carol Wilson, From the Foreword Essential Life Coaching Skills provides a comprehensive guide to the complete range and depth of skills required to succeed as a life coach. Angela Dunbar uses theoretical background alongside practical examples to provide a clear understanding of what makes a successful life coach. This book focuses on seven essential skill sets that are necessary for effective life coaching with each chapter giving specific

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at



examples of how these skills are used in life coaching, and how they can be developed and improved. The book also includes a comprehensive, current overview of life coaching processes, practices, and issues, from both the coach and client perspectives. Essential Life Coaching Skills will be ideal reading for new and existing life coaches who wish to find ways to enhance their competence and ability. Contents: Wilson, Foreword. Life Coaching in the UK – The Story So Far. Providing a Life Coaching Service. Life Coaching Case Studies. The Life Coaching Process. Skills Within the Wider Context. Relationship Building Skills. Listening Skills. Questioning Skills. Intuitive Skills. Challenging Skills. Motivating Skills. Marketing Skills. The Difference Between Life Coaching and Therapy. Developing Your Skills.

October 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45896-2: $84.95 Pb: 978-0-415-45897-9: $30.95

Series: Essential Coaching Skills and Knowledge

Also in the Series Buckley, A./Buckley, C.: A Guide to Coaching and Mental Health: The Recognition and Management of Psychological Issues Hb: 978-0-415-39458-1: 2006: 264pp. $80.95 Pb: 978-0-415-39459-8: 2006: 264pp. $30.95

Leimon et al.: Essential Business Coaching Hb: 978-1-58391-882-1: 2005: 192pp. $80.95 Pb: 978-1-58391-883-8: 2005: 192pp. $30.95

McMahon et al.: Achieving Excellence in Your Coaching Practice: How to Run a Highly Successful Coaching Business Hb: 978-1-58391-895-1: 2005: 248pp. $80.95 Pb: 978-1-58391-896-8: 2005: 248pp. $30.95

professional issues and resources


Highly Effective Therapy Developing Essential Clinical Competencies in Counseling and Psychotherapy Len Sperry, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA Mental health professionals and accrediting bodies have steadily been embracing competency-focused learning and clinical practice. In contrast to a skill, a competency is a level of sufficiency evaluated against an external standard. Learning to be clinically competent involves considerably more than the current emphasis on skill and micro skill training. While there are now a small number of books that describe the various clinical competencies of counseling and psychotherapy, none of these books focus on how to learn them. Highly Effective Therapy emphasizes the process of learning these essential competencies. Contents: Introduction: Developing Essential Clinical Competencies. Apply a Conceptual Map to Understand and Direct the Therapeutic Process. Establish an Effective Therapeutic Alliance. Assess Readiness and Foster Treatment-promoting Factors. Recognize and Resolve Resistance and Ambivalence. Recognize and Repair Alliance Ruptures. Recognize and Resolve Transference-Countertransference. Perform an Integrative Diagnostic Assessment. Develop an Accurate DSM Diagnosis. Develop an Effective Clinical Case Conceptualization. Develop an Effective Cultural Formulation. Plan Interventions and Predict Obstacles to its Implementation. Draft an Integrative Clinical Case Report. Establish a Treatment Focus. Maintain the Treatment Focus. Modify Maladaptive Cognitions, Behaviors, Affects, and Interpersonal Relations. Plan and Implement Culturally-sensitive Treatment. Recognize and Resolve Treatment-interfering Factors. Monitor Progress and Modify Treatment Accordingly. Evaluate Progress and Prepare Clients for Termination. Utilize Supervision Effectively to Develop and Evaluate Competencies.

September 2009: 222pp. Hb: 978-0-415-80276-5: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-415-80277-2: $44.95

for further books by Len Sperry please see pages 7, 20



New in Paperback!

25 Essential Skills and Strategies for Professional Behavior Analysts

The February Man Evolving Consciousness and Identity in Hypnotherapy Milton H. Erickson, Milton H. Erickson Foundation, Arizona, USA, and Ernest Lawrence Rossi, in private practice, California, USA Featuring a New Introduction by Ernest Lawrence Rossi This book is a fascinating case study that illustrates the use of multiple levels of consciousness and meaning to access and therapeutically reframe traumatic memories that were the source of very severe phobias and depression. It is a rare record of Erickson’s pioneering genius in facilitating the evolution of new patterns of consciousness and identity in a patient. Contents: Rosen, Foreword. Rossi, Introduction. Session I, Part I: Approaches

to Therapeutic Hypnosis. Session I, Part II: Identity Creation of the February Man. Session II: Multiple Levels of Communication and Being. Session III: Evoking and Utilizing Psychodynamic Processes. Session IV: Active Therapeutic Trancework. February 2009: 288pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99095-0: $34.95

60 day examination copy available

Jon S. Bailey, Florida State University, USA, and Mary R. Burch, American Society of Journalists and Authors 25 Essential Skills and Strategies for Professional Behavior Analysts is a much needed guidebook for behavior analysts who want to become successful at consulting. Jon Bailey and Mary Burch present five basic skills and strategy areas that professional behavior analysts need to acquire. This book is organized around those five areas, with a total of 25 specific skills presented within those topics. Every behavior analyst, whether seasoned or beginning, should have this book. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Basic Consulting Skills. Business Etiquette. Assertiveness. Leadership. Networking. Public Relations and Marketing. Total Competence-applied Behavior Analysis Plus. Ethics in Daily Life. Part II: People Skills. Personal Communications. Persuasion/Influence. Negotiation and Lobbying. Public Speaking. Part III: Applying Behavioral Skills. Handling Difficult People. “Think Function”. Using Shaping Effectively. “Can You Show Me That?” Performance Management. Part IV: Work Habits. Time Management/Prioritizing Tasks. Become a Trusted Professional. Learn to Deal with Stress. Know When to Seek Help. Part V: Advanced Consulting Skills. Critical Thinking. Problem Solving. Understanding and Using “Power”. Training/ Coaching/Mentoring. Aggressive Curiosity. Appendices.

September 2009: 226pp. Hb: 978-0-415-80067-9: $80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80068-6: $34.95

60 day examination copy available

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

professional issues and resources

Relational Ethics in Practice


Narratives from Counselling and Psychotherapy

Edited by John Culbreth, Associate Professor and Coordinator of Community Counseling Program, UNC-Charlotte, USA, and Lori Brown, University of North Carolina-Greensboro, USA This book includes a series of cutting edge chapters that present the state of the art in clinical supervision, written by some of the leading researchers, scholars, and professionals in the field. Readers will find fresh approaches to core topics such as multicultural competence, spirituality, and the training of supervisors themselves. Several new areas of study are covered, including the use of expressive arts in supervision, triadic supervision, teaching supervision to master’s level students, and applications of narrative therapy and emotionally intelligent concepts in supervision.

Edited by Lynne Gabriel, York St John University College, York, UK, and Roger Casemore, Senior Teaching Fellow, Warwick University, UK Relational Ethics in Practice presents a new collection of narratives on ethics in day-to-day therapeutic practice. Highly experienced professionals from a range of roles in the therapeutic professions explore ways of developing ethical and effective relationships. The contributors provide the reader with engaging and informative narratives that indicate how ethics can inform and influence practice in a variety of clinical contexts across the helping professions. These personal and professional narratives will encourage people to think more proactively about ethics and the impact that they have on both therapeutic practice, and life in general. Contents: Gabriel, Casemore, Introduction. Gabriel, Relational Ethics, Boundary Riders and Process Sentinels: Allies for Ethical Practice. Casemore, Relational Ethics as a Way of Being. Balick, Relational Ethics Beyond the Sex and Gender Binary: An Integrative Relational Approach. Wosket, Relational Ethics in Supervision. Etherington, Ethical Research in Reflexive Relationships: A Dialogical Process. Neath, Relational Ethics: A Perspective After the Essays and Marking. Dave, Relational Ethics in Psychiatric Settings. Jenkins, Therapy as Evidence: Legal Perspectives on the Relationship Between Therapist and Client. Dunnett, The Role of Practitioner Self-care in Practitioner-client Relationship Ethics. West, Training Matters: On the Way In. Casemore, Relational Ethics in Small Communities and Organisations. Gabriel, Exploring the Researchercontributor Research Alliance. Tudway, Relational Ethics from a Cognitive Behavioural Perspective. Walker, Counselling Survivors of Abuse: Feminism, Psychodynamic Psychotherapy and Ethics. Gabriel, Experiencing the Edge: Relationships with Self and Others in Times of Intense or Enduring Trauma. May 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42591-9: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42592-6: $34.95

Practicum and Internship Textbook and Resource Guide for Counseling and Psychotherapy Fourth Edition John C. Boylan, Marywood University, Pennsylvania, USA, and Judith Scott, University of Pittsburgh, USA

Completely revised and updated, the fourth edition of Practicum and Internship carries on the tradition of the previous editions as a popular and highly useful textbook and resource guide. It continues to be a comprehensive resource for students and their supervisors throughout the counseling and psychotherapy process, providing thorough coverage of both the theoretical and practical aspects of the practicum and internship process. selected Contents: Part I: The Practicum Experience. Part II: Ethics and the Law. Part III: The Internship Experience. Part IV: Internship Preparation and Experience. Appendices.


2008: 608pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99069-1: $49.95

60 day examination copy available

State of the Art in Clinical Supervision

Contents: Culbreth, Brown, Introduction. Chang, Hays, Grey, Supervision Multicultural Competence. Osborn, No Surprises. Gillam, Baltimore, Triadic Supervision. Jenicus, Baltimore, Getz, Innovative Uses of Technology in Clinical Supervision. Adcock, Scholl, Wittman, Tucker, Using Expressive Arts in Clinical Supervision. Young, Cashwell, Spirituality in Supervision. Brown, University Based Supervision. Jordan, Semivan, Teaching Supervision to Master’s Level Students. Borders, The Training of Supervisors. Culbreth, Gressard, Scarborough, Stages of Change Theory in Supervision. Sturm, Applications of Narrative Theory in Supervision. Cooper, Ng, On Becoming an Emotionally Intelligent Counseling Supervisor. Culbreth, Brown, Epilogue.

October 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99130-8: $49.95

60 day examination copy available

New Edition!

Supervision in Clinical Practice A Practitioner’s Guide Second Edition Joyce Scaife, Independent consultant, clinical psychologist, UK With contributions from Francesca Inskipp, Brigid Proctor, Jon Scaife, and Sue Walsh “This second edition is a major revision and should be considered essential reading for those involved in expanding access to psychological therapy services... A source of much excellent and practical advice, written in an engaging and creative style.” - Professor Graham Turpin, University of

Sheffield, UK

This fully updated and expanded edition includes new chapters on issues of diversity and the managerial role of the supervisor in context. Packed with practical examples in the key areas of personal and professional development, Joyce Scaife and her contributors draw on three decades of clinical experience to explore frequently encountered dilemmas. Contents: Introduction. J. M. Scaife, J. A. Scaife, Supervision and Learning.

J. M. Scaife, Walsh, Personal Development and the Emotional Climate of Work. The Contracting Process and the Supervisory Relationship: Averting Pitfalls and Problems. Frameworks for Supervision. Proctor, Inskipp, Group Supervision. Ethical Dilemmas and Issues in Supervision. Supervision and Diversity. The Interface of Supervision and Management Roles. Use of Recordings and Other Technologies in Supervision. Live Supervision and Observation. Creative Approaches. The Influence of Different Models of Therapeutic Intervention on the Supervisory Process. Challenge and the Assessment Role. Outcome Studies of Supervision. Appendices. 2008: 424pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44999-1: $116.95 Pb: 978-0-415-45000-3: $44.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

professional issues and resources



IDM Supervision An Integrative Developmental Model for Supervising Counselors and Therapists Third Edition Cal D. Stoltenberg, University of Oklahoma, USA, and Brian W. McNeill, Washington State University, Pullman, USA This book is an updated and expanded presentation of the widely used Integrated Developmental Model of Supervision (IDM). In contrast to other volumes on clinical supervision, Stoltenberg and McNeill present a single comprehensive, time tested, and empirically investigated model of supervision rather than a broad summary of other existing or historical approaches. In addition to presenting a model of therapist development that spans beginning through advanced training, the book integrates theory and research from numerous perspectives including learning, cognition, and emotion as well as an up-to-date treatment of research directly addressing the supervision process. Contents: Theoretical Foundations. An Overview of the IDM. The Level 1

Therapist. The Level 2 Therapist. The Level 3 Therapist. The Supervisory Relationship. Nuts and Bolts of Supervision. Supervision Across Settings. Supervisor Development and Training. Ethical and Legal Issues. A Qualitative Examination of the IDM. Appendices. Septmber 2009: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5824-2: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5825-9: $39.95

Routledge Recommends! Special 15th Anniversary Edition!

Vital Information and Review Questions for the NCE, CPCE, and State Counseling Exams Howard Rosenthal, St. Louis Community College, Florissant Valley, USA This new edition of Vital Information and Review Questions for the NCE, CPCE, and State Counseling Exams sticks to the successful structure of the previous versions, each of which has demonstrated to be a valuable resource for anyone preparing for these difficult exams. Two new Discs have been added to this new edition, bringing the total to 20 audio CDs and over 20 hours of programming. The material covered on the CDs is arranged into nine major areas, containing explanations of terms, concepts, and interrelationships between subjects. Key definitions, theories and techniques are discussed, and appraisal, research, and evaluation methods are presented in an easily-understood format. The set also includes 325 tutorial questions, supplemented with additional information on all eight major areas of the National Counselor Examination and Counselor Preparation Comprehensive Examination. Contents: Part I: Vital Information CDs. Disc 1: Introduction. Research and Program Evaluation. Disc 2: Research and Program Evaluation Continued. Human Growth and Development. Disc 3: Human Growth and Development Continued; Social and Cultural Foundations. Disc 4: Counseling Theories and the Helping Relationship. Disc 5: Counseling Theories and the Helping Relationship Continued. Disc 6: Counseling Theories and the Helping Relationship Continued. Disc 7: Counseling

Theories and the Helping Relationship Continued; Group Counseling. Disc 8: Group Counseling Continued; Lifestyle and Career Development. Disc 9: Lifestyle and Career Development Continued; Appraisal of the Individual. Disc: 10: Appraisal of the Individual Continued; Marriage and Family Counseling; Ethics. Part II: Tutorial Questions and Answers CDs. Disc 1: Introduction; Questions 1-42. Disc 2: Questions 43-94. Disc 3: Questions 95-154. Disc 4: Questions 155-221. Disc 5: 222-290. Disc 6: 291-325. Part III: Special Purpose CDs. Disc 1: Final Overview and Last Minute Super Review Bootcamp. Disc 2: Test Anxiety Prevention. Disc 3: Cutting Edge Ethics. Disc 4: Ask Dr. Rosenthal. CD-ROM: 978-0-415-80141-6: May 2009: $110.00 Forthcoming!

On Becoming a Group Member Muhyiddin Shakoor, SUNY Brockport, New York, USA While there are many excellent books on the market on the subject of leading groups, Shakoor takes the simple yet insightful perspective that learning to be an effective group member is an important part of becoming an effective group leader. This book expands on the individual, practical, and experiential aspects of group work by focusing on the needs of the individual student as a participant, providing a counter-balance to current group literature. Each chapter is built around a case example to illustrate the concepts presented, and concludes with reflection questions. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Part II: Orientation Prologue, Part One:

Key Components of an Effective Member Mindset. Part III: Orientation Prologue, Part Two: Basic Strategies and Skills for Successful Involvement in the Group. Part IV: Utilizing Prologue Tips after Group Stage Chapters. Part V: Orientation Glossary. Part VI: Group Stage Chapters. Beginning Stage. Early Middle Stage. Late Middle Stage. Ending Stage (Termination). Multicultural Competency and Diversity. Leadership. A Word on Ethical Concerns. January 2010: 192pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96522-4: $27.95

Social Work / Crisis counseling Forthcoming!

Working in Social Work The Real World Guide to Practice Settings Jessica Rosenberg, Long Island University – Brooklyn Campus, New York, USA Working in Social Work provides graduate students going into the social work field with real world and practical information about what it is really like to work as a social worker. Each chapter presents a true picture of what to expect as a front-line social worker in the given practice setting, consistently formatted in the following sections for ease of reference and comparison across settings: overview, critical issues, joys and challenges, field forecast, and resources. The resources section is tailored specifically to each practice setting, including relevant books and other traditional print materials as well as hard-to-find online resources. Contents: Social Work in Addictions. Social Work with Older Adults. Social Work with Child Welfare. Social Work in Criminal Justice. Domestic Violence and Social Work. Social Work in Health Care. Social Work with Housing and Homelessness. International Social Work. Social Work and Mental Illness. Social Work with the Military. Social Work with Palliative and End-of-Life Care. Social Work and Private Practice. School Social Work.

September 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96551-4: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96552-1: $24.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

social work / crisis counseling

Routledge Recommends!

People in Crisis Clinical and Diversity Perspectives Sixth Edition Lee Ann Hoff, Life Crisis Institute, USA, Bonnie Joyce Hallisey, Curry College, Massachusetts, USA, and Miracle Hoff, Drake Counseling Services, North Dakota, USA The first edition of People in Crisis published in 1978, and it established success as a comprehensive and user-friendly text for health and social service professionals. The book and its following incarnations included critical life events and life cycle transition challenges, clearly pointing out the interconnections between such events, stressful development changes, and their potential for growth but also danger of suicide and/or violence toward others. This new edition includes new case examples and expanded coverage of cross-cultural content, including “commonalities and differences” in origins, manifestations, and crisis responses. The authors illustrate the application of crisis concepts, assessment, and intervention strategies across a wide range of health and mental health settings, as well as at home, school, workplace, and in the community. Each chapter contains a closing summary that includes discussion questions, references, and data sources for maximum application and learning. Contents: Part I: The Understanding and Practice of Crisis

Intervention. Crisis Theory and Practice: Introduction and Overview. Understanding People in Crisis. Identifying People at Risk. Helping People in Crisis. Family and Social Network Strategies During Crisis. Part II: Crisis Related to Developmental and Situational Transitional States. Stress and Change During Life Passages. Threats to Health and Self-image. Threats to Occupational and Residential Security. Part III: Suicide, Violence, and Catastrophic Events. Suicide and Other Self-destructive Behavior: Understanding and Assessment. Helping Self-destructive People and Survivors of Suicide. The Crisis of Victimization by Violence. The Violent or Abusive Person: Individual and Sociocultural Factors. Violence and Crisis from Disaster. February 2009: 480pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99075-2: $49.95

60 day examination copy available Forthcoming!

Creating Spiritual and Psychological Resilience Integrating Care in Disaster Relief Work Edited by Grant H. Brenner, Albert Einstein College of Medicine, Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York, USA, Daniel H. Bush, City University of New York, USA, and Joshua Moses, National Institute of Mental Health, New York, USA Creating Spiritual and Psychological Resilience explores the interface between spiritual and psychological care in the context of disaster recovery work, drawing upon recent disasters including but not limited to, the experiences of September 11, 2001. Each three sections, structured around the cycle of disaster response, focus on the relevant


phase of disaster recovery work. In each section selected topics combining spiritual and mental health factors are examined; when possible, sections are co-written by a spiritual care provider and a mental health care provider with appropriate expertise. Existing interdisciplinary collaborations, creative partnerships, gaps in care, and needed interdisciplinary work are identified and addressed. Contents: Part I: Foundational Considerations for Effective Collaboration. Brenner, Fundamentals of Collaboration. Moses, An Anthropologist Among Disaster Caregivers. Buechler, Disaster Relief: Emotional Values. Covello, Principles of Risk Communication. Pandya, Ethical and Legal Considerations in Post-disaster Interdisciplinary Collaborations. Harris, Thornton, Engdahl, The Psychospiritual Impact of Disaster – An Overview. Part II: Collaboration in Action: Tensions, Challenges and Opportunities. Daniels, Collaborating with a Community College in PostKatrina New Orleans: Organizational and Personal Reflections. Jarry, Working as an Ally to Underserved Communities: The Role of Faith, Coordination and Partnerships in the Development of the NYC 9/11 Unmet Needs Roundtable. Smith, Taylor, Larkin, North, Ryan, Holmes, On Re-entering the Chapel: Models for Collaborations between Psychiatrists, Communities of Faith and Faithbased Providers after Hurricane Katrina. Gensler, Collaboration in Working with Children Affected by Disaster. Berliner, Ryan, Taylor, Making Referrals: Effective Collaboration between Mental Health and Spiritual Care Practitioners. Shah, “To Do No Harm,” Spiritual Care and Ethnomedical Competence: Four Cases of Psychosocial Trauma Recovery for the 2004 Tsunami and 2005 Earthquake in South Asia. Part III: Collaboratively Nurturing Resilience After Catastrophic Trauma. Ellison, Katz, Rituals, Routines, Resilience. Danieli, Fundamentals of Working with (Re)traumatized Populations. Wyatt, Reaching Out to Create Moments of Communal Healing: Personal Reflections from the Edge of the 9/11 Abyss. Milstein, Manierre, Normative and Diagnostic Reactions to Disaster: Clergy and Clinician Collaboration to Facilitate a Continuity of Care.

September 2009: 260pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3454-0: $59.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3455-7: $39.00

60 day examination copy available

Progressive Community Organizing A Critical Approach for a Globalizing World Loretta Pyles, University at Albany, State University of New York, USA

This interdisciplinary textbook offers a comprehensive view of the central issues facing progressive community organizers who seek to mobilize those negatively impacted by local, national, and global social policies and practices. Intended for both undergraduate and graduate students in social work, it aims to articulate the depth of the subject by introducing students to the philosophical, political, and sociological theories that inform community organizing and advocacy. Contents: Part I: Foundations of Community Organizing. Introduction. The Self-aware Organizer. Theories and Ideas for the Progressive Organizer. Learning From Social Movements. Critical Organizing Frameworks. Part II: Tools for Community Organizing. Organizing People: Constituencies and Coalitions. Toward Empowering Organizations. Language Matters: Issue Framing and Communication. Tactics for Change. Part III: Enduring and Emergent Issues in Organizing. Toward Solidarity: Understanding Oppression and Working with Identity. Religious and Spiritual Aspects of Organizing. Global Justice: Organization and Resistance.

January 2009: 208pp. Pb: 978-0-415-95780-9: $44.95

60 day examination copy available

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at


social work / crisis counseling

Community Psychology in Practice An Oral History Through the Stories of Five Community Psychologists

Edited by James G. Kelly, University of Illinois at Chicago, USA, and Anna V. Song, University of California, Merced, USA Community Psychology in Practice is a unique examination of how community psychology evolved through the years. Five highly respected community psychologists recount their personal histories telling how they went from academia to careers disseminating principles of community psychology. Newer members to the field of psychology can trace how these leaders came to pursue careers in community psychology. Contents: Introduction. Mulvey, Reconceiving Myself: Challenging

Conundrums and Creating Feminist Community Psychology. Morgan, Psychology in the Community: A Community Psychologist Looks at 30 Years in Community Mental Health. Serrano-García, To Be Different: The Challenge of Social-community Psychology. Wolff, My Life as a Community Activist. Swift, Odyssey of a Community Psychologist Practitioner. Commentary. Popkin, Response to Autobiographical Essays by Community Psychologist. Watts, Community Psychologists Who Go Beyond the Profession: A Commentary. Hall, Reflections on Calling and Careers in Community Psychology. 2008: 124pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3763-3: $60.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3764-0: $26.00



Exploring the Spiritual Paths for Counselors and Psychotherapists David R. Matteson, in private practice, USA

Exploring the Spiritual provides cognitive information grounded in the empirical findings of social science, as well as experiential material which encourages the counselors’ own spiritual quest. This invaluable source clarifies the interface between the counselor’s spirituality and the client’s, and allows the spiritual dimension to emerge appropriately in the counseling process. Exploring the Spiritual provides challenging questions and exercises that lead the counselor or psychotherapist through a personal exploration to attain the maturity of development needed to facilitate the client’s spiritual growth. Contents: Marcia, Foreword. Introduction: Spirituality and the Counselor’s Connection with the Client. Part I: Assessing Spiritual Health and Development. What is Healthy Spirituality? An Overview. Models of Spiritual Development. Part II: Areas of Crisis. The Crisis in Values. The Crisis in Belief: Science, Spirituality, and Authority. The Body, Passion, and Spirituality. Spiritual Implications of Sexual Orientation. Overcoming Barriers, Dealing with Differences. Why So Much Suffering? Part III: Helping and Healing. Staying with Process. Continuing the Spiritual Journey: Reaching for a Spirit-filled Life. Part IV: Experiential Approaches. Centering the Self. Focusing on Others. Seeking the Spiritual Dimension. Appendix: Additional Resources.

2008: 504pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3672-8: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3673-5: $59.95

60 day examination copy available

Spirituality in Clinical Practice

Coming Out, Coming Home

New Dimensions in Psychotherapy and Counseling

Making Room for Gay Spirituality in Therapy

Second Edition

Kenneth Burr, minister and Marriage and Family Therapist

New Edition!

Len Sperry, Florida Atlantic University, Boca Raton, USA Thoroughly updated and revised, this second edition of Spirituality in Clinical Practice includes perspectives not found in other texts, such as a developmental perspective integrating moral and spiritual development, the interface of spiritual development with personality functioning, and insights from object relations, self psychology and transpersonal psychotherapy as they relate to various spiritual traditions and contemporary spiritual practices. This brief, readerfriendly text is written in a highly accessible style and is destined to set a precedent for excellence in the emerging field of spirituality in clinical practice or psychotherapy and counseling. Contents: Part I: Spirituality in Clinical Practice: Theory. The Spiritual Dimension in Clinical Practice. Dimensional Perspectives in Spirituality. Developmental Models in Spirituality. Spiritual Dynamics, Crises and Emergencies in Clinical Practice. Part II: Spirituality in Clinical Practice: Practice. Establishing and Maintaining a Positive Therapeutic Relationship. Assessment and Case Conceptualization. Psychotherapeutic Interventions. Psychospiritual and Spiritual Interventions. Termination and Evaluation. Cultural Considerations. Ethical and Legal Considerations. Part III: Spirituality in Clinical Practice: Clinicians and the Future. How Clinicians Incorporate Spirituality in their Personal and Professional Lives. Spirituality in Counseling and Psychotherapy: Future Prospects.

March 2010: 275pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95724-3: $34.95

60 day examination copy available for further books by Len Sperry please see pages 7, 16

Coming Out, Coming Home increases the potential for spiritual growth and development in our society. Many books have been written and many opinions aired about gay rights and pro-gay theology, but not many have focused upon providing people with an opportunity to enlarge their own belief systems to embrace gay spirituality while still being true advocates of Scripture. Currently many people have felt the need to split the personal from their professional lives in order to intensify their job performance and maintain proper boundaries. But in doing so, many have also split off their soul life from their work life, forcing spirituality to go underground which often results in tension and disharmony. Because spirituality is all about connection, we know that when people lack the opportunities and richness of deeper connections, soul healing is often inhibited. Here readers will find a deeper connection with themselves and others as they experience formerly rigid boundaries between God and sexual minorities begin to relax. Contents: Thank God for Change! Spiritual Connections. Development of Sexuality and Spirituality. Hindrances to Gay Spirituality. Embracing the Possibility of Gay Spirituality. Coming Out is a Spiritual Experience. The Search for an Inclusive Theology. Research Resources.

March 2009: 291pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3842-5: $79.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3843-2: $39.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20



Guide to Ministering to Alzheimer’s Patients and Their Families Pat Otwell, served for many years on the cutting edge of Alzheimer’s ministry

The Guide to Ministering to Alzheimer’s Patients and Their Families examines the importance of spirituality in dealing with the everyday challenges of this mysterious disease. Not a “how-to” manual with step-by-step instructions or tried and true formulas, this unique book instead examines the essential elements of ministering to dementia patients based on the first-hand accounts of family members living through pain and uncertainty. The book explores the stages of Alzheimer’s, grief and guilt, available resources, and implications of spiritual care for patients and families. Contents: Help! Alzheimer’s Disease. Desire to Minister to Alzheimer’s Patients and Families. Theological Understanding. Grief. Guilt. Alzheimer’s Patients and Communication. Alzheimer’s Ministry Coordinator. Implications of Spiritual Care for Patients. Implications of Spiritual Care for Families. Ethical Issues. Models for Ministry. Pastoral Potpourri. Faith, Hope, and Love. Remembering Blessings During Difficult Times. Resources. Appendices.

2008: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-2902-7: $69.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-2903-4: $49.95


Decision Making Near the End of Life Issues, Developments, and Future Directions Edited by James L. Werth, Jr., University of Akron, Ohio, USA, and Dean Blevins, University of Arkansas, Little Rock, USA

Decision Making Near the End of Life provides a comprehensive overview of the recent developments that have impacted decisionmaking processes within the field of end-of-life care. The most current developments in all aspects of major underlying issues such as public attitudes, the impact of media, bioethics, and legal precedent provide the background information for the text. The authors examine various aspects of end-of-life choices and decision-making, including communication (between and among family, medical personnel, the dying person), advance directives, and the emergence of hospice and palliative care institutions. 2008: 408pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95448-8: $49.95

Series in Death, Dying and Bereavement

for further books on Gerontology please see page 66

Rediscovering Confession The Practice of Forgiveness and Where it Leads David A. Steere, in private practice, Louisville, USA

Rediscovering Confession is about recovering the experience of confession, in danger now of becoming a lost art. It identifies four elements present in psychotherapy and confession: a state of heightened selfawareness, a growing realization that our predicament points in some meaningful direction beyond itself, the necessity to make a relevant response to our situation, and a potential for spiritual encounter that accompanies the process. Each chapter contains a section devoted to practice, with exercises for individual contemplation and experimentation, guidelines for forming a confessional partnership, directions for conducting discussions in a study group, and ways to organize a small confessional group. Contents: Honest Confession. The Full Confessional Experience. Some

Classical Confessions: Augustine and Patrick. More Confessions: Tolstoy and Vonnegut. The Trouble with Adam. The Confessional Relationship. Women in Confession: Julian of Norwich and Margery Kemp. Contemporary Women Confessors: Karen Armstrong and Elaine Pagels. The Enneagram. The Truth of the Matter. More Confessors: Bill Wilson and Recovery. Predicament and Presence in Practice. Forgiveness and Confessional Relationships. Changing Our Mind. The Compassionate Community.

also in the series Leong/Leach, Eds.: Suicide Among Racial and Ethnic Minority Groups: Theory, Research, and Practice Hb: 978-0-415-95532-4: 2007: 352pp. $40.00

Rogers, Ed.: The Art of Grief: The Use of Expressive Arts in a Grief Support Group Pb: 978-0-415-95535-5: 2007: 224pp. $31.95

Berger: Music of the Soul: Composing Life Out of Loss Pb: 978-0-415-95481-5: 2006: 240pp. $34.95

Katz/Johnson, Eds.: When Professionals Weep: Emotional and Countertransference Responses in End-of-Life Care Hb: 978-0-415-95094-7: 2006: 336pp. $75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95095-4: 2006: 336pp. $34.95

Rosenblatt/Wallace: African American Grief Hb: 978-0-415-95151-7: 2005: 224pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95152-4: 2005: 224pp. $29.95

Jeffreys: Helping Grieving People – When Tears Are Not Enough: A Handbook for Care Providers Pb: 978-0-415-94603-2: 2004: 376pp. $41.95

Silverman: Widow to Widow: How the Bereaved Help One Another, Second Edition Pb: 978-0-415-94749-7: 2004: 288pp. $32.95

May 2009: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99746-1: $44.95

60 day examination copy available

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at




Bereavement Studies of Grief in Adult Life Fourth Edition Colin Murray Parkes, St Christopher’s Hospice, UK, Life President of Cruse Bereavement Care, in 1996 awarded an OBE for services to bereaved people, and Holly G. Prigerson, Harvard Medical School, Boston, USA The loss of a loved one is one of the most painful experiences that most of us will ever have to face in our lives. This book recognises that there is no single solution to the problems of bereavement but that an understanding of grief can help the bereaved to realise that they are not alone in their experience. Long recognised as the most authoritative work of its kind, this new edition has been revised and extended to take into account recent research findings on both sides of the Atlantic. Parkes and Prigerson include additional information about the different circumstances of bereavement including traumatic losses, disasters, and complicated grief, as well as providing details on how social, religious, and cultural influences determine how we grieve. Bereavement provides guidance on preparing for the loss of a loved one, and coping after they have gone. It also discusses how to identify the minority in whom bereavement may lead to impairment of physical and/or mental health and how to ensure they get the help they need. Contents: Bowlby, Foreword to the First Edition. Lifton, Foreword to the Fourth Edition. Introduction. The Cost of Commitment. The Broken Heart. Trauma. Attachment and Loss. Mitigation. Anger and Guilt. Changing the Assumptive World. Complicated Grief. Determinants of Grief I: Kinship, Gender and Age. Determinants of Grief II: Mode of Death. Determinants of Grief III: Personal Vulnerability. Determinants of Grief IV: Social, Religious and Cultural Influences. Helping the Bereaved I: Bereavement Support – History and Evaluation. Helping the Bereaved II: Types of Help for Types of Problem. Helping the Bereaved III: Sources of Help. Reactions to Other Types of Loss. Disasters. Appendices. Organisation in the UK and USA offering help to Bereaved People. Recommended Further Reading.

November 2009: 408pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45118-5: $70.00

New in Paperback!

enables us to bring together knowledge of childhood attachments and problems of bereavement, resulting in a new way of thinking about love, bereavement and other losses. Selected Contents: Part I: Attachment and Loss. Part II: Patterns of Attachment and Patterns of Grief. Part III: Other Influences on Attachment and Loss. Part IV: Disorders of Attachment, Other Psychiatric Problems and their Prevention and Treatment.

2008: 448pp. Hb: 978-0-415-39041-5: 2006: $62.95 Pb: 978-0-415-47718-5: $34.95

New Edition!

Hospice and Palliative Care The Essential Guide Second Edition Stephen R. Connor, Vice President of National Hospice and Palliative Care Organization and the National Hospice Foundation (NHPCO) Published in partnership with the National Hospice and Palliative Care Organization (NHPCO) This book provides professionals with a comprehensive overview of the practice of hospice, as well as the challenges faced by and the future direction of the hospice movement. Connor combines clinical, administrative, and research considerations in his analysis. Chapters address key topics such as the goals and importance of community involvement, outcome measurement, and the manner in which hospices address death, grief, and bereavement. Connor also provides a detailed analysis of the business side of hospice and offers strategies for proper management. Contents: What is Hospice and Palliative Care? The Interdisciplinary Team. Symptom Management and Physical Care. Psychosocial and Spiritual Care. Grief and Bereavement. Community Education. Managing Hospice and Palliative Care. Hospice and Palliative Care in the US Health Care System. Society and Denial. A Right to Die? How Palliative Care is Unique in the Health Care System. How Good is Hospice and Palliative Care? Hospice and Palliative Care Around the World. The Future of Hospice and Palliative Care.

April 2009: 278pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99356-2: $34.95

Love and Loss

60 day examination copy available

The Roots of Grief and its Complications


Colin Murray Parkes, St Christopher’s Hospice, UK, Life President of Cruse Bereavement Care, in 1996 awarded an OBE for services to bereaved people

An Evidence Informed Approach for Health and Social Care Practitioners

“Love and Loss manages to be both academic and written in prose that dances with love around its subject.” - Bel Mooney, The Times Loving and grieving are two sides of the same coin: we cannot have one without risking the other. Only by understanding the nature and pattern of loving can we begin to understand the problems of grieving. Conversely, the loss of a loved person can teach us much about the nature of love. Love and Loss, the result of a lifetime’s work, has important implications for the study of attachment and bereavement. In this volume, Colin Murray Parkes reports his innovative research that

Grief, Loss and Bereavement Care Peter Wimpenny, Robert Gordon University, Aberdeen, UK This invaluable text draws together a comprehensive evidence-base for supporting grieving people from a wide range of research, and applies it to a health and social care context. Accessible and practical throughout, each chapter identifies key recommendations from the research and includes thinking points to help the reader apply them to practice. An overview chapter examines theoretical perspectives and defines key concepts, such as grief, loss, bereavement, mourning and bereavement care. Part one explores bereavement across the lifespan, from childhood to older people. Part two looks at different interventions and care settings.

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

GRIEF AND BEREAVEMENT Contents: Introduction. Part I: Bereavement Across the Lifespan. Bereavement in Childhood. Parental Bereavement. Bereavement and Families. Bereavement and Older People. Part II: Interventions and Care Settings. Interventions for the Bereaved. Bereavement and Community Care. Bereavement and Acute Care. Bereavement and Cancer/Palliative Care. Bereavement and Occupational Support. Bereavement in Old Age Settings. Part III: Areas of Risk. Bereavement and Mental Health. Traumatic Death and Bereavement. Bereavement and HIV/AIDS. Bereavement and Learning Disability. Spiritual/Cultural Aspects of Bereavement. Overall Messages.


Routledge Recommends!

Developing Resilience A Cognitive-Behavioural Approach

January 2010: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46750-6: $139.95 Pb: 978-0-415-46751-3: $39.95

Michael Neenan, Centre for Stress Management, London, UK

When Death Enters the Therapeutic Space Existential Perspectives in Psychotherapy and Counselling

Edited by Laura Barnett, in private practice, UK “Much can be learnt from this book about what has been said on this topic by philosophers and practitioners alike... the counsellor and therapist who are confronted with clients who have been faced with their mortality will find exactly what they need to approach this challenge with due care, consideration and philosophical clarity.” - Professor Emmy van Deurzen, From the Foreword

Although it is a natural and inescapable part of life, death is a subject that is often neglected in psychotherapeutic literature and training. In When Death Enters the Therapeutic Space Laura Barnett and her contributors offer us insights into working with mortality in the therapeutic encounter. Taking an existential perspective, the book brings together a variety of client groups, all of whom have experienced a confrontation with mortality, and encourages the reader to engage with and reflect upon the subject of death. Although this may initially evoke anxiety and distress, Barnett and her contributors introduce the reader to the ‘vitality of death’ (Koestenbaum): an energy and focus that can come from confronting our greatest fears and anxieties, including the anxiety aroused by our own mortality. Contents: van Deurzen, Foreword. Barnett, Introduction. Barnett, The

Philosophical Roots of Existential Therapies. Lockett, Reflections on Cancer Counselling. Horne, HIV as a Mirror to Life. Barnett, Surviving Intensive Care. Oakley, Creating Safety for the Client (The London 7/7 Bombings). Blackwell, Mortality and Meaning in Work with Refugee Survivors of Torture and Organized Violence. Heaton, Reflections on Suicide and Despair. Smith-Pickard, The Experience of Working with Patients with a Short Prognosis. Diffley, Fife, Lockett, Palliative Care, Pastoral Care and Counselling – Working Together, Learning from One Another. Young, Working With Bereavement. Chalmers, Working with Bereaved Parents. Sorensen, And When the Therapist or Supervisor Dies. Barnett, Dialogues: Buber, Rogers, Levinas and the Therapeutic Relationship. Barnett, The Therapeutic Relationship, When Death Enters the Therapeutic Space. 2008: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41654-2: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41655-9: $35.95


“In this scholarly, yet practical book, Michael Neenan shows how you can develop skills for managing life challenges in a way that strengthens and empowers you. For anyone who wants to find inner strength in the face of adversity, this book is for you.” - Professor Alan Carr, Director of Clinical Psychology Training, University College Dublin, Ireland

Some individuals emerge from grim experiences stronger in mind and spirit than others who suffered the same fate. In this book, Michael Neenan suggests that it is the meanings that we attach to events, and not the events themselves, that determine our reactions to them; this is why different people can react to the same event in a variety of ways. Developing Resilience shows how people can find constructive ways of dealing with their difficulties by using the techniques of cognitive behaviour therapy as well as listening to the wisdom of those who have prevailed over adversity. This book provides useful guidance and advice on topics including: • managing negative emotions • distinguishing between what is within and outside of your control • learning from past experiences • developing self-belief • increasing your level of frustration tolerance • maintaining a resilient outlook. This book will be essential for anyone trying to find constructive ways forward in difficult times, as well as counsellors, coaches and therapists looking for guidance in helping their clients. Contents: What is Resilience? Attitude: The Heart of Resilience. Attitudes That Undermine Resilience Building. Developing Resilience. Strengths Underpinning Resilience. Resilience in the Workplace. Resilience in Relationships. Resilience in Dealing with Difficult People. Maintaining Resilience. An Overview of Resilience.

August 2009: 208pp. Pb: 978-0-415-48068-0: $21.95


Life Coaching A Cognitive-Behavioural Approach

Michael Neenan, and Windy Dryden Pb: 978-1-58391-138-9 : 2001: 200pp. $23.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

the cbt distinctive features series


Behavioral Activation Distinctive Features

Jonathan W. Kanter, University of WisconsinMilwaukee, USA, Andrew M. Busch, Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Rhode Island, USA, and Laura C. Rusch, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, USA “All therapists who treat depression should read this excellent overview of behavioural activation. The authors describe an integrated model of depression and a stepped care approach in the application of the behavioural activation. There are good clinical examples and descriptions of how to apply the principles in practice.” - David Veale, Institute of Psychiatry, Kings College London, UK Behavioral Activation: Distinctive Features clarifies the fundamental theoretical and practical features of behavioral activation. The book includes numerous case examples and transcribed segments from therapy sessions as well as outlining behavior terminology and concepts using straightforward terms and examples so that all therapists can see the utility and practical value of this approach. Contents: Part I: The Distinctive Theoretical Features of Behavioral

Activation. A Distinctive History. A Distinct Definition of Human Behavior. Distinct Terminology. A Distinct Philosophy and Theory. The Distinct Behavioral ABC Model. The Ubiquity of Positive Reinforcement. The Meaning of Life. Depression and Positive Reinforcement. The Ubiquity of Negative Reinforcement. The Role of Punishment. An (Almost) Complete Behavioral Model of Depression. The Role of Cognition. The Role of Insight. Activation and Acceptance. Part II: The Distinctive Practical Features of Behavioral Activation. A Distinct Structure. The Initial Treatment Rationale. Activity Monitoring. Values Assessment. Simple Activation. The Importance of Homework. Functional Assessment. Postit Notes and Other Stimulus Control Procedures. Skills Training. Contingency Management. Mindful Valued Activation. Ending Therapy. Thinking Functionally about Suicide and Medication. The Therapeutic Relationship in BA. A Distinct Flexible Framework: Adaptations for Minorities. The Promise of BA. June 2009: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44653-2: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44654-9: $17.00

The CBT Distinctive Features Series

Beck’s Cognitive Therapy Distinctive Features

Frank Wills, Independent Practitioner and Researcher, UK Beck’s Cognitive Therapy: Distinctive Features explores the key contributions made by Aaron T. Beck to the development of cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT). This book provides a concise account of Beck’s work against a background of his personal and professional history. The author, Frank Wills, considers the theory and practice of Beck’s cognitive therapy by firstly examining his contribution to the understanding of psychopathology, and going on to explore Beck’s suggestions about the best methods of treatment. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Theory. Prelude: Beck and his Group. Cognitive

Therapy is Organised Around a Formulation. Different Problem Areas in Cognitive Therapy are Marked Out by Specific Cognitive Themes. Cognitive Therapy Varies According to the Areas to which it is Applied. Cognitive Functioning is Organised Around the Existence of Deep Schemas. It is Helpful to Understand the Evolutionary Underpinnings of Psychological Problems. Beck has Described a Variety of Levels and Types of Cognition. Cognitive Distortions Play a Key Role in Emotional Problems but are not Necessarily ‘Irrational’. Images Also Contain

Key Elements of Cognitions Distortions. Cognition, Emotion and Behaviour Interact with Mutual and Reciprocal Influence on Each Other. Safety Behaviours, Including Avoidance, Reassurance Seeking and Hyper-vigilance, Play a Crucial Role in Maintaining Anxiety. Strategies that Address Negative Attention Bias Strengthen the Cognitive Therapy Model. Meta-Cognition – The Way People Think about Thinking – Also Influences the Way They Feel and Behave. Promoting Mindfulness of and Mindful Attention to Negative Thoughts is Likely to Form a Major Part of Cognitive Therapy in Future. Beckian Epistemology has a Clear Process for Developing Appropriate Therapeutic Knowledge for Cognitive Therapists to Follow. Protocol Development and the Specification of Skills have Proved Important Factors in Linking CBT Theory and Practice. Conclusion to Part I. Part II: Practice. Beck’s Cognitive Therapy – A Principled Model: 15 Points about the Practice Model. Cognitive Therapists Use Formulation to Focus Therapeutic Work. Cognitive Therapists, Like Other Therapists, Use Formulation to Tackle Interpersonal and Alliance Issues. Cognitive Therapy Requires a Sound Therapeutic Relationship. Cognitive Therapists Stress the Importance of Collaboration in the Therapeutic Relationship. Cognitive Therapy is Brief and Time-limited. Cognitive Therapy is Structured and Directional. Cognitive Therapy is Problem- and Goal-oriented. Cognitive Therapy Initially Emphasises the Present Time Focus. Cognitive Therapy uses an Educational Model. Homework is a Central Feature of Cognitive Therapy. Cognitive Therapists Teach Clients to Evaluate and Modify their Thoughts. Cognitive Therapy uses Various Methods to Change Cognitive Content. Cognitive Therapy uses a Variety of Methods to Change Cognitive Processes. Cognitive Therapy uses a Variety of Methods to Promote Behavioural Change. Cognitive Therapists have Developed the Measurement of Therapist Competence. Summary and Review of Part II. Conclusion. April 2009: 192pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43951-0: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43952-7: $17.95

The CBT Distinctive Features Series

Constructivist Psychotherapy Distinctive Features

Robert A. Neimeyer, University of Memphis, Tennessee, USA Constructivist psychotherapy focuses on the meaning that clients attribute to their world, and the way that this shapes their life and contributes to their difficulties. In this book, Robert A. Neimeyer, a leading figure in the field, provides a clear and accessible explanation of the key features of this approach. Constructivist Psychotherapy: Distinctive Features concentrates on the 30 key commitments that distinguish constructivism from other cognitive behavioural perspectives. Divided into two sections – Theory and Practice – this straightforward book is illustrated throughout with case material and recent research findings. Contents: Part I: Theory. Constructing a World. The Function of Fiction.

Personal Knowledge. Living on the Frontier. Redefining Reality. Living in Language. Deconstructing the Self. Systems Within Systems: The Epigenetic Model. Contextualizing Disorder. Part II: Practice. Laddering Toward Core Concerns. Mapping Social Ecologies of Meaning with the Bowtie Interview. Charting Networks of Constructs Using Repertory Grids. Assessing Emotional and Relational Themes Using Self-confrontation. Reflecting on the Self Via Mirror Time. Attending from Self to Other. Setting Goals. Privileging Experience over Explanation. Catching the Wave. Harnessing the Power of the Poetic. Seeking Sufficient Structure. Tracking Evolving Goals. Fostering Client Reflexivity. Befriending the Resistance. Considering Homework. Articulating the Pro-symptom Position. Re-authoring the Self-narrative. Celebrating Termination. Evaluating Whether Psychotropic Medication is Part of the Solution, or Part of the Problem. Situating Constructivist Therapy in the Wider World. Constructing an Integrative Practice. April 2009: 168pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44233-6: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44234-3: $17.95

The CBT Distinctive Features Series

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

the cbt distinctive features series

Metacognitive Therapy

Distinctive Features Peter Fisher, University of Liverpool, UK, and Adrian Wells, University of Manchester, UK “This book provides a skilful mix of theory and practice that should be essential reading for all wanting to learn more about MCT... I highly recommend it.” - Hans M. Nordahl, Norwegian University of Science and Technology, Trondheim, Norway

Metacognitive Therapy: Distinctive Features is an introduction to the theoretical foundations and therapeutic principles of metacognitive therapy. Divided into two sections, Theory and Practice and using thirty key points, the authors explore how metacognitive therapy can allow people to escape from repetitive thinking patterns that often lead to prolonged psychological distress. This book is a valuable resource for both students and practitioners wishing to develop a basic understanding of metacognitive therapy and how it compares and contrasts with traditional forms of cognitive behavioural therapy. March 2009: 152pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43498-0: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43499-7: $17.95

Dialectical Behaviour Therapy Distinctive Features Michaela A. Swales, University of Wales, Bangor, UK, and Heidi L. Heard, Consultant and Supervisor, St. Louis, USA

Dialectical Behaviour Therapy (DBT) is a psychotherapeutic approach designed particularly to treat the problems of chronically suicidal individuals with borderline personality disorder (BPD). The therapy articulates a series of principles that effectively guide clinicians in responding to suicidal and other behaviours that challenge them when treating this population. Dialectical Behaviour Therapy highlights 30 distinctive features of the treatment and uses extensive clinical examples to demonstrate how the theory translates into practice. In Part I: The Distinctive Theoretical Features of DBT, the authors introduce us to the three foundations on which the treatment rests – behaviourism, Zen and dialectics – and how these integrate. In Part II: The Distinctive Practical Features of DBT, Swales and Heard describe both how the therapy applies these principles to the treatment of clients with borderline personality disorder and elucidate the distinctive conceptual twists in the application of cognitive and behavioural procedures within the treatment. February 2009: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44457-6: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44458-3: $17.95

The CBT Distinctive Features Series

Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy Distinctive Features Rebecca Crane, University of Wales, Bangor, UK

“A clear account of what MBCT is, both in its theoretical perspectives and its actual practices. Written in accessible language, it is an extraordinary achievement that will be highly valued by both participants in mindfulness classes and their teachers.” - Mark Williams, From the Foreword This book provides a basis for understanding the key theoretical and practical features of MBCT. Focusing on a mindfulness-based cognitive therapy programme that is offered in a group context to those who are vulnerable to depressive relapses, the text is divided into 30 distinctive features that characterise the approach. 2008: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44501-6: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44502-3: $17.95

The CBT Distinctive Features Series

The CBT Distinctive Features Series


Rational Emotive Behaviour Therapy Distinctive Features Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK

This accessible and direct guide introduces the reader to REBT while indicating how it is different from other approaches within the broad cognitive behavioural therapy spectrum. Divided into two sections; The Distinctive Theoretical Features of REBT and The Distinctive Practical Features of REBT, this book presents concise, straightforward information in 30 key points derived from the author’s own experience in the field. 2008: 160pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43085-2: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43086-9: $17.95

The CBT Distinctive Features Series

Forthcoming in the Series Compassion-Focused Therapy Distinctive Features Paul Gilbert Hb: 978-0-415-44806-2: February 2010: 160pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44807-9: February 2010: 160pp. $17.95

Schema Therapy Distinctive Features Eshkol Rafaeli, David P. Bernstein, and Jeffrey Young Hb: 978-0-415-46298-3: May 2010: 160pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46299-0: May 2010: 160pp. $17.95

Acceptance and Commitment Therapy Distinctive Features Frank Bond, and Paul Flaxman Hb: 978-0-415-45065-2: June 2010: 160pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45066-9: June 2010: 160pp. $17.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at


How to Think and Intervene Like an REBT Therapist Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK

Trainee therapists often stick rigidly to the therapeutic guidelines that are taught to them in the lecture theatre, or adopted from a book, regardless of their approach. How to Think and Intervene Like an REBT Therapist provides the trainee with an opportunity to discover how experienced therapists think, and how their thoughts influence their interventions when using REBT. In this book, Windy Dryden compares the thinking and intervening characteristics of experienced REBT therapists with the actions of trainees making errors typical of people at an introductory level. By using clinical vignettes, case scenarios and verbatim dialogue he demonstrates how REBT therapists can make better use of the work alliance between themselves, their clients and their trainees, and use REBT more flexibly in practice. Contents: Introduction. Thinking and Intervening Related to Engaging

Clients in REBT. Thinking and Intervening Related to Placing Client Problems in Context. Thinking and Intervening Related to Emotional “C’s”. Thinking and Intervening Related to “A”. Thinking and Intervening Related to “B”. Thinking and Intervening Related to Disturbance. Thinking and Intervening Related to Goals. Thinking and Intervening Related to Explaining the Process of Change. Thinking and Intervening Related to Disputing. Thinking and Intervening Related to Homework Assignments. Thinking and Intervening Related to Dealing with Obstacles to Change. Thinking and Intervening Related to Maintaining Change. June 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48793-1: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48795-5: $32.95

Practical Clinical Guidebooks series

cognitive behavior therapy

Understanding Emotional Problems The REBT Perspective Windy Dryden, Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK Understanding Emotional Problems provides an accurate understanding of the REBT perspective on eight major emotional problems for which help is sought: anxiety, depression, shame, guilt, unhealthy anger, hurt, unhealthy jealousy and unhealthy envy.

Rather than discussing treatment methods, Windy Dryden encourages the reader to accurately understand these problems and suggests that a clear, correct understanding of each disorder will provide a firm foundation for effective treatment. This concise, straightforward text presents each emotional problem in a similar way, allowing the reader to compare and contrast the similarities and differences between problems. Understanding Emotional Problems will be essential reading for therapists both in training and in practice.

Cognitive Behavioral Therapy of Social Anxiety Disorder Evidence-Based and Disorder Specific Treatment Techniques Stefan G. Hofmann, and Michael W. Otto, both at Boston University, Massachusetts, USA

CBT has been demonstrated to be the most effective form of treatment for social phobia, but research has shown that conventional CBT principles and general interventions fall short of the mark. With this in mind, Hofmann and Otto have composed an organized treatment approach that includes specifically designed interventions to strengthen the relevant CBT strategies. This volume builds upon empirical research to address the psychopathology and heterogeneity of social phobia, creating a series of specific interventions with numerous case examples. Contents: Description of Disorder. Overall Description of Treatment Strategy. Session by Session Interventions. Research Basis. Clinical Cases. Complicating Factors. Maintenance and Follow-up Strategies. 2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95402-0: $85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95403-7: $27.95

Series: Practical Clinical Guidebooks

Also in the Series Perkins et al.: Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Smoking Cessation Hb: 978-0-415-95462-4: 2007: 224pp. $85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95463-1: 2007: 224pp. $27.95

Ramsey/Rostain: Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy for Adult ADHD Hb: 978-0-415-95500-3: 2007: 240pp. $85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95501-0: 2007: 240pp. $29.95

Dugas/Robichaud: Cognitive-Behavioral Treatment for Generalized Anxiety Disorder Hb: 978-0-415-95210-1: 2006: 224pp. $80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95211-8: 2006: 224pp. $27.95

Emmelkamp/Vedel: Evidence-Based Treatment for Alcohol and Drug Abuse Hb: 978-0-415-95285-9: 2006: 304pp. $80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95286-6: 2006: 304pp. $26.95

Marshall et al.: Treating Sexual Offenders Hb: 978-0-415-94935-4: 2006: 264pp. $80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-94936-1: 2006: 264pp. $32.95

Rosqvist: Exposure Treatments for Anxiety Disorders Hb: 978-0-415-94846-3: 2005: 280pp. $80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-94847-0: 2005: 280pp. $27.95

Contents: Introduction. Understanding Anxiety. Understanding Depression. Understanding Shame. Understanding Guilt. Understanding Unhealthy Anger. Understanding Hurt. Understanding Unhealthy Jealousy. Understanding Unhealthy Envy. How People Maintain Emotional Problems.

February 2009: 152pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48196-0: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48197-7: $29.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

cognitive behavior therapy


Treatment Resistant Anxiety Disorders Resolving Impasses to Symptom Remission Edited by Deborah Sookman, McGill University, Montreal, Canada, and Robert L. Leahy, American Institute for Cognitive Therapy, USA This book brings together leading cognitive behavioral therapists from major theoretical orientations to provide clinicians with a greatly needed source of information, skills and strategies, from a wide range of CBT approaches. It describes and illustrates how to combine empirically based findings, broad based and disorder specific theoretical models, and individualized case conceptualization to formulate and apply specific strategies for varied aspects of resistance during treatment of anxiety disorders. Contents: Sookman, Introduction. Theoretical Models. Sookman, Steketee, Cognitive Therapy. Wells, Meta-cognitive Therapy. Leahy, Emotional Schema Therapy. Gilbert, Compassionate Mind. Hayes, Acceptance and Commitment. Welch, Dialectical Behavior Therapy. Westra, Motivational Interviewing. Greenberg, Emotion Focused Therapy. Specific Applications. Sanderson, Panic and Agoraphobia. Stewart, Comorbid Substance Abuse. Swenson, Medication Compliance. Overvalued Ideas. Specific Phobia. Medication Compliance. Leahy, Conclusion.

October 2009: 392pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98891-9: $49.95

New in Paperback!

The Therapeutic Relationship in the Cognitive Behavioral Psychotherapies Edited by Paul Gilbert, Kingsway Hospital, Derby, UK, and Robert L. Leahy, American Institute for Cognitive Therapy, USA “This book will be useful to all psychotherapists who want to deepen their knowledge and understanding, and especially those who are following cognitivebehavioural approaches.” - Francine Brett, Therapy Today The Therapeutic Relationship in the Cognitive Behavioral Psychotherapies covers new research on basic models of the process of the therapeutic relationship, and explores key issues related to developing emotional sensitivity, empathic understanding, mindfulness, compassion and validation within the therapeutic relationship. The contributors draw on their extensive experience in different schools of cognitive behavioral therapy to address their understanding and use of the therapeutic relationship. Contents: Gilbert, Leahy, Preface. Key Issues. Gilbert, Leahy, Introduction and Overview: Basic Issues in the Therapeutic Relationship. Hardy, Cahill, Barkham, Active Ingredients of the Therapeutic Relationship that Promote Client Change: A Research Perspective. Greenberg, Emotion in the Therapeutic Relationship in Emotion Focused Therapy. Miranda, Anderson, The Therapeutic Relationship: Implications from Social Cognition and Transference. Katzow, Safran, Recognizing and Resolving Ruptures in the Therapeutic Alliance. Gilbert, Evolved Minds and Compassion in the Therapeutic Relationship. Liotti, Internal Working Models of Attachment in the Therapeutic Relationship. The Therapeutic Relationship in Specific Therapies. Newman, The Therapeutic Relationship in Cognitive Therapy with Difficult to Engage Clients. Swales, Heard, The Therapy Relationship in Dialectical Behaviour Therapy. Pierson, Hayes, Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy to Empower the Therapeutic Relationship. Leahy, Schematic Mismatch in the Therapeutic Relationship: A Social-cognitive Model. Bennett-Levy, Thwaites, Self and Self-reflection in the Therapeutic Relationship: A Conceptual Map and Practical Strategies for the Training, Supervision and Self-supervision of Interpersonal Skills.


Cognitive Behaviour Therapy A Guide for the Practising Clinician Volume 2

Edited by Gregoris Simos, Aristotelian University of Thessaloniki, Greece “Gregoris Simos has, once again, compiled an up-to-date comprehensive text, which serves as a second volume to his first text on cognitivebehavior therapy. This companion volume is filled with interventions that serve as an invaluable contribution to the field... Practitioners and researchers alike will find this text a great asset to the professional literature.” - Frank M. Dattilio, Harvard Medical School, USA CBT: A Guide for the Practising Clinician, Volume 2 brings the practising clinician up to date with recent developments in the continuously expanding field of cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT). As with the first volume, this book is a clinically orientated and techniques-focused CBT manual, dealing with specific clinical conditions, skillfully blending guiding theories, focused techniques and clinical flexibility. With contributions from distinguished clinicians and researchers, a variety of specific disorders are examined, including: • social anxiety disorder, CBT for psychoses, preventing relapse in depression • posttraumatic stress disorder, health anxiety • body dysmorphic disorder, pathological gambling, medical illness. These disorders are also discussed in the context of up-to-date processes and approaches, such as homework assignments, compassion-focused therapy and metacognitive-focused therapy. Contents: Simos, Preface. Pinto, Turkington, Kingdon, Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Psychosis: Enhancing the Therapeutic Relationship to Improve the Quality of Life. Papageorgiou, CBT, Depressive Rumination and Metacognition. Barnhofer, Fennell, Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy: Preventing Relapse in Depression. Blackmore, Heimberg, Cognitive Behavior Therapy for Social Anxiety Disorder. Rauch, Foa, Cognitive Behavioral Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD). Taylor, Collimore, Asmundson, Cognitive-Behavioral Approaches to Health Anxiety. Neziroglu, Khemlani-Patel, Jacofsky, Body Dysmorphic Disorder: Symptoms, Models and Treatment Interventions. Morasco, Ledgerwood, Weinstock, Petry, Cognitive-Behavioral Approaches to Pathological Gambling. Kyrios, Cognitive-Behaviour Therapy in Medical Illness. Konstadinidis, Goga, Simos, Effective Socialization in CBT: The Collaborative Interviewing in Mathematical Analogy Technique (CLIMATE). Kazantzis, Daniel, Homework Assignments in Cognitive Behavior Therapy. Leahy, Resistance: An Emotional Schema Therapy Approach. Gilbert, Developing a Compassion Focused Approach in Cognitive Behavioural Therapy.

February 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44963-2: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44964-9: $34.95

Volume 1

Cognitive Behaviour Therapy A Guide for the Practicing Clinician

Edited by Gregoris Simos Pb: 978-1-58391-105-1: 2002: 352pp. $35.95

March 2009: 312pp. Pb: 978-0-415-48542-5: $33.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

cognitive behavior therapy


Simply Effective Cognitive Behaviour Therapy A Practitioner’s Guide Michael J. Scott, University of Manchester, UK

“This book manages to balance and structure theory, research and practical detail in a guide which helps the reader to understand how to conduct cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT). Not only does it provide a clear clinical guide to treatment, but it also helps the reader to identify further resources and tools which will allow the clinician to extend the scope of their work without losing the essential empirical grounding which underpins CBT.”

- Paul Salkovskis, Professor of Clinical Psychology and Clinical Director of the Centre for Anxiety Disorders and Trauma, Maudsley Hospital, UK

Research shows that cognitive behaviour therapy (CBT) is an effective treatment for mental health disorders of mild to moderate severity. Simply Effective Cognitive Behaviour Therapy guides the therapist in treating clients in a simple, structured, time-limited way with maximum results, as well as indicating where additional treatment or referral is required, thus widening access to CBT. In this book, Michael J. Scott provides a practical and concise guide for therapists using CBT with a range of disorders including: • depression • panic disorder and agoraphobia • post-traumatic stress disorder • generalised anxiety disorder • obsessive compulsive disorder • social phobia. Simply Effective CBT is illustrated throughout with transcripts of sessions which serve as models for putting theory into practice. It provides the therapist with sufficient understanding of the cognitive theory of a disorder, enabling them to tailor the protocols provided to the needs of the individual. Contents: Simple CBT – Strengths and Limitations. Getting Started – Diagnosis and Beyond. The First Interview. Depression. Panic Disorder and Agoraphobia. Post-traumatic Stress Disorder. Social Phobia. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder. Generalised Anxiety Disorder. Putting it All Together. Appendices.

May 2009: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46676-9: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46677-6: $34.95

Cognitive Behavioral Therapy with Children A Guide for the Community Practitioner

Katharina Manassis, University of Toronto, Canada This book aims to bridge the gap between child CBT as practiced in academic centres and its use in community settings. Because CBT is considered the ‘gold standard’ in the treatment of a variety of child mental health conditions and has been evaluated in numerous randomized controlled trials, practitioners often face pressure to “do CBT” for children meeting criteria for certain disorders, especially anxiety and depression. This book uses a step-by-

step, practical approach to spell out child CBT assessment and treatment considerations that are often not detailed in treatment manuals but are highly relevant to community practitioners. Contents: Why the Gap Between Efficacy and Effectiveness? Leveling the Playing Field. Priorities and Timing of Therapy. Treatment Expectations. Using Manuals Appropriately. How Child CBT Differs from Adult CBT. Working with Challenging Children. Working with Challenging Families. Group-based and School-based Child CBT. Overcoming Therapeutic Obstacles. Concluding Therapy. Appendices.

June 2009: 288pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99670-9: $39.95

60 day examination copy available Please see page 35 to find out more about the new CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families Series

Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Acute Inpatient Mental Health Units Working with Clients, Staff and the Milieu

Edited by Isabel Clarke, and Hannah Wilson, both at the Hampshire Partnership NHS Trust, UK “This book will be an invaluable tool for mental health professionals working in inpatient settings, and will hopefully inspire people to increase access to such approaches and conduct the research required to firmly establish the evidence base.” - Anthony P. Morrison, From the Foreword Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Acute Inpatient Mental Health Units presents innovative ways of delivering CBT within the inpatient setting and applying CBT principles to inform and enhance inpatient care. Maintaining staff morale and creating a culture of therapy in the acute inpatient unit is essential for a well-functioning institution. This book shows how this challenge can be addressed, along with introducing and evaluating an important advance in the practice of individual CBT for working with crisis, suited to inpatient work and crisis teams. The book covers a brief cross-diagnosis adaptation of CBT, employing arousal management and mindfulness, developed and evaluated by the editors. It features ways of supporting and developing the therapeutic role of inpatient staff through consultation and reflective practice. Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Acute Inpatient Mental Health Units will be essential reading for those trained, or those undergoing training in CBT as well as being of interest to a wider public of nurses, health care support workers, occupational therapists, medical staff and managers. selected contents: Morrison, Foreword. Part I: Setting the Scene. Part II:

Individual CBT in the Inpatient Setting. Part III: Working With the Staff Group to Create a Therapeutic Culture. Part IV: CBT Group Work. Part V: The Challenge of Evaluating this Service. 2008: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42211-6: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42212-3: $44.99

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

cognitive behavior therapy


A Casebook of Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress Reactions Edited by Nick Grey, Consultant Clinical Psychologist, and Co-Director of the Centre for Anxiety Disorders and Trauma, South London and Maudsley Foundation NHS Trust, UK “A Casebook of Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress Reactions is the best book to date on this topic. This uniformly outstanding casebook thoughtfully illustrates creative and practical treatment guidelines derived from the latest trauma research... I wholeheartedly recommend this book to every clinician, whether novice or expert, and predict it will quickly become one of the most dog-eared books on your desk from frequent and welcome use.” - Christine A. Padesky, Co-Founder, Center for Cognitive Therapy, Huntington Beach, California USA

Many people experience traumatic events and whilst some gradually recover from such experiences, others find it more difficult and may seek professional help for a range of problems. A Casebook of Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress Reactions aims to help therapists who may lack specific training or who may not have an extensive range of clinical experience. The book includes descriptions and case studies of clinical cases of cognitive behavioural treatments involving people who have experienced traumatic events, including: • people with phobias, depression and paranoid delusions following traumatic experiences • people with Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) • people who have experienced multiple and prolonged traumatizations • people who are refugees or asylum-seekers. All chapters are written by experts in the field and consider what may be learned from such cases. Contents: Ehlers, Foreword. Grey, Cognitive Therapy for Traumatic Stress

Reactions: An Introduction. Moulds, Mastrodomenico, Hopwood, Bryant, Cognitive Therapy for Acute Stress Disorder. Handley, Salkovskis, Hackmann, Ehlers, Travel, Trauma and Phobia: Treating the Survivors of Transport Related Trauma. Stott, Tripping into Trauma: Cognitive-Behavioural Treatment for a Traumatic Stress Reaction Following Recreational Drug Use. Smith, Steel, ‘Suspicion is my Friend’: Cognitive Behavioural Therapy for Post-Traumatic Persecutory Delusions. Wheatley, Hackmann, Brewin, Imagery Re-scripting for Intrusive Sensory Memories in Major Depression Following Traumatic Experiences. Kennerley, Cognitive Therapy for Post-Traumatic Dissociation. Grey, McManus, Hackmann, Clark, Ehlers, Intensive Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder: Case Studies. Wild, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder with Permanent Physical Injury. Liness, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Panic Disorder. Stobie, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder. Holmes, Butler, Cognitive Therapy and Suicidality in Posttraumatic Stress Disorder: And Recent Thoughts on Flashbacks to Trauma Versus “Flash-forwards” to Suicide. Stallworthy, Cognitive Therapy for People with Posttraumatic Stress Disorder to Multiple Events: Working Out Where to Start. Duffy, Gillespie, Cognitive Therapy for Posttraumatic Stress Disorder Arising from Terrorist Violence and Civil Conflict. Lee, Compassion-focused Cognitive Therapy for Shame-based Trauma Memories and Flashbacks in Posttraumatic Stress Disorder. Young, Cognitive Therapy for Survivors of Torture. Mueller, The Role of Narrative Exposure Therapy in Cognitive Therapy for Refugees and Asylum Seekers. d’Ardenne, Farmer, Using Interpreters in Trauma Therapy.



Imagery and the Threatened Self Perspectives on Mental Imagery and the Self in Cognitive Therapy Edited by Lusia Stopa, University of Southampton, UK “Imagery and psychological disorders is said to be a “hot topic”. Lusia Stopa and co-authors do justice to this claim and provide an excellent overview of research and theory within this exciting new area. But this is a wholly exceptional book which also integrates research with advances and new understandings in clinical practice. The book is illustrated throughout with highly accessible and clinically relevant case material and it should be required reading for researchers and practitioners alike.” - Professor Graham Turpin, Department of Psychology, University of Sheffield, UK

Imagery is important in cognitive therapy because images often trigger strong emotions, and imagery techniques such as imaginal reliving and imaginal rescripting are increasingly used in therapeutic treatments. Imagery and the Threatened Self considers the role that images of the self play in a number of common mental health problems and how these images can be used to help people to recover from mental health problems. Stopa and her contributors focus specifically on images of the self which are often negative and distorted and can contribute to both the cause and to the progression of clinical disorders. The book includes chapters on current theories of the self and on imagery techniques used in therapy, alongside chapters that examine the role of selfimages and how images can be used in the treatment of disorders including: • social phobia • posttraumatic stress disorder • eating disorders • depression • bipolar disorder. Imagery and the Threatened Self is an original and innovative book that will appeal to both clinicians and students who are studying and practising cognitive therapy. Contents: Stopa, Imagery and the Threatened Self: An Introduction. Luke, Stopa, Psychological Theories of the Self and their Application. Stopa, How to Use Imagery in Cognitive-Behavioural Therapy. Wild, Imagery and the Self in Social Phobia. Hackmann, Day, Holmes, Agoraphobia: Imagery and the Threatened Self. Grey, Imagery and Psychological Threat to the Self in PTSD. Butler, Holmes, Imagery and the Self Following Childhood Trauma: Observations Concerning the Use of Drawings and External Images. Cooper, Imagery and the Negative Self in Eating Disorders. Gilbert, Evolved Minds and Compassion Focused Imagery in Depression. Mansell, Hodson, Imagery and Memories of the Social Self in People with Bipolar Disorders: Empirical Evidence, Phenomenology, Theory and Therapy.

August 2009: 270pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40759-5: $110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49430-4: $42.95

September 2009: 328pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43802-5: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43803-2: $42.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

supervision in the arts therapies series


Supervision of Dramatherapy

Edited by Phil Jones, Leeds Metropolitan University, UK, and Ditty Dokter, Hertfordshire Partnership Trust, UK Supervision of Dramatherapy offers a thorough overview of dramatherapy supervision and the issues that can arise during the supervisory task. Phil Jones and Ditty Dokter bring together experts from the field to examine supervision in a range of contexts with different client groups, including dramatherapy with children, forensic work, and intercultural practice. Each chapter features: • theoretical grounding • the importance of action methods • position in the professional lifecycle • application in relation to setting and client groups. Using illustrative examples, Supervision of Dramatherapy provides practical guidance and theoretical grounding, appealing to supervisors and supervisees alike, as well as psychotherapists interested in the use of dramatic methods in the supervisory setting.

in schools, children’s services and a dedicated music therapy centre. A chapter on the academic supervision of music therapists undertaking doctoral research is provided, together with an overview of the history and continuing development of the field. 2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41125-7: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41126-4: $35.95

Series: Supervision in the Arts Therapies Published by Routledge

Also in the Series Payne, Ed.: Supervision of Dance Movement Psychotherapy: A Practitioner’s Handbook Hb: 978-0-415-41343-5: 2008: 208pp. $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41344-2: 2008: 208pp. $35.95

Friedman/Mitchell, Eds.: Supervision of Sandplay Therapy Hb: 978-0-415-41089-2: 2007: 248pp. $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41090-8: 2007: 248pp. $35.95

Schaverien/Case, Eds.: Supervision of Art Psychotherapy: A Theoretical and Practical Handbook Hb: 978-0-415-40960-5: 2007: 256pp. $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40961-2: 2007: 256pp. $35.95

Contents: Introduction. Jones, The State of the Art of Supervision: Review

and Research. Dokter, Jones, Researching Contemporary Supervision: Method and Findings. Jones, From Role to Play: Research into Action Techniques in Supervision. Dokter, Training Supervision in Dramatherapy. AndersenWarren, Seymour, Theatre Model of Dramatherapy Supervision. Jenkyns, Transference and Countertransference in Relation to the Dramatic Form in Supervision Training. Dokter, Khasnavis, Intercultural Supervision: The Issue of Choice. Blatner, Collins, Using Psychodrama and Dramatherapy Methods in Supervising Dramatherapy Practicum Students. Hubbard, Applying Generic Clinical Supervision Training to Arts Therapy Supervision. Carr, Ramsden, An Exploration of Supervision in Education. Blackman, Making Space for Thought? Supervision in a Context Working with People with a Learning Disability. Stamp, Supervision in a Forensic Setting. Jones, Dokter, Information About Supervision.

Art Therapy

New Edition!

Introduction to Art Therapy

January 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44702-7: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44703-4: $35.95

Sources & Resources Second Edition

Series: Supervision in the Arts Therapies

Judith A. Rubin, University of Pittsburgh, USA

Supervision of Music Therapy A Theoretical and Practical Handbook Edited by Helen Odell-Miller, and Eleanor Richards, both at Anglia Polytechnic University, UK

Supervision of Music Therapy discusses the theoretical bases underlying approaches to supervision in music therapy, as well as focusing on the distinctive aspects of music therapy supervision from both clinical and conceptual perspectives. In this book, leading music therapy supervisors and researchers demonstrate how music therapy trainees and practising clinicians can be supported through supervision, allowing them to develop confidence and authenticity in their work. Contributors discuss supervision of clinical work with a variety of patients in a range of settings, from special education to forensic psychiatry, including work

Introduction to Art Therapy, Second Edition, clarifies the differences between artists or teachers who provide “therapeutic” art activities, psychologists or social workers who request drawings or suggest creative tasks in their work, and those who are trained as art therapists to do a kind of work which is similar, but qualitatively different. Thoroughly revised and updated, this second edition contains a DVD with still images and edited video clips; a new chapter on describing the work that art therapists do; new material on education that includes updated information on standards, ethics, and informing others; and a revised Appendix. Contents: Introduction to Revised Edition. Previews. What is Art Therapy? History. The Basics. Approaches. Assessment. Techniques. People We Serve. Problems We Address. Places We Practice. Professional Issues. What Next? Appendix.

July 2009: 365pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96093-9: $52.95

60 day examination copy available

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

art therapy


Contents: Part I: Historical Perspectives and Foundations. Overview of


Materials and Media in Art Therapy Critical Understandings of Diverse Artistic Vocabularies Edited by Catherine Hyland Moon, School of the Art Institute of Chicago, USA Materials and Media in Art Therapy presents a review of the theory and methods related to material and media use in art therapy, and proposes developments in theoretical models for understanding the significance of materials as part of the art therapy encounter. The diverse theoretical, personal, and practical perspectives of the contributing authors offer an expanded vision of practice in the field. Contents: Moon, Introduction. Part I: Art Therapy Materials and Media: History, Theory and Research. Moon, A History of Material and Media Use in Art Therapy. Moon, Theorizing Materiality in Art Therapy: Negotiated Meanings. Orr, Focusing on Digital Media: A Media Analysis. Huss, Bedouin Women’s Embroidery as an Expression of Female Power: Crafts as Culturally Embedded Expression within Art Therapy. Kobayashi, The Heritage of Paper: The Use of Origami in Art Therapy. Part II: From Artist to Art Therapist: How Art Therapists’ Art Practices Inform their Work as Therapists. Yi, From Imperfect to I’m Perfect: Reclaiming the Disabled Body through Making Body Adornments in Art Therapy. Whitaker, Groundswell: The Nature and Landscape of the Art Therapy Assemblage. Newman, Creating Spaces for Social Change: Individual Practice and Public Exhibition. Lucas-Falk, Comic Books, Connection, and the Artist Identity. Gerity, Fourteen Secrets for a Happy Artist’s Life: Creating a Virtual Community to Build Resilience and Inner Satisfaction. Colletti, Mailart and Art Therapy: Parallel Roads. Part III: Contemporary Media and Materials in Art Therapy Practice. Austin, Animated Therapy: 3D Computer Animation and Video Games in Art Therapy with Adolescents. Wu, Wrapping the Stairway: Museum-based Art Education Therapy Program in New York’s Chinatown. Mosinski, The Video Art Therapy Studio: Individual and Group Sessions. Hawley, Making Beats: Reaching Beyond Art Therapy to Follow the Creative Path of Music. Tillet, Healing Through SOARS Multimedia Performance. Moon, Conclusion.

February 2010: 302pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99313-5: $49.95

dance therapy

Expressive Therapies Continuum A Framework for Using Art in Therapy Lisa D. Hinz, clinical psychiatrist and a registered art therapist

Expressive Therapies Continuum is distinctive in its application as a foundational theory in the field of art therapy. First developed by Vija Lusebrink, this theory can be used by persons of any orientation and has the ability to unite art therapists of varying backgrounds. The information contained in the book demonstrates how the Expressive Therapies Continuum provides a framework for organizing assessment information, the formulation of treatment goals, and planning art therapy interventions. It provides rich clinical detail and many case examples that enliven the text and promote student engagement and learning. Hinz divides the material into three parts. The first describes the historical roots of the Expressive Therapies Continuum and pays homage to contributions from the fields of art and psychology. The seven component parts of the ETC are examined in the second part, and the last part of the book is dedicated to assessment and clinical applications. This book’s easy-to-use format and effectiveness in teaching history and application make it an essential reference for therapists and students.

the Expressive Therapies Continuum. History and Evolution of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Part II: Characteristics of the Expressive Therapies Continuum and its Components. Kinesthetic Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Sensory Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Perceptual Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Affective Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Cognitive Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Symbolic Component of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Creative Level of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Part III: Assessment and Clinical Applications. Assessment Within the Structure of the Expressive Therapies Continuum. Individual Interventions. Couples, Families, and Groups. March 2009: 309pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96347-3: $79.95 Pb: 978-0-415-99585-6: $39.95

Dance Therapy

The Art and Science of Dance/Movement Therapy Life is Dance Edited by Sharon Chaiklin, founding member and past president of the American Dance Therapy Association, and Hilda Wengrower, Academic Director of the DMT masters program at IL3-University of Barcelona

This book is composed of a collection of articles written by experienced dance/ movement therapists, and will be a valuable resource for the mental health, rehabilitation and special education fields. The material provided goes beyond the basics that characterize much of the available literature. The topics covered are intrinsic to many areas of dance/movement therapy, and each offers a theoretical perspective followed by case studies which emphasize the techniques used in the varied settings. Several different theoretical points of view are presented in the chapters, demonstrating that dance in therapy can be approached through different paths. The Art and Science of Dance/ Movement Therapy offers both a broad understanding and an in-depth view of how and where dance therapy can be used to produce change. Contents: Part I: Basic Concepts of Dance/Movement Therapy. Chaiklin, We Dance from the Moment Our Feet Touch the Earth. Wengrower, The Creative-artistic Process in Dance/Movement Therapy. Fischmann, Therapeutic Relationships and Kinesthetic Empathy. Chodorow, Dance Therapy: Motion and Emotion. Part II: The Path from Theory to Practice. Capello, BASCICS: An Intra/Interactional Model of Dance/Movement Therapy with the Adult Psychiatric Patient. Dascal, Body, Style, and Psychotherapy. Kleinman, Becoming Whole Again: Dance/Movement Therapy for Those who Suffer from Eating Disorders. Dulicai, Family Dance/Movement Therapy: A Systems Model. Tortora, Dance/Movement Psychotherapy in Early Childhood Treatment. Hill, Dancing with Hope: Dance Therapy with People with Dementia. Berrol, Dance/ Movement Therapy with Acquired Brain Trauma Rehabilitation. Part III: Aspects Integral to the Practice of Dance/Movement Therapy. Queyquep, Laban’s Movement Theories: A Dance/Movement Therapist’s Perspective. Loman, Sossin, Applying the Kestenberg Movement Profile in Dance/Movement Therapy: An Introduction. Shachar Levy, Emotrics: A Psychomotor Model for the Analysis and Interpretation of Emotive Motor Behavior. Chang, Cultural Consciousness and the Global Context of Dance/Movement Therapy. Hervey, Encouraging Research in Dance/Movement Therapy.

July 2009: 323pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99657-0: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-415-99656-3: $44.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at




Dramatherapy and Social Theatre Necessary Dialogues Edited by Sue Jennings, Freelance dramatherapist, play therapist, supervisor, performer and storyteller working in the UK, Romania and Malaysia Dramatherapy and Social Theatre: Necessary Dialogues considers the nature of drama, theatre and dramatherapy examining how dramatherapy has evolved over the past decade and how the relationship between dramatherapy and social theatre has developed as a result of this. In this book Sue Jennings brings together international dramatherapists and theatre practitioners to challenge, clarify, describe and debate some of the theoretical and practical issues in dramatherapy and social theatre. Contributors cover topics including: • dramatherapy in communities • ground rules and definitions • cross-cultural perspectives • dramatherapy with adoptive and foster families • research with professional actors. Dramatherapy and Social Theatre is illustrated throughout with case vignettes providing examples of how theatre and therapeutic processes can be brought together. It will be valuable reading for both professionals and students involved in dramatherapy and theatre studies. Contents: Jennings, Prologue: Escape Unto Myself: Personal Experience and

Public Performance. Part I: Dramatherapy and Social Theatre: A Debate of Ground Rules and Definitions. Tselikas, Social Theatre: An Exercise in Trusting the Art. Seymour, Dramatherapy and Social Theatre: A Question of Boundaries. Schininà, Like Ham in a Temperance Hotel: Healing, Participation, and Education in Social Theatre. Thompson, Aapo! Nathiye: Respecting Silence and the Performances of Not-telling. Bernardi, On the Dramatherapy of Communities. Part II: Theatre, Social Theatre and Change: An Exploration of Texts and Contexts. Schutzman, What a Riot! Casson, Century Theatre Therapy: Six Jacobean Healing Plays. Pitruzzella, Theatre and Therapy: A Necessary Dialogue. Magill, Marquis-Muradaz, The Making of Mickey B, a Modern Adaptation of Macbeth Filmed in a Maximum Security Prison in Northern Ireland. Chabukswar, Making, Breaking, and Making Again: Theatre in Search of Healing in India. Part III: Social Theatre, Politics and Change: A Development of Cross-cultural Perspectives. Hickson, Social Theatre: A Theatre of Empowerment to Address Bullying in Schools. Barham, Social Theatre. Vidrih, The Only Thing Better Than Playing on Stage is Playing at the Heart of Life. Valente, From Education Through Art to Social Theatre: A Personal Story from a Portuguese Point of View. Brathwaite, Trinidad’s Camboulay Street Dance-play and the Carnivalesque Placebo: A Neurotheological Interface Between Social Theatre and Post-Traumatic Slave Syndrome. Part IV: Dramatherapy and Social Theatre in Practice: Descriptions of What We Actually Do. Okumoto, Using an Art Form for Mutual Understanding and Reconciliation in East Asia: A Drama Project, “Ho’o Pono Pono: Pax Pacifica”. Somers, Drama and Well-being: Narrative Theory and the Use of Interactive Theatre in Raising Mental Health Awareness. Moore, Theatre of Attachment: Dramatherapy with Adoptive and Foster Families. Raileanu, The Puppet that Felt a Breeze of its Own Energy: Applied Social Theatre in the Field of Sexuality in Moldova. Evans, Ackerman, Tripp, Where Professional Actors are Too “Good”: The RAP (Respect and Protect) Project. Grainger, Epilogue: Talking to Actors.

Play therapy

New Edition!

The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play Second Edition Linnet McMahon, Retired Lecturer in Social Work, University of Reading, UK This completely revised and updated second edition provides a comprehensive introduction to using play to communicate with troubled or traumatized children and their families, and to heal emotional damage. The book gives examples of good practice in different settings and situations, including schools, hospitals, residential settings, families and foster carers. The book also includes a consideration of the support needs of workers and carers. Drawing on psychodynamic, systemic and attachment theory, this book provides an integrated theory base for using play in therapeutic work with children. It emphasizes non-directive approaches to therapeutic play and play therapy, based on supporting the child’s developing self within the safe boundaries provided by the setting and the worker’s emotional holding and containment. Areas explored include: • children with disabilities and illnesses • daily living with abused and traumatized children • helping troubled families • difficulties in early years • children experiencing separation, loss and bereavement • children moving to new families. The Handbook of Play Therapy and Therapeutic Play is an invaluable resource for all of those using play therapy with children and will appeal not only to play therapists but also to professionals working in the broader field of therapeutic play. It will be useful whether the readers are at the beginning of their training or are well-established and experienced practitioners and managers. Contents: Introduction: The State of Play. The Development of Play. Approaches to Therapeutic Play. The Process of Therapeutic Play and Play Therapy. Therapeutic Play in the Early Years. Play in Helping Troubled Families. Therapeutic Play for Children with Disabilities and Illness. Therapeutic Play for Children Experiencing Separation, Loss and Bereavement in Their Families. Therapeutic Play with Children who have Experienced Continual Trauma and Loss. Therapeutic Play in Daily Living with Abused and Traumatized Children. Play in Therapeutic Work with Children Moving to New Families.

March 2009: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43941-1: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43942-8: $36.95

August 2009: 264pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42206-2: $110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42207-9: $39.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

child and adolescent mental health

Routledge Recommends!

The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy Psychoanalytic Approaches Second Edition Edited by Monica Lanyado, training supervisor at the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK, and Ann Horne, Senior member of the British Association of Psychotherapists “This book makes me proud to be a child psychotherapist. The astonishing range of work undertaken by child psychotherapists is described clearly and with passion, and the value of it is evident. A wide range of professionals working with children and adolescents will feel they understand the children’s and young people’s experience better, and may feel empowered in their own work.” - Dilys Daws, Honorary Consultant Child Psychotherapist, Tavistock Clinic, UK

This updated edition of The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy reflects the many changes in the profession. It includes: • additional chapters on neuroscience, work with ‘looked after children’ and with foster parents, working in schools • enlarged chapters on research, attachment theory, work with parents, and developments in child and adolescent psychotherapy around the world • chapters on areas of specialist interest including violence, sexual abuse and abusing, trauma, parent-infant psychotherapy, autism, victims of political violence, delinquency, and gender dysphoria. The Handbook remains accessible and jargon-free. It will be a valuable resource for all who work in allied professions where the emotional well-being of children is of concern. Contents: Horne, Lanyado, Introduction. Part I: Theoretical Foundations.

Likierman, Urban, The Roots of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy in Psychoanalysis. Horne, Normal Emotional Development. Hopkins, Phillips, Contributions from Attachment Theory and Research. Music, The Contribution from Neuroscience. Midgley, Research in Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy: An Overview. Part II: Context. Crockatt, The Child Psychotherapist in the Multi-disciplinary Team. Gibbs, Race and Cultural Issues. Tischler, The International Scene. Part III: Diversity of Treatments and Settings. Lanyado, Horne, The Therapeutic Setting and Process. Green, Individual Psychotherapy: Assessment, Intensive and Non-intensive Work. Lanyado, Brief Psychotherapy and Therapeutic Consultations. How Much Therapy is ‘Good-Enough’? Rustin, Work with Parents. Onions, Parent-Infant Psychotherapy. Woods, Argent, Group Psychotherapy. McLoughlin, Working within Schools and Educational Settings. Flynn, The Challenges of In-patient Work in a Therapeutic Community. Wilson, Consultation within Residential Care. Part IV: Areas of Specialist Interest. Rhode, Child Psychotherapy for Children on the Autistic Spectrum. Lanyado, Psychotherapy with Severely Traumatised Children and Adolescents: ‘Far Beyond Words’. HunterSmallbone, Psychotherapy for Children Looked After by Local Authorities. Ironside, Working with Foster Carers. Horne, Sexual Abuse and Sexual Abusing in Childhood and Adolescence. Parsons, The Roots of Violence: Theory and Implications for Technique with Children and Adolescents. Melzak, Work with Children and Adolescents Exposed to Political Violence. Wilson, Delinquency. Mondadori, Working with People with Eating Disorders: ‘What If I Die Without Knowing Why?’ Gaffney, Reyes, Gender Identity Dysphoria. August 2009: 480pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46368-3: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46369-0: $39.95


Through Assessment to Consultation Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents Edited by Ann Horne, Senior member of the British Association of Psychotherapists, and Monica Lanyado, training supervisor at the British Association of Psychotherapists, UK

“This book is a welcome addition to the clinical accounts of analytic work with children, young people and their families. The understanding provided here is a timely reminder that working indirectly to help frontline staff reflect is essential if good, objective decision making is to underpin the complex situations confronting workers in a whole range of settings in Children’s services.” - Judith Trowell, University of Worcester, and Honorary Consultant Psychiatrist, Tavistock Clinic, UK

Drawing from the Independent tradition in psychoanalysis, Through Assessment to Consultation explores the application of psychoanalytic thinking to this daily work, reflecting on what is actually done and why. Contributors to the three sections – ‘Assessment’, ‘Overlaps’, ‘Consultation and Beyond’ – provide a variety of clinical illustrations as they describe a range of approaches and settings in the tasks of both assessment and consultation, ranging from the light impact of the analyst’s presence in the grief of post-9/11 New York to the call to political potency of ‘beyond consultation’. Contents: Horne, Lanyado, Introduction: ‘Appropriate to the Occasion’. Part I: Assessment. Walker, Every Assessment Matters: The Child Psychotherapist’s Role in Assessment in Child and Adolescent Mental Health Settings. Dowling, Thinking Aloud: A Child Psychotherapist Assessing Families for Court. Parsons, Horne, Anxiety, Projection and the Quest for Magic Fixes: When One is Asked to Assess Risk. Alfillé-Cook, Peculiarities and Problems in Assessing Adolescents. Part II: Overlaps. Onions, Infant Mental Health: A Conversation with Dilys Daws. Gibbs, Reflections on Race and Culture in Therapeutic Consultation and Assessment. Hamilton, Death in the Family: Post 9/11 at Pier 94 Manhattan. Horne, From Intimacy to Acting Out: Assessment and Consultation about a Dangerous Child. Part III: Consultation and Beyond. Robson, Consultation to an Under 5s’ Service. Lanyado, The Impact of Listening on the Listener: Consultation to the Helping Professions who Work with Sexually Abused Young People. Vastardis, ‘You are Paid to be a Nuisance’: Tensions in the Role of a Clinician-manager. Wilson, Beyond Consultation: Towards YoungMinds.

July 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46289-1: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46290-7: $34.95

Series: Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents

Also in the Series

A Question of Technique Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents

Edited by Monica Lanyado, and Ann Horne Hb: 978-0-415-37913-7: 2006: 272pp. $107.95 Pb: 978-0-415-37915-1: 2006: 272pp. $37.95

Series: Independent Psychoanalytic Approaches with Children and Adolescents

for further books on Psychoanalysis please see page 48 10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

child and adolescent mental health


Child Psychotherapy and Research

Kids’ Club Letters

New Approaches, Emerging Findings Edited by Nick Midgley, Anna Freud Centre, London, UK, Jan Anderson, North Essex Partnership NHS Foundation Trust, UK, Eve Grainger, North-East London NHS Foundation Trust, UK, Tanja Nesic-Vuckovic, South Essex Partnership NHS Trust, UK, and Cathy Urwin, Tavistock Clinic, London, UK “A unique, outstanding and inspiring collection of research papers in child psychotherapy.” - Dr Sebastian Kraemer, Honorary Consultant, Tavistock Clinic, London, UK

Child Psychotherapy and Research brings together some of the most exciting and innovative research activity taking place within psychoanalytic child psychotherapy today. Drawing on the expertise of an international range of contributors, this book describes work at the cutting edge of research in psychoanalytic child psychotherapy and related areas. It presents many of the emerging findings while also illustrating a whole range of methodologies – both quantitative and qualitative – that have been developed to investigate this field. The book examines the historical and philosophical background of child psychotherapy research and shows how research illuminates different clinical phenomena, the processes of psychotherapy, its evaluation and outcome. Recent developments in therapeutic work with children, including the increased focus on evidence-based practice, make research a much higher priority in the field than ever before. With this increasing significance, a whole new generation of clinicians are required to become familiar and competent with research methods and research literature. Child Psychotherapy and Research will be a vital resource for anyone involved in research and training related to psychotherapy and child mental health, as well as of great interest to a range of mental health professionals. Contents: Hobson, Preface. Urwin, Anderson, Grainger, Midgely, Nesic-Vuckovic,

Introduction. Part I: What is Child Psychotherapy Research? Editor’s Introduction. Fonagy, Research in Child Psychotherapy: Progress, Problems and Possibilities? Rustin, What Do Child Psychotherapists Know? Part II: Studying the Process of Child Psychotherapy. Editor’s Introduction. Philps, Mapping Process in Child Psychotherapy: Steps Towards Drafting a New Method for Evaluating Psychoanalytic Case Studies. Schneider, Pruetzel-Thomas, Midgley, Discovering New Ways of Seeing and Speaking About Psychotherapy Process: The Child Psychotherapy Q-set. Moran, Fonagy, Psychoanalysis and Diabetic Control: A Single-case Study. Carlberg, Exploring Change Processes in Psychodynamic Child Psychotherapy: The Therapists’ Perspective. Part III: The Routine Monitoring and Outcome of Child Psychotherapy. Editor’s Introduction. Boston, Lush, Grainger, Evaluation of Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy with Fostered, Adopted and ‘In Care’ Children. Trowell, Rhode, Joffe, Childhood Depression: An Outcome Research Project. Schacter, Target, The Adult Outcome of Child Psychoanalysis: The Anna Freud Centre Long-term Follow-up Study. Urwin, A Qualitative Framework for Evaluating Clinical Effectiveness in Child Psychotherapy: The Hopes and Expectations for Treatment Approach (HETA). Part IV: Inter-disciplinary Research. Editor’s Introduction. Alvarez, Lee, Interpersonal Relatedness in Children With Autism: Clinical Complexity versus Scientific Simplicity? Anderson, The Mythic Significance of Risk-taking, Dangerous Behaviour. Hodges, Steele, Kaniuk, Hillman, Asquith, Narratives in Assessment and Research on the Development of Attachments in Maltreated Children. Mayes, Thomas, Social Neuroscience and Theories of Therapeutic Action: Some Implications for Child Psychotherapy. April 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42202-4: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42203-1: $40.00


Narrative Tools for Stimulating Process and Dialogue in Therapy Groups for Children and Adolescents Georgia A. DeGangi, in private practice at ITS (Integrated Therapy Services) for Children and Families, Inc., USA, and Marc A. Nemiroff, Washington School of Psychiatry, Washington, D.C., USA Kids’ Club Letters provides an innovative approach to group psychotherapy for school-aged children who experience a range of social and emotional problems. A narrative therapy approach is adapted, taking the form of letters written by the therapist in the voice of a child who is asking for advice about interpersonal or emotional problems. The child in the letter is asking for guidance from the participants in the group psychotherapy. These letters were devised and written for the purpose of structuring responses in group psychotherapy, allowing the participants to address relevant issues for them individually and at the group level. The children in the groups had previously experienced difficulty discussing these issues spontaneously. Hence the ‘Dear Group’ letter format was born. The children did not know that the therapist had written the letters. Contents: Part I: Identity Formation and Understanding Oneself. “Mirror, Mirror on the Wall: Who is the Smartest, Cleverest, Cutest, and Bravest of Them All?” Children Talk about Identity. The Square Peg in a Round Hole. Jack Sprat Got Too Fat, His Wife Got Too Lean. From Butterfly to Moth: Adolescent Metamorphosis. Back-stage or On-stage. To Be or Who to Be: The Question for Parents and the Budding Adolescent. An Unfocused Lens – The ADHD Child’s Perspective. “What’s Wrong With Me?”. “Jumping Out of My Skin”. Part II: Interpersonal Effectiveness. Living with a Short Fuse. Behind Closed Doors. Who’s the Boss? “I’m the Boss!” Alone on a Desert Island. Tell Me Master What to Do! I’ll Do Anything... To Be Popular Like You. The Sibling Battleground: Friend or Foe? Aliens and Earthlings: Which One Am I? I’m the Best! Right? Impulsivity vs. Social Inhibition: “I’m Too Scared to Speak” vs. “I Couldn’t Help Myself. Part III: Emotional Regulation. “Feeling Blue” Look Out! I’m Going to Explode! Wringing My Hands!

August 2009: 239pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99432-3: $49.95

Keeping the Baby in Mind Infant Mental Health in Practice Edited by Jane Barlow, University of Warwick, UK, and P.O. Svanberg, Tyne and Wear NHS Trust, UK

“This well researched book will be of interest to many involved with infant mental health. Those engaged in direct work with families, academics concerned with infant development or social provision and those organising or making policy about the provision of services for Under 5s will find much to inspire them in these accessibly written chapters.” - Dr. Janine Sternberg, Consultant Child & Adolescent Psychotherapist, Tavistock & Portman NHS Trust, UK

Keeping the Baby in Mind builds on the expanding evidence pointing to the crucial importance of parents in facilitating their baby’s development, and brings together expert contributors to

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35

35 CBT with children, adolescents and families series

child and adolescent mental health examine a range of innovative psychological and psychotherapeutic interventions that are currently being used to support parents and their infants. It provides not only an overview of the many projects that are now available but also makes recommendations for future practice and the way in which children’s services are organised. The book brings together interventions and ways of working that can be used both universally to support parents during the transition to parenthood, and with high-risk groups of parents where for example there may be child protection concerns or parents experience severe mental health problems. Each chapter describes the evidence supporting the need for such interventions and the approach being developed, and concludes with a description of its evaluation. Contents: Daws, Foreword. Barlow, Svanberg, Keeping the Baby in Mind. Part I: Universal Approaches. Underdown, The Power of Touch – Exploring Infant Massage. Douglas, Rheeston, The Solihull Approach: An Integrative Approach Across Agencies. Hawthorne, Promoting Development of the Early Parent-Infant Relationship Using the Neonatal Behavioural Assessment Scale. Parr, Joyce, ‘First Steps in Parenting’: Developing Nurturing Parenting Skills in Mothers and Fathers in the Pregnancy and Postnatal Period. Davis, The Family Partnership Model: Understanding the Processes of Prevention and Early Intervention. Barrows, The Importance of the Parental Couple in Parent-Infant Psychotherapy. Part II: Selective Approaches. Street, Empowering Parents Through ‘Learning Together’: The PEEP Model. Svanberg, Promoting a Secure Attachment through Early Screening and Interventions; The Sunderland Infant Programme. Rowe, Implementing the Nurse–family Partnership in England; Lessons from the Pilot Programme. Marks, Hadley, Mckay, Reay, Gelman, Working with Parents from Black and Minority Ethnic Backgrounds in Children Centres. Part III: Indicated Approaches. Baradon, Gerhardt, Tucker, Working with the Hidden Obstacles in Parent-Infant Relating; Two Parent-Infant Psychotherapy Projects. Puckering, Mellow Babies: Mellow Parenting with Parents of Infants. Pawlby, Fernyhough, Enhancing the Relationship Between Mothers with Severe Mental Illness and their Infants. Tarleton, ‘Parenting with Support’: Supporting Parents with Learning Difficulties to Parent. Svanberg, Barlow, Developing Infant-centred Services: The Way Forward.

April 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44297-8: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44298-5: $34.95

Abnormal Child Psychology A Developmental Perspective Linda Wilmshurst, Elon University, North Carolina, USA

Abnormal Child Psychology: A Developmental Perspective is intended for undergraduate and Masters-level students enrolled in courses in Abnormal Child and Adolescent Psychology. The text provides students with a learning model which incorporates three essential cornerstones, which are pivotal to understanding child and adolescent psychopathology: the K3 paradigm that consists of knowledge of developmental expectations, knowledge of the sources of influence, and knowledge of the theoretical models. selected contents: Part I: The Foundations of Abnormal Child Psychology:

A Developmental Perspective. Part II: Emotional, Behavioral and Learning Difficulties in Children and Youth: Their Nature and Their Course. Part IA: Internalizing Problems: An Introduction. Part IB: Externalizing Problems: An Introduction. Part II: Problems of Attention and Learning: An Introduction. Part III: Problems of Late Childhood or Adolescence: An Introduction. Part IV: Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities and Pervasive Developmental Disorders: An Introduction. 2008: 648pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95363-4: $69.00

60 day examination copy available “These authoritative, yet practical books will be of interest to all professionals who work in the field of child and adolescent mental health.” - Alan Carr


Post Traumatic Stress Disorder Cognitive Therapy with Children and Young People Patrick Smith, Sean Perrin, and William Yule, all at the Institute of Psychiatry, London, UK, and David M. Clark, King’s College London, UK Post traumatic stress disorder develops after exposure to one or more terrifying event that has caused, or threatened to cause the sufferer grave physical harm. This book discusses how traumafocused cognitive therapy can be used to help children and adolescents who suffer from post traumatic stress disorder. Cognitive therapy is frequently used to treat adults who suffer from PTSD with proven results. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder provides the therapist with instructions on how CT models can be used with children and young people to combat the disorder. Based on research carried out by the authors, this book covers:

• • • •

assessment procedures and measures formulation and treatment planning trauma focused cognitive therapy methods common hurdles.

The authors provide case studies and practical tips, as well as examples of self-report measures and handouts for young people and their parents which will help the practitioner to prepare for working with this difficult client group. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder is an accessible, practical, clinically relevant guide for professionals and trainees in child and adolescent mental health service teams who work with traumatised children and young people. Contents: Introduction to Cognitive Therapy with Children and Adolescents. Post

Traumatic Stress Disorder. Assessment. Formulation and Treatment Planning. CT for PTSD Methods. CT for PTSD with Adolescents. CT for PTSD with Young Children. Common Hurdles in Treatment. Comorbidity. Future Issues. Appendices. November 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-39163-4: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39164-1: $34.95

Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families

Eating Disorders Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Simon G. Gowers, University of Liverpool, UK, and Lynne Green, clinical psychologist, Cheshire and Merseyside Eating Disorders Service for Adolescents, Chester, UK Eating Disorders comprise a range of physical, psychological and behavioural features that often have an impact on social functioning

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at /

cbt with children, adolescents and families series


and can invade most areas of the sufferer’s life. Although eating and weight disorders are common in children and adolescents, there is a scarcity of practical guidance on treatment methods for eating disorders in young people. In this book, Simon Gowers and Lynne Green bring together up-todate research, clinical examples and useful tips to guide practitioners in working with young people, as well as helping families of children and adolescents to deal with their difficulties. Eating Disorders provides the clinician with an introduction about how CBT can be used to challenge beliefs about control, restraint, weight and shape allowing young people to manage their eating disorder. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Eating Disorders and their Management. The Role of CBT in the Treatment of Eating Disorders in Children and Adolescents. Part II: Preparing for Therapy. Assessment and Formulation. Engaging and Motivating Young People. The Role of the Family. Part III: A CBT Treatment Programme. Stage 1: Planning and Establishing Principles, Embarking on Change. Stage 2: Tackling Problem Eating, Challenging Compensatory Behaviours. Stage 3: Treatment Monitoring and Review. Stage 4: Addressing Unhelpful Cognitions and Solving Problems Maintaining the Eating Disorder. Stage 5: Relapse Prevention and Discharge Planning. Part IV: Applications and Challenges. In-patient Management, Groups and Self Help. Future Challenges.

May 2009: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44462-0: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44463-7: $34.95

Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families


Obsessive Compulsive Disorder Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Edited by Polly Waite, and Tim Williams, both at the University of Reading, UK

Obsessive Compulsive Disorder (OCD) is characterised by a person’s obsessive, distressing, intrusive thoughts and their related compulsions. It affects an estimated one percent of teenagers and has been detected in children as young as three years old. In this concise, accessible book experienced contributors provide detailed guidance on carrying out assessments and treatment for children and young people with OCD from a cognitive behavioural perspective. This approach has been developed from extensive research and clinical work with young people with OCD and associated problems. The book includes: • an overview of OCD • an introduction to CBT and its relevance to OCD in young people • assessment and treatment methods • case studies and clinical vignettes • worksheets for use with the client.

Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People

This straightforward text will provide essential direction for practitioners and trainees in a range of professions including psychiatry, psychotherapy, counselling, nursing, education and social work.

Chrissie Verduyn, Central Manchester and Manchester Children’s University Hospitals NHS Trust, UK, Julia Rogers, Berkshire Healthcare NHS Foundation Trust, UK, and Alison Wood, in private practice, Manchester, UK

Contents: Waite, Williams, Introduction to Obsessive Compulsive Disorder. Creswell, Waite, The Use of CBT with Children and Adolescents. Gallop, Cognitive Behavioural Assessment of OCD in Children and Adolescents. Waite, Gallop, Atkinson, Planning and Carrying Out Treatment. Atkinson, CBT with Younger Children. Waite, CBT with Adolescents. Stobie, Working with Families. Salkovskis, Waite, Williams, Issues and Future Directions in Childhood OCD. Appendices.

Depression: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Adolescents provides an accessible guide to recognising and treating depression in young people. Based on a successful manual developed for research trials, this book presents an overview of a cognitive behavioural model for working with this age group, as well as practical ideas about how to start therapy. Topics covered include: • engaging young people • setting goals for therapy • cognitive behaviour assessment and formulation • solutions for problems practitioners may face • encouraging parents and agencies to support therapy. Depression includes case examples and practical tips to prepare the practitioner for working with young people. Information is presented in a readable and practical style making this book ideal for professionals working in child and adolescent mental health services, as well as those in training. Contents: Depression in Adolescence. Cognitive Behaviour Therapy. Cognitive Behavioural Assessment and Formulation. Starting Therapy. Early Stages of Therapy. Cognitive Techniques. General Cognitive Behavioural Techniques. Ending Therapy. Working with the Wider System. Special Issues. Common Problems.

May 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-39977-7: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-39978-4: $34.95

Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families

March 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40388-7: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40389-4: $34.95

Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families

Anxiety Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Paul Stallard, Consultant Clinical Psychologist, Avon and Wiltshire Mental Health Partnership NHS Trust, UK

Cognitive behavioural therapy has proven to be an effective treatment for anxiety disorders in children and young people. This book provides an overview of CBT and explores how it can be used to help children with anxiety disorders. In Anxiety: Cognitive Behaviour Therapy with Children and Young People Paul Stallard describes the nature and extent of anxiety problems that are suffered in childhood and discusses evidence for the effectiveness of the cognitive behavioural model as a method of treatment. This concise and accessible book, written specifically for the clinician, provides a clear outline of how CBT can be used with children suffering

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35

cbt with children, adolescents and families series from anxiety disorders in an easy to follow format. The book provides many ideas that can be incorporated into everyday practice, as well as clinical vignettes, case examples, and worksheets for use with the client.

child and adolescent clinical problems 37

This straightforward text will prove essential reading for professionals involved with children who have significant anxiety problems including mental health workers, social services staff and those working in educational settings.

Psychiatric Comorbidity and High Risk Behaviors Edited by Yifrah Kaminer, University of Connecticut Health Center, Farmington, Connecticut, USA, and Oscar G. Bukstein, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Pennsylvania, USA

Contents: Anxiety Problems in Childhood. Cognitive Behaviour Therapy.

Dysfunctional Cognitions and Processes. Parental Behaviour and Childhood Anxiety. Assessment and Problem Formulation. Psycho-education, Goal Setting and Problem Formulations. Involving Parents. Emotional Recognition and Management. Cognitive Enhancement. Problem Solving, Exposure and Relapse Prevention. Common Problems. Materials and Worksheets. February 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-37256-5: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-37255-8: $34.95

Series: CBT with Children, Adolescents and Families

For free downloadable resources for books in this series please visit for further books on Cognitive Behavior Therapy please see page 23

Child and Adolescent Clinical Problems

Social Responsibility Therapy for Adolescents and Young Adults A Multicultural Treatment Manual for Harmful Behavior

James M. Yokley, MetroHealth Medical Center, Cleveland, Ohio, USA Social Responsibility Therapy for Adolescents and Young Adults is a crucial treatment manual that can be used by mental health professionals whose caseload includes a multicultural population of adolescents and young adults who exhibit multiple forms of harmful behavior. This unique therapy enhances relapse prevention in harmful behavior treatment by addressing the target behavior problem, negative social influence problem, and doseresponse problem, along with acknowledging that harmful behavior is multicultural and addressing the key criticisms of multicultural therapy through a theory-driven treatment approach that utilizes methods and procedures from existing evidence-based treatments with known multicultural applications. This text provides a comprehensive explanation of Social Responsibility Therapy, its advantages, and the intervention evidence-base for multiple forms of harmful behavior. Contents: Social Responsibility Therapy Overview, Intervention Evidence Base and Multicultural Approach. Client Awareness Training: The Problem Development Triad. Social Responsibility Therapy Implementation Methods and Treatment Protocol. Research Support for Social Responsibility Therapy Methods and Procedures.

2008: 360pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3120-4: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3121-1: $49.95

Adolescent Substance Abuse

Adolescent Substance Abuse presents leading experts offering insightful viewpoints and dynamic suggestions on how to best provide simultaneous treatment and integrated services to these youths. The book covers the state of the art in the field of substance use disorders, and reviews different psychiatric disorders and high risk behaviors, and then addresses the issue of integrated services and ethical, legal, and policy issues pertaining to this population. This book comprehensively discusses the magnitude, etiology, and characteristics of problems and substance abuse disorders (SUD), and extensively explains ways to assess, treat, and develop services for adolescents. This unique text closely examines the assessment and treatment of psychiatric comorbid disorders among adolescents such as depression, anxiety disorders, ADHD, and high risk behaviors including suicidal behavior, self-harm behavior, and gambling behavior. 2008: 528pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3171-6: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3172-3: $59.95

60 day examination copy available for further books on Addictions please see page 63

Defeating Autism A Damaging Delusion Michael Fitzpatrick, Barton House Health Centre, UK “In his book, Defeating Autism, Michael Fitzpatrick, a physician and himself the father of an autistic son, explores the therapies that have been proffered for autistic children with clarity and compassion. This is a must read for any parent trying to wade through the Arabian bazaar of autism therapies.” - Paul A. Offit,

Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia, USA

In Defeating Autism, Michael Fitzpatrick, a family doctor and father of a son with autism, questions the scientific basis of environmental explanations of autism and exposes the incoherence of unorthodox ‘biomedical’ theories and therapies. This book reveals that these therapies are far from pioneering interventions and they remain unsubstantiated by scientific authorities. This compelling book is essential reading for students and professionals working in the field of autism, as well as academics concerned with the public understanding of science and the treatment of scientific and medical controversies in the media. 2008: 166pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44980-9: $150.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44981-6: $39.95

60 day examination copy available 10% DISCOUNT! Order online at /

child and adolescent clinical problems


Treating Problem Behaviors A Trauma-Informed Approach

Ricky Greenwald, Founder, Executive Director and faculty chair, Child Trauma Institute, Greenfield, Massachusetts, USA The book is designed as a user-friendly textbook/manual for mental health professionals. It teaches a trauma-informed treatment approach as an organizing framework for a series of empirically supported interventions including motivational interviewing, cognitive-behavioral skills training, trauma resolution, and relapse prevention. Although it notes the importance of a systemic treatment approach, the focus is on the individual component of treatment.

depression and the prevention programs directed at high-risk youth, the book also covers assessment, diagnosis, and epidemiology, and related and comorbid conditions. Handbook of Depression in Adolescents is an invaluable and comprehensive resource for students and practitioners alike. selected Contents: Assessment, Diagnosis, and Epidemiology. Related Conditions. Biological Factors. Psychosocial Factors. Treatment of Adolescent Depression. Prevention of Adolescent Depression.

2008: 712pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6235-5: $175.00

for further books on Mood Disorders please see page 66

Monica L. McCoy, Converse College, Spartenburg, South Carolina, USA, and Stefanie M. Keen, University of South Carolina Upstate, Spartanburg, USA

Contents: Introduction. Trauma-informed Treatment for Problem Behaviors.

Initial Interview. History. Motivation. Treatment Contract. Avoid High Risk. Self Control Skills. More Skills and Strategies. Reduce Stress. Trauma Resolution. Anticipate Future Challenges. Challenging Cases. Appendices. May 2009: 376pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99801-7: $44.95

Residential Treatment of Adolescents Integrative Principles and Practices

Don Pazaratz, President and Founder, Warren Youth Services In Residential Treatment of Adolescents, Pazaratz discusses how practitioners can remain emotionally available for the needs of their residents without feeling overwhelmed. Readers will be apprised of ways to deal judiciously with residents who try to circumvent, con, play workers off each other, and even attempt to seduce or manipulate the worker. Contents: Principles and Practices of Residential Treatment and of the Four Phase System. Evaluation. Psychosocial Assessment by Child and Youth Care Workers. Group Living. Family Work in Residential Treatment. Modifying Behaviour Through the Use of a Level/Reinforcement System. The Role of Direct Care Staff in Residential Treatment. Positive Discipline. Therapeutic Programming. The Role of Education in Residential Treatment. Residential Treatment of a Disturbed Adolescent: A Case Study.

February 2009: 242pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99708-9: $44.95

Handbook of Depression in Adolescents

Edited by Susan Nolen-Hoeksema, Yale University, Connecticut, USA, and Lori M. Hilt, University of Wisconsin, USA This Handbook offers authoritative reviews of research on the nature, causes, and treatments for depression in adolescents. It covers the breadth of this research, focusing on etiology, predictors, and the interplay of biological, psychological, and social factors in adolescent depression. Highlighting both recent studies on treatment of adolescent

Child Abuse and Neglect

“The author writes as if she was having a conversation with the reader... the legal cases bring to life some of the controversial issues... [it] paints a clear picture of the child protection system and what actually transpires when an incident is reported and the roles and functions of the caseworkers.” - Alice Yick Flanagan, Capella University, Minneapolis, USA

This book examines child abuse and neglect – the latest research and laws, what it entails, and how to recognize and report it. “Focus on Research Boxes”, “Case Examples”, and “Legal Examples” and “Focus on Law” sections that explain judicial rulings are sprinkled throughout. Discussion questions, key terms, and a glossary of terms are included. The book concludes with a clinical psychologist’s review of what happens to a child after an abuse report is filed and provides suggestions for preventing child maltreatment. This is an invaluable resource to workers who are mandated reporters of child maltreatment and/or anyone interested in the problem. March 2009: 312pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6244-7: $59.95 Published by Psychology Press

Handbook of Social Work in Child and Adolescent Sexual Abuse

Edited by Carolyn Hilarski, SUNY at Buffalo, USA, John S. Wodarski, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, USA, and Marvin D. Feit, Norfolk State University, Virginia, USA The Handbook of Social Work in Child and Adolescent Sexual Abuse is a comprehensive guide that provides the latest information on assessment, management, prevention, and policy. Through insightful and accessible discussions, this collection of essays encompasses the full spectrum of child and adolescent sexual abuse to shed needed light on an affecting issue. selected Contents: Hilarski, Historical Overview. Hilarski, Child and

Adolescent Sexual Abuse. Harrington, Hisle-Gorman, Dia, Family Dysfunction: Theoretical Explanations and Ethnic Considerations. Gannon, Gilchrist, Wade, Intrafamilial Child and Adolescent Sexual Abuse. Hilarski, The Nonfamily Sex Offender. Devilly, Varker, Cook, Yap, Current Empirical Assessment Methods. Nurcombe, Treatment for the Sexually Abused Child. Nelson-Gardell,

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35

child and adolescent clinical problems Treatment for Sexually Abused Adolescents. Alaggia, Knott, Treatment for the Nonoffending Caregiver. Renk, Baksh, Donnelly, Roddenberry, Prevention Endeavors. Goldsmith, Tang, Freyd, Policy and Practice Implications.

2008: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3201-0: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3202-7: $49.95

Edited by Danny Brom, and Ruth Pat-Horenczyk, both at the Israel Center for the Treatment of Psychotrauma, Israel, and Julian D. Ford, University of Connecticut, USA

for further books on Social Work please see page 18 Forthcoming!

Memory Matters Contexts for Understanding Sexual Abuse Recollections Edited by Janice Haaken, Portland State University, Oregon, USA, and Paula Reavey, London South Bank University, UK “Memory Matters provides an exhaustive overview and thorough grounding for anyone wishing to find out about research on memory and abuse, or to undertake such research themselves. I have rarely seen such an impressive, comprehensive anthology.” - Lynne Segal, Professor of Gender and Psychology, Birkbeck College, UK

This book is grounded in the debates of the 1980s and 90s that surrounded recollections of childhood sexual abuse, particularly those that emerged in the context of psychotherapy. When growing numbers of therapists claimed that they were recovering deeply repressed memories of early sexual violations in their female clients, a wave of alarmed critics countered that therapists were implanting the very memories they were discovering. In looking back at this volatile and heated controversy, Memory Matters takes up disturbing questions that linger concerning memory, sexuality, and childhood. September 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44491-0: $69.95


Young People and Sexual Exploitation Hard to Reach and Hard to Hear Jennifer Pearce, University of Bedfordshire, UK This book draws on young people’s voices and experiences to explore the difficulties that arise for researchers and for practitioners in working with sexually exploited young people. Presenting innovative ways of developing theory, policy, research and practice, she introduces child-centred theories of risk, agency, resilience and vulnerability. October 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40715-1: $140.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40716-8: $44.95

Treating Traumatized Children Risk, Resilience and Recovery

60 day examination copy available


”An excellent and diverse set of reviews that puts resiliency on the child trauma map, and provides promising directions for research, policy, and practice.”

- Ricky Greenwald, Founder/Executive Director, Child Trauma Institute, USA

While recent years have seen a vast increase in the literature on adult trauma, the interest in childhood trauma has only recently started to gain momentum, encouraging new research and the need for evidence-based interventions. Here the editors have brought together an international list of contributors to look at both innovative and established treatment of trauma in a range of contexts, and provide up-to-date coverage of what is on offer in terms of prevention, assessment, treatment and research. Treating Traumatized Children provides professionals with an upto-date international perspective on the subject, as well as helping professionals and researchers develop future treatments based on current evidence. 2008: 304pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42636-7: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47150-3: $43.95

for further books on Trauma please see page 71

Self-Injury in Youth The Essential Guide to Assessment and Intervention Edited by Mary K. Nixon, University of Victoria Island Medical Program, Canada, and Nancy L. Heath, McGill University, Montreal, Canada

This edited volume features evidence-based reviews and practical approaches for the professional in the hospital, clinic, community and school, with case examples throughout. Divided into five major sections, the book offers background historical and cultural information, discussion of self-injury etiology, assessment and intervention/prevention issues, and relevant resources for those working with youths who self-injure. selected Contents: Part I: Background Information. Part II: Etiology of SelfInjury. Part III: Effective Practice for Self-Injury in Youth.

2008: 368pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95725-0: $44.95

for further books on Self-Harm please see page 71

for further books on Abuse please see page 68

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at /

child and adolescent development



A Clinician’s Guide to Normal Cognitive Development in Childhood Edited by Elisabeth Hollister Sandberg, Suffolk University, Boston, USA, and Becky L. Spritz, Roger Williams University, Rhode Island, USA A Clinician’s Guide to Normal Cognitive Development in Childhood provides students and professionals with an accessible set of descriptions of normal childhood cognition, accompanied by suggestions for how to think about normal development in a clinical context. Each sub-topic within cognitive development is described using succinct presentations of the empirical data about normal development in that area, followed by a discussion of the clinical implications. Chapters conclude with a list of suggested readings pertaining to both typical and atypical development for readers who wish to explore the topic in greater depth. This is a much-needed resource so that clinicians may learn the unique peculiarities of cognitive processes in order to avoid pathologizing what might be normal developmental phenomena. Contents: Spritz, Sandberg, The Case for Children’s Cognitive Development:

A Clinical-developmental Perspective. Part I: Communicating with Children. Haskill, Corts, Acquiring Language. Skelley, Crnic, Communicating about Internal States. Golden, General Guidelines for Talking with Children. Part II: Understanding Other’s Perspective. Fireman, Kose, Perspective Talking. Spritz, Fergusson, Bankoff, False Beliefs and the Development of Deception. Part III: Children’s Memory. Reeder, Turner, Martin, Memory Development in Childhood. Sandberg, Spritz, Remembering. Gregory, Carol, Compo, Talking with Children about Past Events: Children’s Memory and Suggestibility. Part IV: Developing Reason and Executive Control. Sandberg, McCullough, The Development of Reasoning Skills. White-Ajmani, O’Connell, Moral Reasoning. Holler, Greene, Developmental Changes in Children’s Executive Functioning. Viola, Knowing What We Know: The Developing Child and the Developing Clinician. October 2009: 210pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99183-4: $34.95

Mental Health and Emerging Adulthood among Homeless Young People

Les B. Whitbeck, University of NebraskaLincoln, USA “The design of the study... is simply unique... I am deeply impressed with the breadth of coverage... The book can be used at both the (upper) undergraduate and graduate level... the book reports the results of a unique longitudinal study on homeless and runaway adolescents, a topic of evident societal concern.” - Luc Goossens, Catholic University of Leuven, Belgium

Findings from a three-year study of homeless and runaway adolescents that examined the developmental consequences of chronic runaway episodes and homelessness on emerging adulthood are examined in this compelling new book. A follow up to author Whitbeck’s highly respected No Where to Grow: Homeless and Runaway Adolescents and Their Families, this book examines the only longitudinal study of this high risk, hard to access population. The progress of homeless and runaway adolescents is chronicled across time in an attempt to evaluate the occurrence and persistence of mental and substance abuse disorders from mid adolescence into early adulthood.

SELECTED Contents: Part I: Emerging Adulthood among Runaway and Homeless Youth. Part II: Mental Health and Emerging Adulthood among Homeless and Runaway Adolescents. Part III: Unintentional and Intentional Injuries from Adolescent to Early Adulthood. Part IV: Adult Roles: Social Networks, Intimate Relationships, Economic Adjustment, and Emerging Adulthood. Part V: Lost Opportunities – New Opportunities.

April 2009: 313pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-751-2: $65.00 Pb: 978-1-84169-752-9: $34.95 Published by Psychology Press

adolescence and society series


Moving Out, Moving On Young People’s Pathways in and through Homelessness Shelley Mallett, Doreen Rosenthal, Deb Keys, all at the University of Melbourne, Australia, and Roger Averill, Freelance writer, researcher and editor Based on rich interview data drawn from a large scale longitudinal study of homeless young people, this book examines the personal, familial and structural factors that impact on homeless young people’s long-term outcomes. While telling the personal stories of young people’s experiences, the book refers to the wider research and policy literature on youth homelessness, engaging with key debates about the causes and meanings of homelessness in western societies. The book addresses important issues such as employment and education, engagement with services, social support, connection to family and friends, as well as personal factors including physical and mental health, sexual practices and drug use. January 2010: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47029-2: $80.95 Pb: 978-0-415-47030-8: $35.95

Series: Adolescence and Society

Also in the Series Frydenberg: Adolescent Coping: Advances in Theory, Research and Practice Hb: 978-0-415-40571-3: 2008: 360pp. $89.95 Pb: 978-0-415-40572-0: 2008: 360pp. $38.95

Cotterell: Social Networks in Youth and Adolescence Hb: 978-0-415-35949-8: 2007: 328pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-35950-4: 2007: 328pp. $38.95

Moore/Rosenthal: Sexuality in Adolescence: Current Trends, Second Edition Hb: 978-0-415-34462-3: 2006: 304pp. $80.95 Pb: 978-0-415-34496-8: 2006: 304pp. $39.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35

school-based practice in action series


Resilient Playgrounds Beth Doll, University of Nebraska-Lincoln, School Psychology Program, USA, with Katherine Brehm, school psychologist with the Ysleta School District, El Paso, Texas, USA In Resilient Playgrounds, Doll and Brehm apply a data-based evaluation and problem-solving method to the playground environment, allowing school-based mental health professionals to work with teachers and administrators to provide and promote safer, more engaging, and more nurturing recess environments. The authors argues that a child’s experience during the recess period, while only a relatively short time out of the day, can have a real and drastic impact on learning, behavior, and development in other areas. The aim of the book is to provide the tools to evaluate recess experiences, and strategies to implement more nurturing environments, without negating the positive value of the unstructured playtime. Written for school-based mental health professionals of all backgrounds and levels of training, the book provides a vehicle for broader team building within the schools, working with teachers, administrators, parents, and school grounds staff to provide the best possible recess experience. Contents: Introduction to Resilient Playgrounds. The Interface Between Children’s Peer Relationships and Playground Environments. Guidelines for Applying the Data-based Problem Solving Model to School Playgrounds. Strategies for Playground Intervention. Evaluating the Impact on the school. Illustrative Case Examples. Concluding Comments. Practitioner Resources.

November 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96087-8: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96088-5: $34.95

Series: School-Based Practice in Action


Comprehensive Planning for Safe Learning Environments A School Professional’s Guide to Integrating Physical and Psychological Safety – Prevention through Recovery Melissa A. Reeves, Winthrop University, South Carolina, USA, Linda M. Kanan, Intervention Coordinator in the Cherry Creek School District, USA, and Amy E. Plog, Director of Research for Creating Caring Communities, USA The school violence events that occurred in the 2006-2007 school year and the March 2009 shooting tragedy in Germany have renewed concerns about schools all across the country. The need, therefore, for a book on planning and implementing school safety measures would seem to be vital at this point in time. Reeves, Kanan, and Plog have created just such a guide, providing important information that can help prevent incidents of school violence for all educators involved in crisis prevention, preparedness, response, and recovery. This book is divided into three sections: The first discusses systemic factors for establishing a safe school climate. Topics covered include obtaining support from key school and community stakeholders, important legal and governmental guidelines regarding school safety programs, and relevant financial and risk management considerations. The next section addresses physical safety in schools, focusing on


establishing a safe learning environment for students through specific preparedness planning efforts; also included is a discussion on the integration of a multi-hazards approach with the more traditional school safety and crisis response approaches. The third and final section covers psychological safety, providing information on prevention and early-intervention strategies, as well as managing risk behaviors of students through established threat and suicide assessment procedures. Contents: Part I: Establishing a Safe School Climate. Introduction and Overview to Establishing a Safe School. Obtaining Support from Key Stakeholders. Part II: Physical Safety: Multi-hazards Prevention and Preparedness. Integrating a Multi-hazards Approach to Establish a Safe Learning Environment. Establishing an Effective School Crisis Plan. Monitoring Crisis Planning and Preparation. Part III: Psychological Safety: Multi-level Prevention and Intervention. Universal Prevention and Preparedness. Early and Targeted Interventions. Managing Risky Behaviors and Intensive Interventions. Crisis Management and Recovery Efforts.

October 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99834-5: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99835-2: $34.95

Series: School-Based Practice in Action

Assessment and Intervention for Executive Function Difficulties

George McCloskey, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA, Lisa A. Perkins, in private practice, Family Study Center, Connecticut, USA, and Bob Van Diviner, Milton Hershey School, Philadelphia, USA In Assessment and Intervention for Executive Function Difficulties, McCloskey, Perkins, and Diviner provide a unique blend of theory, research, and practice that offers clinicians an overarching framework for the concept of executive functions (EFs) in educational settings. The conceptual model of executive functions is detailed, including their role in behavior, learning, and production across all settings. The heart of the book focuses on the practical issues involved in the use of assessment tools, tests, report writing, and the implementation and follow-up of targeted interventions using the EF model.

2008: 392pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95783-0: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95784-7: $34.95

Series: School-Based Practice in Action

60 day examination copy available Also in the Series

Burns/Gibbons: Implementing Response-toIntervention in Elementary and Secondary Schools: Procedures to Assure Scientific-Based Principles Hb: 978-0-415-96391-6: 2008: 264pp. $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-96392-3: 2008: 264pp. $34.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at /


the peer power program

School-based mental health

From Judith A. Tindall, Psychological Network, Inc., Missouri, USA

A Practitioner’s Guide to Comparative Practices

Peer Programs An In-Depth Look at Peer Programs: Planning, Implementation, and Administration

Second Edition Judith A. Tindall, and David R. Black, Purdue University, Indiana, USA Intended to be of use to those responsible for planning, implementing and/or administering peer programs, this text should also convince those who are not directly involved that peer helping is a worthwhile undertaking.

2008: 352pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96236-0: $44.95

Peer Power, Book One Strategies for the Professional Leader: Becoming an Effective Peer Helper and Conflict Mediator Fourth Edition

The professional strategies book provides the program leader/facilitator with clear and easy to follow guidelines for implementing the Peer Power Program. Pb: 978-0-415-96231-5: January 2009: 240pp. $29.95

Peer Power, Book One Workbook: Becoming an Effective Peer Helper and Conflict Mediator Fourth Edition

Peer Power, Book One, Workbook brings the participating students through a series of thirteen Modules, introducing the group to the Peer Power Program, the role of the peer helper, the eight core skills, and strategies for implementing the peer work into practice. Pb: 978-0-415-96232-2: January 2009: 384pp. $29.95

Peer Power, Book Two Strategies for the Professional Leader: Applying Peer Helper Skills Third Edition

Picking up where Book One left off, the leader’s guide to Book Two proceeds through the same series of Modules that are found in the Book Two student Workbook. Pb: 978-0-415-96233-9: January 2009: 208pp. $29.95

Peer Power, Book Two Workbook: Applying Peer Helper Skills Third Edition

Picking up where Book One left off, the Peer Power, Book Two, Workbook brings the participating students through a series of additional Modules, focusing on how to apply the core skills learned in the first half of the program in real life situations.

School-Based Mental Health

Ray W. Christner, and Rosemary B. Mennuti, both at the Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA This volume provides school-based practitioners with a comprehensive and comparative guide to the strategic interventions, therapeutic modalities, and treatment approaches that are most commonly and effectively used in educational settings. Three main sections of the text present a foundation of universal interventions, targeted interventions, and alternative interventions appropriate for use in schools. Unifying the chapters are two central case examples, allowing the reader to see and evaluate the strengths and potential challenges of each technique in a familiar situation. Contents: An Overview of School-based Practice. Part I: Foundation of Universal Interventions. Problem-solving Approaches in Prevention. Building Resiliency in Schools. School-wide Behavioral Support. Minimizing Barriers to Learning. Part II: Selected and Targeted Interventions. CognitiveBehavioral Approaches. Individual Behavior Supports. Reality Therapy. Client-centered Therapy. Family System Interventions. Adlerian/Constructivist Approaches. Part III: Alternative Interventions. Play Therapy. Art Therapy. Movement Therapy. Mindfulness Interventions. Part IV: Summary. Integrating Perspectives into Practice. Appendix.

2008: 456pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95558-4: $44.95

Theory and Cases in School-Based Consultation A Resource for School Psychologists, School Counselors, Special Educators, and Other Mental Health Professionals

Laura M. Crothers, Tammy L. Hughes, and Karen A. Morine, all at Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, USA This casebook provides an applied perspective regarding school-based consultation, including an overview of mental health consultation, behavioral consultation, social learning theory consultation, Adlerian consultation, and ecological/organizational consultation. Along with relevant discussion of the issues in each case study, critical thinking questions are included for discussion among students and educators regarding school-based consultation. School-Based mental health professionals, educators, and graduate students will find Theory and Cases in School-Based Consultation an indispensable guide in their work and study. Contents: Erchul, Foreword. Overview. Mental-Health Consultation. Behavioral Consultation. Social Learning Theory Consultation. Adlerian Consultation. Organizational/Ecological Consultation.

2008: 192pp. Pb: 978-0-415-96337-4: $34.95

Pb: 978-0-415-96234-6: January 2009: 416pp. $29.95

60 day examination copies available FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35

family therapy

School-based mental health

Two Volume Handbook

Handbook of Education, Training, and Supervision of School Psychologists in School and Community

Mark Rivett, Cardiff and Vale NHS Trust, UK, and Eddy Street, Child and Adolescent Mental Health Service, UK “This book is excellent – clear, well organised, and very easy to find your way about!”

Foundations of Professional Practice Edited by Enedina Garcia-Vazquez, New Mexico State University, USA, Tony Crespi, University of Hartford, Connecticut, USA, and Cyndi Riccio, Texas A&M University, USA Co-published with The Trainers of School Psychologists Volume I of the Handbook of Education, Training, and Supervision of School Psychologists in School and Community focuses on the professional issues and topics that form the core of the university curriculum for the school psychology specialist degree. Four main sections review contemporary university training programs, foundations of school education, key areas of responsibility for school-based mental health professionals, and a look to the future of training for school psychologists. Selected Contents: Part I: Contemporary School Psychology Training:

The University. Part II: Foundations of Training Nastasi, How Much Theory Do We Teach? Part III: Training for Assessment and Evidence-based Practice. Part IV: Training for Intervention: Systems, Settings, and Special Populations. Part V: School Psychology Training: Rooted in the Past, Practicing in the Present, and Contemplating the Future: Summary and Conclusions. November 2009: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96260-5: $55.00


Handbook of Education, Training, and Supervision of School Psychologists in School and Community Bridging the Training and Practice Gap: Building Collaborative University/Field Practices Volume 2

Family Therapy 100 Key Points and Techniques


Volume 1


- Arlene Vetere, University of Surrey, UK

Family therapy is increasingly recognised as one of the evidence based psychotherapies. In contemporary therapeutic practice, family therapy is helpful across the age span and for distress caused by family conflict, trauma and mental health difficulties. Because of this, many psychotherapists integrate elements of family therapy within their approaches. Family Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques provides a concise and jargon-free guide to 100 of the fundamental ideas and techniques of this approach. Divided into helpful sections, it covers: • family therapy theory • essential family therapy practice • using family therapy techniques • common challenges in family therapy • contemporary debates and issues • self issues for family therapists. Family Therapy: 100 Key Points and Techniques is an invaluable resource for psychotherapists and counsellors in training and in practice. As well as appealing to established family therapists, this latest addition to the 100 Key Points series will also find an audience with other mental health professionals working with families. selected Contents: Part I: Systems Theory. Part II: Complexities and Debates. Part III: Beginning Therapy. Part IV: The Therapist’s Techniques. Part V: Developing Interventions. Part VI: Techniques from Schools of Family Therapy. Part VII: Ending Therapy. Part VIII: The Self of the Therapist. Part IX: Dealing with Common Challenges in Family Therapy. Part X: Family Therapy in Contexts. Part XI: Debates and Issues.

July 2009: 328pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41038-0: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-415-41039-7: $21.95

Series: 100 Key Points

Edited by Judith Kaufman, Fairleigh Dickinson University, USA, and Tammy Hughes, Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, USA Co-published with The Trainers of School Psychologists Volume 2 bridges the gap from the classroom education to the field-based training of new professionals. Supervision is at the center of this process, and a major part of this volume focuses on the role of the supervisor as trainer in different contexts. A series of chapters is devoted to some of the most difficult situations that can unexpectedly confront the school psychologist in practice, and a third section considers the credentialing and continuing education issues of the school psychologist throughout the course of a career. A final section offers recommendations on how the collaboration between university and field-based education can be further improved in the future, to anticipate and meet the needs of the next generations of professionals and the children in their care. Selected Contents: Part I: Contemporary School Psychology Training:

University/Field Collaboration. Part II: What About Supervision Anyway? Trainers as Supervisors. Part III: Difficult Dialogues. Part IV: Professional Issues. Part V: Into the Future. November 2009: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96279-7: $55.00 for a further book in this series please see page 6 Forthcoming!

Functional Family Therapy An Evidence-Based Clinical Model for Working with Troubled Adolescents and their Families Thomas Sexton, Indiana University, USA Functional Family Therapy develops a comprehensive presentation that serves as a systematic guide to understanding the FFT clinical model, the FFT service delivery system, the theoretical principles that serve as the foundation of FFT, and the mechanism of therapeutic change that gives FFT its potency. Clinically relevant, theoretically sound, and scientifically based, this book contains systematic discussions of topics and theoretical perspectives, as well as illustrative clinical examples that demonstrate the manner in which principles are applied in FFT.

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at /

family therapy


Contents: The Development of Functional Family Therapy: A Dynamic and Evolutional Model. The Evolution of FFT: Traditional Theory to EvidenceBased Practice. Meeting the Needs of Troubled Youth: Clinical Problems, Theoretical Principles, and Scientific Foundations. The Clinical Change Model: Empowering Youth and Families. Engagement and Motivation Phase. Behavior Change Phase. Generalization Phase. The Clinical and Community Based Applications of FFT. FFT “In the Room”: Clinical Case Examples of the FFT Model. Successfully Transporting Functional Family Therapy into Community Settings.

April 2010: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99691-4: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99692-1: $49.95

Systemic Therapy and Attachment Narratives Applications in a Range of Clinical Settings Rudi Dallos, University of Plymouth, UK, and Arlene Vetere, University of Surrey, UK “This book is a treasure and will benefit all family therapists, researchers and trainees. I learned a lot which has widened my perspectives of the field.” - John Byng-Hall, From the Foreword

Professional interest in the clinical applications of attachment theory continues to grow and evolve, and at the same time narrative approaches are also gaining ground. This book explores how attachment-based ideas can be used in clinical practice by offering a practical and sophisticated exposition of clinical approaches. Bringing together three main systems of thought and psychotherapeutic practice – systemic theory, attachment theory and narrative theory – practitioners are shown how to use these ideas in their work through the integrated approach of ‘attachment narrative therapy’. Contents: Byng-Hall, Foreword. Introduction. Systemic Therapy and Attachment

Narratives: Guiding Framework for Formulation and Therapy. Lifecycle Transitions and Attachment Narratives. Emotion Regulation: Aggression, ADHD and Violence in Families. Love and Sexuality: Systemic Therapy and Attachment Narratives: Applications with Couples. Working with Trauma and Dissociation. Loss, Grief and Attachment. Problems of Addiction: Alcohol Dependency and Eating Distress. Formats for Exploration. Reflections and Conclusions. April 2009: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41657-3: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41658-0: $34.95

Families in a Global Context

Edited by Charles B. Hennon, Miami University, USA, and Stephan M. Wilson, Oklahoma State University, USA How are families the same or different around the world? Families in a Global Context puts the similarities and differences into perspective, presenting an in-depth comparative analysis of family life in 17 countries around the world. Contributors discuss different countries’ family life by using a standard framework to review major influences and patterns. 2008: 624pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-2707-8: $129.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-2708-5: $94.95

New Edition!

Introduction to Family Processes Fifth Edition Randall D. Day, Brigham Young University, Utah, USA What goes on “behind closed doors” in families is examined in this text. Through an engaging, story telling style, Randy Day introduces readers to the family processes approach – the strategies and behavior patterns families use to achieve goals. It examines emotions in families, communication, relationship formation and dissolution, family rituals and secrets, ideological concerns, and power and conflict. The goal is to help readers increase the positive aspects of family life, avoid the undesirable parts, and effectively manage the inevitable challenges. Contents: Adapting to Family Life in Our Times. How We Study Families. Theories about Family Life. Families as Units of Change and Transition. Genetics, Personality, Gender, and Power in Families. Fixed Family Relationships: Generations in Family Life. Chosen Relationships and the Roots of Mature Love. The Core of Family Life: Paradigms, Themes, and Ideologies. Rules and Rule Sequences. Communicating in Families. Regulating Distance. Building and Maintaining Family Rituals. Coping with Turbulence, Gains, and Losses.

August 2009: 304pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-761-1: $59.95



What Every Man Should Know about Being a Dad David Cohen, Writer, psychologist and film maker Written by psychologist and father of two, David Cohen, this book provides a guide for men on how to be a good dad and a supportive partner. Dealing directly with the key issues and the many stresses that fathers can face, it looks at the psychological research on child development, parenting and fathering in particular. It examines such thorny topics as step-fatherhood, the changing relationship between partners and sex after babies. It also offers valuable advice on problems all dads will face – how to bond, how to provide sensible discipline, learning to play and managing teenage tantrums and traumas. Written in a light and anecdotal style, this book tells men everything they need to know about being a dad. Contents: Joy. You Are Not a Spare Part Whatever Psychologists Say. Fathers Have a History. The Only True Immortality – For a Man. In at the Birth. Love at First Cry. Tensions for Parents. The Newborn Baby is No Fool. How the Baby’s Mind Develops and the Eternal Puzzle: Nature or Nurture? Sex and Personality. The Toddler’s Brain. Lies, Games and the Imagination, Oh and the Small Matter of Big Dragons: How Children Don’t Lie Brilliantly. Sex and Young Children. The Arts and Smarts of Discipline. School. Modern Stepfamily Life. Can We See Inside the Teenage Mind? Stress and Mental Health. The Worst: Depression, Attempted Suicide, Suicide. Savvy Kids Don’t Come Cheap. Who is the Child?

August 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48616-3: $34.95 Pb: 978-0-415-48617-0: $15.95

Series: Parent and Child

60 day examination copy available FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for UK, US and Canadian online orders over £20/$35



Parenting with Reason Evidence-Based Approaches to Parenting Dilemmas Esther Yoder Strahan, Heidelberg College, Germany, Wallace E. Dixon, Jr., and J. Burton Banks, both at East Tennessee State University, USA Parenting with Reason cuts through the masses of often confusing and contradictory advice found in parenting self-help books to provide a rich commonsense manual on “evidence-based parenting”. Grounded in the best research available, it provides parents with the evidence to back up the “tough parenting decisions” that they face. Written in an accessible, entertaining tone the book is ideal reading for new or prospective parents. The research is grounded in objective, scientific evidence which paediatricians and family health providers will also be able to utilize and endorse. Contents: A History of Science and Parenting Advice. Sleep and its Controversies. Breastfeeding vs. Bottle – Dilemmas in Infant Nutrition. Diet Dilemmas and Childhood Obesity. The “Mozart Effect,” Baby Einsteins, and Other Media-related MythInformation. Understanding and Dealing with Temperament. Medical Decisions for the Faint of Heart. What Goes in Must Come Out: Medical Perspectives on Toilet Training. How to Discipline your Child. Violence in the Media. Parents’ Psychological Health: Effects on Children. Your Child’s Psychological Health: Nurturing Strengths and Handling Problems. Neuropsychology for Parents: ADHD and Head Injuries. Parenting Adolescents: Handling the Transitions from Childhood to Adulthood. Children, Family Structure, and Life Choices.

December 2009: 328pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41328-2: $62.95 Pb: 978-0-415-41329-9: $19.95

Series: Parent and Child

The Parent Survival Guide From Chaos to Harmony in Ten Weeks or Less

Theresa Kellam, in private practice, Texas, USA In The Parent Survival Guide: From Chaos to Harmony in Ten Weeks or Less, Theresa Kellam presents a way to strengthen the relationship with the child that simultaneously promotes the parent’s own emotional healing and wellness. Grounded in a research-supported therapeutic technique that uses structured play time as the catalyst for interpersonal connection and growth, Kellam’s model is subtle in its simplicity. Through a series of guided exercises, Kellam gives parents the skills they need to begin to set aside special playtimes with their children, during which the most important part of the process is simply “being there” in a way that promotes healing, growth, and communication. The beauty of this approach is that in only 30 minutes, once a week, the results can be seen in only a few weeks. Contents: Introduction: This Program is Different. Making a Loving Connection. The Wonder of Play: Speaking Your Child’s Language. A Window to Your Child’s Inner World. Promoting Your Child’s Emotional Maturity. Your Child’s Place in Your Heart. Gaining Your Child’s Respect. Connecting with Your Child. Nurturing Your Child’s Inner Wisdom. Facilitating Your Child’s Healing.

2008: 264pp. Pb: 978-0-415-98934-3: $19.95

couples therapy


Routledge Recommends! Winner of the 2009 Smart Marriages® Impact Award!

Discovering Your Couple Sexual Style Sharing, Desire, Pleasure, and Satisfaction Barry W. McCarthy, American University, Washington DC., USA, and Emily McCarthy, writer “Once again the McCarthys have created a classic, easy to read, and relevant guide to a great sex life that is tailored to your personal style and taste. Great insights, compelling stories and fun exercises make this a must read book.” - Dr. Sue Johnson, author of Becoming an

Emotionally Focused Couple Therapist: The Workbook, and The Practice of Emotionally Focused Couple Therapy: Creating Connection

The quality of most couple sex doesn’t measure up to the much distorted image of the perfect romantic love/passionate sex encounter portrayed in popular culture. In Discovering Your Couple Sexual Style renowned marital and sex therapist Barry McCarthy and his wife Emily McCarthy urge couples to ignore what they see on TV, in books, or online, and discover their own unique sexual style. Based on three years of research and treating more than 4,000 individuals and couples, Discovering Your Couple Sexual Style provides information, guidelines, exercises, and case studies that will help readers find their own sexual voice and develop a mutually satisfying sexual style. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Developing a Healthy Couple Sexuality. Establishing Positive, Realistic Sexual Expectations. Determining Your Couple Sexual Style. Communicating Your Sexuality: The Five Dimensions of Touch. Successfully Implementing Your Couple Sexual Style. Part II: Enhancing Desire and Satisfaction. Keeping Your Sexual Options Open. Building Bridges to Desire. Indulging in Eroticism and Sexual Fantasies. Optimizing Sexual Intercourse. Savoring Orgasm and Afterplay. Part III: Surmounting Sexual Challenges. Overcoming Sexual Inhibitions. Dealing with Illness and Sex. Looking for Help from Pro-sex Medications. Confronting Sex and Aging. Part IV: Maintaining Healthy Couple Sexuality. Nurturing Sexuality as Intimate, Erotic Friends. Maintaining Sexual Vitality. Appendices.

January 2009: 152pp. Pb: 978-0-415-99469-9: $15.95 Also by Barry and Emily McCarthy Bestsellers! Rekindling Desire: A Step-by-Step Program to Help Low-Sex and No-Sex Marriages Pb: 978-0-415-93551-7: 2003: 224pp. $18.95

Getting it Right This Time: How to Create a Loving and Lasting Marriage Pb: 978-0-415-95169-2: 2005: 224pp. $17.95

Getting It Right the First Time: Creating a Healthy Marriage Pb: 978-0-415-94829-6: 2004: 232pp. $19.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

couples therapy


Systemic Sex Therapy Edited by Katherine M. Hertlein, and Gerald R. Weeks, both at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas, USA, and Nancy Gambescia, in private practice, Philadelphia, USA

Systemic Sex Therapy serves as an introduction to the field of sex therapy from a systems perspective. It is an excellent resource for graduate students in marriage and family therapy programs or students and professionals who want a truly fresh perspective on sex therapy. This approach moves beyond traditional behavioral approaches to incorporate individual, couple, and intergenerational factors in etiology and treatment. Unlike current books on the market that are outdated, too advanced, simplistic, unfocused, or too diffuse in content, Systemic Sex Therapy is comprehensive, concise, highly focused on treatment, user-friendly, and contains features not found in other sex therapy texts, such as a systemic/behavioral focus, clinical innovation, and a greater focus on implementation rather than competing works. Contents: Ridley, What Every Sex Therapist Needs to Know. Kleinplatz, The Profession of Sex Therapy. Hertlein, Weeks, Toward a New Paradigm in Sex Therapy. Weeks, Hertlein, Gambescia, The Treatment of Hypoactive Sexual Desire Disorder. Gambescia, Sendak, Weeks, The Treatment of Erectile Dysfunction. Betchen, Premature Ejaculation: An Integrative, Intersystems Approach for Couples. Foley, The Complex Etiology of Delayed Ejaculation: Assessment and Treatment Implications. Wylie, Hallam-Jones, Inhibited Arousal in Women. McCabe, Anorgasmia in Women. Meana, Painful Intercourse: Dyspareunia and Vaginismus. Turner, Uncovering and Treating Sex Addiction in Couples Therapy. Hertlein, Weeks, Gambescia, An Integrative Approach to Infidelity Treatment. Verhulst, Reynolds, Sexual Pharmacology: Love Potions, Pills, and Poisons. Weeks, Gambescia, A Systemic Approach to Sensate Focus. Trepper, Reyger, Yalowitz, Ford, Solution-Focused Brief Therapy for the Treatment of Sexual Disorders. Weeks, Gambescia, Hertlein, Sex Therapy: A Panoramic View. Epilogue: A Personal Note on Being a Sex Therapist. 2008: 423pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3668-1: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3669-8: $44.95

60 day examination copy available

Case Formulation. Treatment Principles, Strategies, and Techniques. Factors Complicating Treatment. Working with Particular Populations. Practical Issues and Resources for Sex Therapy. Practice and Ethical Issues. Formalized Assessments and Inventories in Sex Therapy. Handouts, Exercises, and Worksheets. Psychoeducational Resources in Sex Therapy. February 2009: 193pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3822-7: $69.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3823-4: $29.95

60 day examination copy available

A Therapist at Work with Sexual Secrets Gale Holtz Golden, in private practice, Vermont, USA In the Grip of Desire gives both the professional and lay reader the rare opportunity to experience the sequestered world of the therapist as she works with people who have sexual secrets and behaviors. Referencing the academic literature and research, using rich case material, and a broad use of literary references, the book unpretentiously demonstrates the basic concepts and issues in treating compelling and legal sexual behaviors. The book also offers a uniquely jargon-free, human view of the subject. Golden compassionately and non-judgmentally speaks to the universality of the experience of sexual obsessions and compelling sexual behaviors and their impact on relationships, families, and society. Contents: Introduction. Above All Do No Harm. Transparent. The Dance of Denial and the Silent Dialogue. Anamnesis: Past History in Present Time. Treatment: A Time for Thinking and a Time for Action. “I Sing the Body Electric:” Techno-sex in the Post-Modern World. Some Call it Love: Women and the Need for Connection. Stabilizing the Family System. Rapprochement and Relapses: “There is Still a Future.” “Cradlers of Secrets.”

May 2009: 262pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99157-5: $39.95

Companion Volume to Systemic Sex Therapy!

A Clinician’s Guide to Systemic Sex Therapy Katherine M. Hertlein, and Gerald R. Weeks, both at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas, USA, and Shelley K. Sendak, teaches courses in women’s studies, women’s sexuality, and sexual minority health A Clinician’s Guide to Systemic Sex Therapy provides readers with an integrative and comprehensive theory in guiding their clinical practice. Pragmatically oriented, this text walks clinicians through diagnosis and treatment with resources such as tables, graphs, flow charts, and implementation strategies. Acknowledging that information needs to be guided by a theory that can be translated into practice, the authors use the Intersystems approach to provide a comprehensive perspective in understanding and improving intimate and sexual relationships for clients. Contents: Conducting Sex Therapy Step-by-Step from an Intersystems Approach. The Intersystems Approach to Sex Therapy. Assessment Within the Intersystems Approach. Step-by-step Diagnosis of Sexual Dysfunctions.

In the Grip of Desire


Premature Ejaculation The New Neuroscientific and Drug Treatment Approach Marcel Waldinger, General Hospital, Leyenburg, The Netherlands Marcel Waldinger is one of the leading PE researchers in the world, and a staunch proponent of the neurobiological origin theory of the disorder. Based on his own research, findings, and experience, Dr. Waldinger carefully examines the current PE literature, existing theory, and treatment strategies (both behavioral and the recent psycho-pharmacological), before presenting his own theory of the basis of PE. After presenting the multidisciplinary support of his theory, the author considers future treatment strategies and the implications of current pharmaceutical research and impending products. Selected Contents: What is Premature Ejaculation? Psychotherapy of Premature Ejaculation. Definition and Classification of Premature Ejaculation. Drug Treatment of Premature Ejaculation. Neuropharmacology of Premature Ejaculation. Animal Models of Premature Ejaculation. Physiology of Ejaculation. March 2010: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95163-0: $59.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

couples therapy


Common Dilemmas in Couple Therapy Judith P. Leavitt, psychologist and co-founder at Sundance Counseling and Consulting, Wayland, Massachusetts, USA Common Dilemmas in Couples Therapy addresses four common problems that couples therapists face everyday in their offices, problems that leave therapists exhausted, drained, challenged, alive, racing, and on edge. These dilemmas encompass not only the difficult challenges therapists face everyday, but also the passions and profound disappointments of human intimate partnerships. The purpose of this book is not only to explore and give case illustrations of these dilemmas, but also to give therapists strategies to use and help them understand and handle their own profound experiences while doing this work. SELECTED Contents: Part I: Dealing with a Difficult Partner. Part II: Secrets in Couples Therapy. Part III: Dealing with a Partner Who Won’t/Can’t Change. Part IV: The Break Up of a Couple Relationship.

August 2009: 223pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99990-8: $69.95 Pb: 978-0-415-80001-3: $34.95

60 day examination copy available

The Spiritual Work of Marriage David C. Olsen, Executive Director, Samaritan Counseling Center, USA

The Spiritual Work of Marriage comprehensively discusses an issue that is central to addressing committed relationships and intimacy – the difficult, and yet very common, spiritual work that exists within marriage. This insightful guide goes deeper into ways to improve marital intimacy by explaining its spiritual dimension and describing a variety of spiritual themes that every couple deals with and must resolve. The book contains practical case study material, questions for group discussion, and a series of spiritual and theological theories tied to powerful marital dynamics. Contents: Introduction. The Longing to be Known. The Idolatry of

Attempting to Change Your Partner. The Sins of the Fathers and the Longing for Redemption. Repentance and Relationships: You Really Do Have to Say “I’m Sorry.” Intimacy and Forgiveness. Salvation, Marriage, and Grace.

2008: 112pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3632-2: $49.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3633-9: $24.95

60 day examination copy available for further books on Spirituality please see page 20


Breaking Up Blues A Guide to Survival and Growth

Denise Cullington, psychoanalyst, in private practice, Oxford, UK “A wise and practical book for managing heartbreak and change.” - Dorothy Rowe Breaking Up Blues is an indispensable, practical self-help book for those going through break-up and divorce. Leaver or left, breaking up is much more painful than you’d ever expect. There are so many pitfalls that can leave you stuck in bitterness and rage, emotional emptiness, or in endless depression. Time on its own does not necessarily heal all. Written by a psychoanalyst, who has her own experience of break up, Denise Cullington is sympathetic but challenging. She takes you gently but firmly through the areas we would rather not think about – feelings of failure and of guilt; of hatred and envy; of sadness and loss – and shows the cost of pushing such feelings out of conscious mind. selected Contents: Part I: Prelude to Break Up. Part II: The Trauma of Breakup. Part III: Toolkits. Part IV: Emotional Toolkit. Part V: Children. Part VI: A Wider Focus. Part VII: The Future.

2008: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45546-6: $71.95 Pb: 978-0-415-45547-3: $17.95

Intercultural Couples Exploring Diversity in Intimate Relationships

Edited by Terri A. Karis, University of Wisconsin-Stout, USA, and Kyle D. Killian, York University, Toronto, Canada While cross-cultural relations were once assumed to be inherently problematic, in recent years these couples have increased in both numbers and social acceptance, and there is now a growing awareness of how little we really know about them. Addressing this gap in our knowledge, this book presents 12 chapters focusing on cross-cultural couple formations. Contents: Killian, Introduction. Theoretical Frameworks for Understanding Intercultural Couples. Rosenblatt, A Systems Theory Analysis of Intercultural Couple Relationships. Leeds-Horwitz, Ambiguity as a Solution to the “Problem” of Intercultural Weddings. Ting-Toomey, A Mindful Approach to Managing Conflict in Intercultural Intimate Couples. Examining Prevalent Assumptions about Intercultural Relationships. Piller, “I Always Wanted to Marry a Cowboy”: Bilingual Couples, Language, and Desire. Grearson, Smith, The Luckiest Girls in the World. Karis, “We’re Just a Couple of People”: An Exploration of Why Some Black-White Couples Reject the Terms Cross-cultrual and Interracial. Agathangelou, Killian, Electronic Attachments: Desire, the Other, and the Internet Marital Trade in the 21st Century. Particular Cultural Combinations. Visson, Russian-American Marriages: Cultures and Conflicts. Llerena-Quinn, Bacigalupe, Constructions of Difference Among Latino/ Latina Immigrant and Non-Hispanic White Couples. Rastogi, Asian Indians in Intercultural Marriages: Intersections of Acculturation, Gender, and Exogamy. Daneshpour, Bridges Crossed, Paths Traveled: Muslim Intercultural Couples. Gaines, Ramkissoon, U.S./Caribbean Couples: Perspectives from Caribbean Psychology and Mainstream Social Psychology.

2008: 274pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-2939-3: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-2940-9: $39.95

60 day examination copy available FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20


couples therapy

Married Women Who Love Women Second Edition Carren Strock, sociologist and author This book is about women in heterosexual marriages who discover or come to terms with their lesbianism or bisexuality. It answers questions such as how women make this discovery, what they do once they realize their same-gender sexuality, how family and friends deal with the situation, and what happens to marriages and families.

This second edition contains a new introduction, three new chapters, a glossary of gay-related terms, and a new list of additional reading. Contents: New Introduction. Original Introduction. Part I: The Discovery. Awakening. What Am I? What Now? Part II: A New Life. Do I Tell My Husband or Not? The Husbands. What Do the Kids Think? Coming Out to Friends and Family. Part III: Options. The Reality of Marriage. Redefined Marriages. The Single Lovers of Married Women. Labeling: Lesbian or Bisexual. Part IV: Selfhood. Sexual Intimacy. New Beginnings. Appendix: Where to Turn for Help and Information. Glossary: Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Terminology.

2008: 231pp. Hb: 978-1-56023-790-7: $59.99 Pb: 978-1-56023-791-4: $24.95

When the Opposite Sex Isn’t Sexual Orientation in Maleto-Female Transgender People Sandra L. Samons, licensed clinical social worker and marriage and family therapist

“When the Opposite Sex Isn’t is unlike typical psychological accounts. Instead of cramming trans individuals into pre-existing etiological theories and taxonomies, Samons provides insights into transgender people’s lives and includes numerous helpful anecdotes that demystify their experience.” - Julia Serano, author of Whipping Girl: A Transsexual Woman on Sexism and the Scapegoating of Feminity

When there is uncertainty about the gender identity or social gender role of an individual, determining exactly who the opposite sex is can be a complicated question for both the transgender person and for those who seek to relate to her. Written in both an enlightened and a reader friendly style interspersed with vignettes, When the Opposite Sex Isn’t offers a combination of insights and common sense understanding of the diversity of the human condition together with concepts of gender and sexuality that expand the horizons of any mental health professional, regardless of the clinical focus of his or her work. Contents: Introduction. Beyond Vocabulary. Sex and Gender. The Birth of the Research Project at Hand. Findings About Sexual Orientation in MTF Transgender People. Approaches to Therapy With Transgender Clients. Transgender Children and Transgender Parents. Wives and Partners. Some Further Comments on Transgender and Findings of the Current Research. Where Do We Go From Here? Appendices.

2008: 320pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3446-5: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3447-2: $49.95

60 day examination copy available


The Infinite Question

Christopher Bollas, Psychoanalyst, Member of the British Psychoanalytical Society, UK In his latest book Christopher Bollas uses detailed studies of real clinical practice to illuminate a theory of psychoanalysis which privileges the human impulse to question. From earliest childhood to the end of our lives, we are driven by this impulse in its varying forms, and The Infinite Question illustrates how Freud’s free associative method provides both patient and analyst with answers and, in turn, with an ongoing interplay of further questions. At the book’s core are transcripts of real analytical sessions, accompanied by parallel commentaries which highlight key aspects of the free associative method in practice. These transcripts are contextualised by further discussion of the cases themselves, as well as a wider theoretical framework which places its emphasis on Freud’s theory of the logic of sequence: by learning to listen to this free associative logic, Bollas argues, we can discover a richer and more complex unconscious voice than if we rely solely on Freud’s theory of repressed ideas. Bollas demonstrates, in an eloquent and persuasive manner, how the Freudian position of evenly suspended attentiveness enables the analyst’s unconscious to catch the drift of the patient’s own unconscious. He also shows that to stimulate further questioning is often of more benefit to the analytical process than to jump to an interpretation. Yet whatever fascinating course a session may take, neither the patient nor the analyst can halt the progress of the selfpropelling interrogative drive. Contents: Introduction. This World Without End. A Specially Intrinsic Connection. Weaving in the Factory of Thought. Listening. To Catch the Drift. Scoring the Unconscious. ‘Arlene’. ‘Caroline’. ‘Annie’. Unconscious Work. The Infinite Question. Appendix.

2008: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47391-0: $71.95 Pb: 978-0-415-47392-7: $23.95

Companion Volume to The Infinite Question!

The Evocative Object World Christopher Bollas, Psychoanalyst, Member of the British Psychoanalytical Society, UK Containing the essay Free Association In The Evocative Object World Christopher Bollas builds on Freud’s account of dream formation, combining it with perceptive clinical, theoretical and cultural insights to show how the psychoanalytical method can provide a rich understanding of what has traditionally been regarded as ‘the outside world’. Moving from the fundamentals of the free associative technique, through an examination of how architecture and the built environment interact with individual and societal dream life, Bollas extends the work of psychoanalysis beyond relations with literature and culture to the actual objects which surround us. As with the evocative external structures of our environment, Bollas describes how the family, with its inherited genetic structures, likewise constitutes a pre-existent unconscious formation into which we are placed, and demonstrates that there is more to this multifaceted unit than the traditional psychoanalytical notion of the Oedipal triangle.

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

psychoanalysis In the process, Bollas also provides a fascinating and comprehensive review of how his own theories have evolved over the past three decades: a period during which, in his view, Western society has increasingly neglected – or even become actively hostile towards – unconscious life.

2008: 136pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47393-4: $71.95 Pb: 978-0-415-47394-1: $23.95


Spontaneity A Psychoanalytic Inquiry Gemma Corradi Fiumara, The Third University of Rome, Italy

Throughout this engaging and accessible text, Bollas rejects the simplistic notion that mental life is unconsciously determined. Instead he provides a compelling study of how unconscious life is shaped by a diverse array of both internal and external factors, and how the work of the Freudian pair provides the best means to gain insight into our dreams, our surroundings, our families – and our mental life as a whole. Contents: Introduction. Free Association. Architecture and the Unconscious. The Evocative Object World. The Fourth Object and Beyond.


“Dr. Corradi Fiumara seeks to lift psychoanalytic thinking from the creature-driven level of psychic determinism to the higher level of subjective, spontaneous, ineffability, unpredictability, humanness – as metapsychological constructs. I found this to be an exciting and innovative work.” - James Grotstein, author of Beam of Intense Darkness

Psychoanalytic theory frequently explains psychopathology from the perspectives of either inadequate early care or as the result of environmental factors. In this book the author suggests that poor mental health can be a result of our incapacity to respond to internal and external stimuli, and indicates that spontaneity is essential in the development of many aspects of the self.

Containing States of Mind

It is not what happens to us, but how we react to events, that forms who we are. Spontaneity presents an original approach to issues of agency, spontaneity and creativity in psychoanalysis.

Exploring Bion’s ‘Container Model’ in Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy

Contents: Introductory Remarks. Rethinking Internalization. The Function of Paradox. Subjective Agency – And Passivity. The Problem of Entitlement. Actions and Reactions. The Question of Forgiveness. The Quest of Responsibility. Empathy and Sympathy. Self Formation and Self Decreation.

Duncan Cartwright, University of Kwa-Zulu Natal, South Africa “Bion’s concept of the “container and the contained” has become one of his most well-known and used ideas – to the point that it has become taken for granted (“saturated,” in Bion’s terms). Duncan Cartwright has given this concept new life... A number of works on Bion have been published recently, this one is in my opinion one of the finest and most useful.” - James Grotstein, Training and Supervising Analyst and Clinical Professor of Psychiatry, UCLA, USA

In Containing States of Mind Duncan Cartwright explores and develops some of the implications Bion’s container model has on clinical practice. He argues that the analyst or therapist best fulfils a containing function by negotiating irreconcilable internal tensions between his role as ‘dream object’ and ‘proper object’. The container model is also used to illustrate different ‘modes of interaction’ in the analytic field, the nature of particular pathological states and some of the key dilemmas faced in attempting to make unbearable mental states more bearable. As well as addressing key theoretical problems, Containing States of Mind is a clinical text that renders complex ideas accessible and useful for psychotherapeutic and analytic practice and as such will be essential reading for all those involved in the fields of psychoanalysis and psychotherapy. Contents: Encountering Unbearable States of Mind. Projective Identification, Countertransference and the Containing Function. The Analyst’s Containing Mind. Polarities of the Containing Connection. Notes on Interpretation. Speculations About Proto-containing Experiences. Modes of Interaction. Idealizing the Container. Some Aspects of Beta-mentality on Mimicry and Thinking in a Technological Age. Beta-mentality in Violent Men. The Autistic Mode in Agoraphobic Syndrome. The Dead Alive Self in Borderline States.

October 2009: 280pp. Hb: 978-1-58391-878-4: $99.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-879-1: $36.95

May 2009: 152pp. Hb: 978-0-415-49268-3: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49269-0: $36.95

Thinking for Clinicians Philosophical Resources for Contemporary Psychoanalysis and the Humanistic Psychotherapies Donna M. Orange, Institute for the Psychoanalytic Study of Subjectivity, New York, USA

Thinking for Clinicians provides analysts of all orientations with the tools and context for working critically within psychoanalytic theory and practice. It does this through detailed chapters on some of the philosophers whose work is especially relevant for contemporary theory and clinical writing: Emmanuel Levinas, Martin Buber, Ludwig Wittgenstein, Maurice Merleau-Ponty, and Hans-Georg Gadamer. Orange presents the historical background for their ideas, along with clinical vignettes to help contextualize their theories, further grounding them in realworld experience. With a hermeneutic sensibility firmly in mind, Thinking for Clinicians rewards as it challenges and will be a valuable reference for clinicians who seek a better understanding of the philosophical bases of contemporary psychoanalytic theory. Contents: Introduction: Psychotherapy in a Socratic Spirit. Martin Buber: The Dialogic We. Ludwig Wittgenstein: Nothing is Hidden. Maurice Merleau-Ponty: Embodied Intersubjectivity. Emmanuel Levinas: Trauma in the Face of the Other. Hans-Georg Gadamer: Understanding the Situation with the Other.

July 2009: 168pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-492-1: $80.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-493-8: $29.99

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20



Beyond Postmodernism New Dimensions in Clinical Theory and Practice

Edited by Roger Frie, Long Island University, New York, USA, and Donna Orange, Institute for the Psychoanalytic Study of Subjectivity, New York, USA Beyond Postmodernism identifies ways in which psychoanalysis has moved beyond the postmodern debate and discusses how this can be applied to contemporary practice. Roger Frie and Donna Orange bring together many of the leading authorities on psychoanalytic theory and practice to provide a broad scope of psychoanalytic viewpoints and perspectives on the growing interdisciplinary discourse among psychoanalysis, continental philosophy, social theory and philosophy of mind. Contents: Frie, Introduction: Coherence or Fragmentation? Modernism, Postmodernism, and the Search for Continuity. Part I: Psychoanalytic Encounters with Postmodernism. Eagle, Postmodern Influences on Contemporary Psychoanalysis. Frederickson, Multiplicity and Relational Psychoanalysis: A Heideggerian Response. Teicholz, A Strange Convergence: Postmodern Theory, Infant Research, and Psychoanalysis. Wilkinson, Primary Process of Deconstruction: Towards a Derridian Psychotherapy. Part II: Psychoanalysis Beyond Postmodernism. Orange, Toward the Art of the Living Dialogue: Between Constructivism and Hermeneutics in Psychoanalytic Thinking. Stolorow, Trauma and Human Existence: The Mutual Enrichment of Heidegger’s Existential Analytic and a Psychoanalytic Understanding of Trauma. Frie, Reconfiguring Psychological Agency: Postmodernism, Recursivity, and the Politics of Change. Coburn, Attitudes in Psychoanalytic Complexity: An Alternative to Postmodernism in Psychoanalysis. Elliott, Identity, Identification, Imagination: Psychoanalysis and Modern European Thought after the Postmodern Turn. Modell, Naturalizing Relational Psychoanalytic Theory. Orange, Postscript: From Postmodern Skepticism to the Search for Psychoanalytic Understanding.

March 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46687-5: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46688-2: $36.95


The Work of Psychoanalysts in the Public Health Sector Edited by Mary Brownescombe Heller, Consultant Clinical Psychologist and Psychoanalyst, NHS, UK, and Sheena Pollet, Consultant Psychiatrist in Psychotherapy for 5 Boroughs Partnership NHS Trust This book provides a comprehensive insight into the ways in which psychoanalysts think and work. Mary Brownescombe Heller and Sheena Pollet bring together internationally known contributors trained at the Institute of Psychoanalysis to explore the broad range of clinical work, thinking, and teaching undertaken with children, families, adults and staff by psychoanalysts in the UK public health sector. Experienced psychoanalysts discuss work with various client groups including parents with babies, children, adolescents who self harm, and adults with serious mental health conditions and psychosis.

How to Talk to a Narcissist

Joan Lachkar, in private practice, California, USA Much has been written about narcissism, addressing not only its theoretical aspects, its psychodynamics and the defense mechanisms within the spectrum of various kinds of narcissists. Yet, little if anything has been written about how to actually communicate with one, or what Lachkar refers to as the “Language of Empathology.” This book focuses on specific communication styles in addressing patients with severe narcissistic personality pathology. 2008: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95855-4: $45.00

Building Out into the Dark Theory and Observation in Science and Psychoanalysis

Robert Caper, University of California, Los Angeles, USA In this book, Robert Caper provides the reader with an introduction to psychoanalysis focusing explicitly on whether psychoanalysis is part of the sciences, and if not, where it belongs. Many psychoanalysts, beginning with Freud, have considered their discipline a science. In this book Caper examines this claim and investigates the relationship of theory to observation in both philosophy and the experimental sciences and explores how these observations differ from those made in psychoanalytic interpretation. Contents: Introduction. Psychoanalysis and Science. Psychoanalysis and Science: Rules and Games. The Origins of Psychoanalysis in the Art of Medicine. Psychoanalytic Observation. Room for Doubt. Psychoanalytic Reasoning: Finding the Context. Terror and the Archaic Superego. Psychoanalysis, the Individual and the Group. Psychoanalytic Work.

January 2009: 120pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46680-6: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-415-46681-3: $29.95


The Zen Impulse and the Psychoanalytic Encounter

selected Contents: Part I: Clinical Work with Parents and Children. Part II: Clinical Work with Adults and Their Families. Part III: Analytic Thinking in Health Service Practice. Part IV: Analytic Support to Health Service Staff.

Paul C. Cooper, Dean of Training, National Psychological Association for Psychoanalysis Although psychoanalysis and Zen Buddhism derive from theoretical and philosophical assumptions worlds apart, both experientially-based traditions share at their heart a desire for the understanding, development, and growth of the human experience. Paul Cooper utilizes detailed clinical vignettes to contextualize the implications of Zen Buddhism in the therapeutic setting to demonstrate how its practices and beliefs inform, relate to, and enhance transformative psychoanalytic practice.

November 2009: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48428-2: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48429-9: $36.95

November 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99764-5: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99765-2: $34.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at




The Embedded Self

Growing Old

An Integrative Psychodynamic and Systemic Perspective on Couples and Family Therapy

A Journey of Self-Discovery

Second Edition Mary-Joan Gerson, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA “This was a marvelously comprehensive and integrative book when it first came out. In this new edition it is even better!.. A powerful and important book.” - Paul Wachtel, City University of New York, USA First published in 1996, The Embedded Self was lauded as “a brilliant and long overdue rapprochement between psychoanalysis and family therapy conceived by a practitioner trained and experienced in both modalities of treatment.” Mary-Joan Gerson’s integrated presentation of psychodynamic and family systems theory invited therapists of either orientation to learn the tools and techniques of the other, to mutual benefit. From a new and revised perspective on the possibilities of integration, Gerson covers the latest research in neuroscience and the transmission of affect within intimate relationships, with a new chapter on attachment theory and emotionally focused therapy.

Danielle Quinodoz, in private practice, Geneva, Switzerland Translated by David Alcorn In this book psychoanalyst Danielle Quinodoz highlights the value of old age and the fact that although many elderly people have suffered losses, either of their own good health or through bereavement, most have managed to retain the most important thing – their sense of self. Quinodoz argues that growing old provides us with the opportunity to learn more about ourselves and instead of facing it with dread, it should be celebrated. Throughout Growing Old the author draws on both her clinical experience of working with the elderly, and her own personal experience of growing old. This makes it an interesting read for both practicing psychoanalysts, and those who wish to gain a greater insight of the natural progression into later life. October 2009: 218pp. Hb: 978-0-415-54565-5: $80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54566-2: $24.95

Mirroring and Attunement Self-Realization in Psychoanalysis and Art

Kenneth Wright, in private psychoanalytic practice, Suffolk, UK “This lucidly written account of seminal concepts from Bion, Stern, Winnicott, brings them vividly to life through being integrated into an interdisciplinary work that incorporates ideas from art, poetry, and philosophy and makes it recommended reading for practitioners and students of psychoanalysis and psychotherapy.” - Ann Casement, Fellow of the Royal Anthropological Institute, UK

Mirroring and Attunement offers a new approach to psychoanalysis, artistic creation and religion. Viewing these activities from a broadly relational perspective, Wright proposes that each provides a medium for creative dialogue: the artist discovers himself within his self-created forms, the religious person through an internal dialogue with ‘God’, and the analysand through the inter-subjective medium of the analysis. Building on the work of Winnicott, Stern and Langer, the author argues that each activity is rooted in the infant’s preverbal relationship with the mother who ‘holds’ the emerging self in an ambience of mirroring forms, thereby providing a ‘place’ for the self to ‘be’. He suggests that the need for subjective reflection persists throughout the life cycle and that psychoanalysis, artistic creation and religion can be seen as cultural attempts to provide the self with resonant containment. June 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46829-9: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46830-5: $36.95


The Gendered Unconscious

August 2009: 304pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99241-1: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99242-8: $35.95


Can Gender Discourses Subvert Psychoanalysis? Louise Gyler, in private practice, Sydney, Australia This book investigates the nature of Feminist interventions in psychoanalysis by comparing the status and treatment of women in two different psychoanalytic models: the Kleinian and the feminist psychoanalytic models. September 2009: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40170-8: £80.95 Pb: 978-0-415-40171-5: £26.95

Series: Women and Psychology

Maternal Encounters The Ethics of Interruption Lisa Baraitser, Birkbeck, University of London, UK “This is an extremely unusual, subtle and important book... Maternal Encounters is a remarkable achievement.” - Stephen Frosh, Birkbeck College, University of London, UK

Drawing on contemporary philosophies of feminist ethics as well as psychoanalytic theorists, this book addresses a gap in theoretical work on contemporary motherhood. 2008: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45500-8: $80.95 Pb: 978-0-415-45501-5: $26.95

Series: Women and Psychology

for further books in this series please see pages 67, 68 See page 33 for books on Child and Adolescent Psychoanalysis

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20


Published by Gestalt Press Distributed by Routledge

Aggression, Time, and Understanding Contributions to the Evolution of Gestalt Therapy

Frank-M. Staemmler, Co-founder and Co-director of the Zentrum für Gestalttherapie, Würzburg, Germany “Frank-M. Staemmler is one of the most lucid thinkers I have ever known. Profoundly ethical, Aggression, Time, and Understanding is replete with thoughtful, even brilliant explorations of Gestalt therapy.” - Lynne Jacobs, Co-founder of the Pacific Gestalt Institute, USA

Aggression, Time, and Understanding is the first book of Staemmler’s writings to be published in English. In the early sections of this book, Staemmler comprehensively explores and questions the traditional Gestalt therapy theory of aggression and proposes a new approach to working with anger and hostility. Further sections include in-depth examinations of the topics of time (the “Here and Now” and “Regressive Processes”) and understanding (“Dialogue and Interpretation” and “Cultivated Uncertainty.”) Contents: Part I: Aggression. Ego, Anger, and Attachment: A Critique

of Perls’s Aggression Theory and Method. Part II: Time. The Here and Now is not What it Used to Be: The Tail of the Comet, the Face of Janus, and the Infinity of Possibilities. Towards a Theory of Regressive Processes in Gestalt Therapy: On Time Perspective, Developmental Model and the Wish to Be Understood. Part III: Understanding. Dialogue and Interpretation in Gestalt Therapy: Making Sense Together. Cultivated Uncertainty: An Attitude of Gestalt Therapists. July 2009: 384pp. Pb: 978-0-415-87098-6: $39.95

The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching Series

CoCreating the Field Intention and Practice in the Age of Complexity Edited by Deborah Ullman, coach, somatics-based therapist, and Gestalt trainer, Orleans, USA, and Gordon Wheeler, licensed clinical psychologist

Cocreating the Field is about developing a radically new story to shift our perception of who we are as humans from a focus on our separate individual natures to our complex interconnectedness. The core Gestalt model offers a theoretical and pragmatic frame for addressing urgent concerns in a wide range of crucial arenas. Topics include the new relational neuroscience and how it interfaces with Gestalt’s assumptions about healthy human process; how one therapist is working with children in Dharamsala, India and Capetown, South Africa to help them digitally tell their stories in support of resilience; how transformational thinking brings pro-social and, for some, spiritual questing into focus; and how Gestalt-trained practitioners, therapists, coaches and consultants can become citizen-practitioners in a troubled world. June 2009: 408pp. Pb: 978-0-415-87259-1: $39.95

Routledge Recommends!

Reading French Psychoanalysis Edited by Dana Birksted-Breen, and Sara Flanders, both Training and Supervising Analysts, British Psychoanalytical Society, and Alain Gibeault, Training and Supervising Analyst, Paris Psychoanalytical Society In this book, Dana Birksted-Breen and Sara Flanders of the British Psychoanalytical Society, and Alain Gibeault of the Paris Psychoanalytical Society provide an overview of how French psychoanalysis has developed since Lacan. Focusing primarily on the work of psychoanalysts from the French Psychoanalytical Association and from the Paris Psychoanalytical Society, the two British psychoanalysts view the evolution of theory as it appears to them from the outside, while the French psychoanalyst explains and elaborates from inside the French psychoanalytic discourse. Seminal and representative papers have been chosen to illuminate what is special about French thinking. A substantial general introduction argues in favour of the specificity of ‘French psychoanalysis’, tracing its early influences and highlighting specific contemporary developments. Sections are made up of introductory material by Alain Gibeault, followed by illustrative papers in the following categories: • the history of psychoanalysis in France • forefathers and filiations • the setting and process of psychoanalysis • phantasy and representation • the body and the drives • masculine and feminine sexuality • psychosis. An excellent introduction to French psychoanalytical debate, Reading French Psychoanalysis sheds a complementary light on thinking that has evolved differently in England and North America. selected Contents: Birksted-Breen, Flanders, General Introduction. Part I:

History of Psychoanalysis in France. Part II: The Pioneers and Their Legacy. Part III: The Setting and the Process of Psychoanalysis. Part IV: Phantasy and Representation. Part V: The Body and The Drives. Part VI: Masculine and Feminine Sexuality. Part VII: Psychosis. November 2009: 688pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48502-9: $150.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48503-6: $59.95

The New Library of Psychoanalysis Teaching Series

Also in the Series Quinodoz: Listening to Hanna Segal: Her Contribution to Psychoanalysis Hb: 978-0-415-44493-4: 2007: 184pp. $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44085-1: 2007: 184pp. $31.95

Quinodoz: Reading Freud: A Chronological Exploration of Freud’s Writings Hb: 978-1-58391-746-6: 2005: 320pp. $99.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-747-3: 2005: 320pp. $33.95

The Evolution of Gestalt Series: Volume 1 10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

the new library of psychoanalysis series


Melanie Klein in Berlin Her First Psychoanalyses of Children

Claudia Frank, in private practice, Stuttgart, Germany Edited and with a Preface by Elizabeth Spillius, Training and Supervising Psychoanalyst, British Psychoanalytical Society, UK Translated by Sophie Leighton, and Sue Young “This book is the work of a true scholar. And we all have much reason to thank Claudia for making us aware of the results of her meticulous comparison of Klein’s published papers, her unpublished papers and her clinical treatment notes.” - Elizabeth Spillius, From the Preface In this book Claudia Frank discusses how Melanie Klein began to develop her psychoanalysis of children. Melanie Klein in Berlin: Her First Psychoanalyses of Children offers a detailed comparative analysis of both published and unpublished material from the Melanie Klein archives. By using previously unpublished studies, Frank demonstrates how Klein enriched the concept of negative transference and laid the basis for the innovations on both technique and theory that eventually led not only to changes in child analysis, but also changes in the analysis of adults. Frank also uncovers the influence that this had on Klein’s later theories of the paranoid-schizoid and depressive positions, and on her understanding of psychotic anxieties. Contents: Spillius, Preface. Part I: Introduction. Melanie Klein’s Psychoanalytic

Clinical Work in Berlin. Grete: One of Melanie Klein’s Very First Little Girl Patients in Berlin. Rita: Klein’s Youngest Patient. The Beginning of the Play Technique: Inge and, Perhaps, Ernst? Erna: The Most Extensive Child Analysis of the Berlin Years. Conclusion. Part II: Notes to this Edition. Treatment Notes on Grete. Treatment Notes on Rita. Treatment Notes on Inge. Treatment Notes on Erna. May 2009: 504pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48497-8: $110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48498-5: $39.95

Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis


The Psychotic Wavelength A Psychoanalytic Perspective for Psychiatry Richard Lucas, was a consultant psychiatrist at St. Ann’s Hospital, London, UK, and a member of the British Psychoanalytical Society “In this admirably lucid book Dr Richard Lucas demonstrates that psychoanalysis has much to contribute to the treatment of seriously disturbed and disturbing psychiatric patients... I sincerely hope it will be read by a wide, professional, national and international audience and will become essential reading for junior psychiatrists and nursing staff in particular.” - Carine Minne, From the Foreword The Psychotic Wavelength provides a psychoanalytical framework for clinicians to use in everyday general psychiatric practice and discusses how psychoanalytic ideas can be of great value when used in the treatment of seriously disturbed and disturbing psychiatric patients with psychoses, including both schizophrenia and the affective disorders. In this book Richard Lucas suggests that when clinicians are faced with psychotic patients, the primary concern should be to make sense of what is happening during their breakdown. He refers to this as tuning into the

psychotic wavelength, a process that allows the clinician to distinguish between, and appropriately address, the psychotic and non-psychotic parts of the personality. He argues that if the clinician can find and identify the psychotic wavelength he can more effectively help the patient to come to terms with the realities of living with a psychotic disorder. selected Contents: Minne, Foreword. Part I: Making the Case for a

Psychoanalytic Perspective on Psychosis. Part II: Psychoanalytic Theories about Psychosis: A Selective Review. Part III: Tuning into The Psychotic Wavelength. Part IV: The Psychotic Wavelength in Affective Disorders. Part V: Implications for Management and Education. September 2009: 360pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48468-8: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48469-5: $36.95

Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis

Doubt, Conviction and the Analytic Process Selected Papers of Michael Feldman Michael Feldman, Training Analyst, British Psychoanalytical Society Edited by Betty Joseph

In this profound and subtle study, a practising psychoanalyst explores the dynamics of the interaction between the patient and the analyst. Michael Feldman draws the reader into experiencing how the clinical interaction unfolds within a session. In doing so, he develops some of the implications of the important pioneering work of such analysts as Klein, Rosenfeld and Joseph, showing in fine detail some of the ways in which the patient feels driven to communicate to the analyst, not only in order to be understood by him, but also in order to affect him. The author’s detailed descriptions of the clinical process allows the reader to follow the actual process that enables the patient to get into contact with thoughts and feelings of which he or she was previously unconscious or only vaguely aware. Contents: Schafer, Preface. Joseph, Introduction. Feldman, The Oedipus Complex: Manifestations in the Inner World and the Therapeutic Situation. Splitting and Projective Identification. Projective Identification: The Analyst’s Involvement. The Dynamics of Reassurance. The Illumination of History. Manifestation of the Death Instinct in the Consulting Room. Envy and the Negative Therapeutic Reaction. Addressing Parts of the Self. ‘I Was Thinking….’ The Defensive Use of Compliance. Grievance: The Underlying Oedipal Configuration. Filled with Doubt. The Problem of Conviction in the Session.

April 2009: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47934-9: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47935-6: $36.95

Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis

Mind Works Technique and Creativity in Psychoanalysis Antonino Ferro, Analyst and Supervisor, in private practice, Pavia, Italy In Mind Works Antonino Ferro uses clinical material such as detailed reports of sessions, together with client’s analytic histories, to develop Bion’s original findings and illustrate complex concepts in the field of psychoanalytic technique. These concepts include:

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20


the new library of psychoanalysis series

Psychoanalysis in a new key book Series

• interpretive modalities

• the end of analysis • psychosomatic pathologies

• narcissism. Mind Works: Technique and Creativity in Psychoanalysis also suggests that dreaming is a fundamental moment in analytic work, and Ferro discusses how dreams can go beyond the present to become a continuous act of the mind in the waking state, allowing internal and external stimuli to be transformed into thoughts and emotions. Focusing on how the minds of the analyst and the analysand work in psychoanalysis, this book will appeal to psychoanalysts, psychotherapists, and psychiatrists. Contents: Screenplays and Film Sets. Digressions on Interpretation. Psychosomatic Pathology or Metaphor: Problems of the Boundary. Homosexualities: A Field Ripe for Ploughing. A Model of the Mind and its Clinical Implications: How to Turn Back in Order to Move Forward. Instructions for Seafarers and the Shipwrecked: Signals from the Analytic Field and Emotional Transformations. The Patient’s Response to Interpretations and Events in the Field. Terminations Orthodox and Unorthodox. Narcissism and Frontier Areas.

January 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42991-7: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42992-4: $39.95

Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis

Rediscovering Psychoanalysis Thinking and Dreaming, Learning and Forgetting Thomas H. Ogden, Director, Centre for the Advanced Study of the Psychoses, San Francisco, USA

Rediscovering Psychoanalysis demonstrates how, by attending to one’s own idiosyncratic ways of thinking, feeling, and responding to patients, the psychoanalyst can develop a “style” of his or her own, a way of practicing that is a living process originating, to a large degree, from the personality and experience of the analyst. This book approaches rediscovering psychoanalysis from four vantage points derived from the author’s experience as a clinician, a supervisor, a teacher, and a reader of psychoanalysis. Thomas Ogden begins by presenting his experience of creating psychoanalysis freshly in the form of “talking-as-dreaming” in the analytic session; this is followed by an exploration of supervising and teaching psychoanalysis in a way that is distinctly one’s own and unique to each supervisee and seminar group. Ogden goes on to rediscover psychoanalysis in this book as he continues his series of close readings of seminal analytic works. Here, he makes original theoretical contributions through the exploration, explication, and extension of the work of Bion, Loewald, and Searles. Contents: Rediscovering Psychoanalysis. On Talking-As-Dreaming. On Psychoanalytic Supervision. On Teaching Psychoanalysis. Elements of Analytic Style: Bion’s Clinical Seminars. Bion’s Four Principles of Mental Functioning. Reading Loewald: Oedipus Reconceived. Reading Harold Searles.

2008: 184pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46862-6: $107.95 Pb: 978-0-415-46863-3: $36.95

Series: The New Library of Psychoanalysis

for further books in this series please visit


Partners in Thought Working with Unformulated Experience, Dissociation, and Enactment Donnel B. Stern, William Alanson White Institute, New York, USA Building on the innovative work of Unformulated Experience (1997), Donnel B. Stern continues his exploration of the creation of meaning in clinical psychoanalysis with Partners in Thought. The chapters in this fascinating book are undergirded by the concept that the meanings which arise from unformulated experience are catalyzed by the states of relatedness in which the meanings emerge. In hermeneutic terms, what takes place in the consulting room is a particular kind of conversation, one in which patient and analyst serve as one another’s partner in thought, an emotionally responsive witness to the other’s experience. Enactment, which Stern theorizes as the interpersonalization of dissociation, interrupts this crucial kind of exchange, and the eventual breach of enactments frees analyst and patient to resume it. Contents: Introduction: The Embodiment of Meaning in Relatedness. The Conversation and its Interruptions. The Fusion of Horizons: Dissociation, Enactment, and Understanding. The Eye Sees Itself: Dissociation, Enactment, and the Achievement of Conflict. Partners in Thought: A Clinical Process Theory of Narrative. Shall the Twain Meet? Metaphor, Dissociation, and Co-occurrence. Opening What Has Been Closed, Relaxing What Has Been Clenched: Dissociation and Enactment over Time in Committed Relationships. Enactment in Dissociation Theory and Mentalization Theory: A Clinical Comparison. “One Never Knows, Does One?” Thoughts on the Work of the Boston Change Process Study Group.

September 2009: 256pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99969-4: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99970-0: $34.95

Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series

Heterosexual Masculinities Contemporary Perspectives from Psychoanalytic Gender Theory

Edited by Bruce Reis, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA, and Robert Grossmark, City University of New York, USA Heterosexual Masculinities rethinks a psychoanalytic tradition that has long thought masculinity as a sort of brittle defense against femininity, softness, and emotionality. Reflecting current trends in psychoanalytic thinking, this book seeks to understand heterosexual masculinity as fluid, multiple, and emergent. The contributors to this insightful volume take new perspectives on relations between men, men’s positions as fathers in relation to their sons and daughters, the clinical encounter with heterosexual men, the social contexts of masculinity, and the multiplicity of heterosexual masculine subjectivities. Contents: Person, Masculinities, Plural. Masculinity and its Discontents. Diamond, Making Room for the “Mother” Inside the Male – An Essential

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

psychoanalysis in a new key book series Achievement for the Healthy Male Gender Identity. Reis, Names of the Father. Grossmark, Two Men Talking: The Emergence of Multiple Masculinities in Psychoanalytic Treatment. Hirsch, Imperfect Love, Imperfect Lives: Making Love, Making Sex, Making Moral Judgments. Kaftal, On Intimacy Between Men. Cornell, An Eruption of Erotic Vitality Between a Male Analyst and a Male Patient. Rozmarin, David and Jonathan. Adams, Psychotherapy with Poor African-American Men: Challenges Around the Construction of Masculinities. Harris, “Fathers” and “Daughters.” Rothschild, Finding a Father: Repetition, Difference, and Fantasy in Finding Nemo. Fogel, Interiority and Inner Genital Space in Men: What Else Can be Lost in Castration? February 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-501-0: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-502-7: $34.95

Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series

Also in the Series Buechler: Making a Difference in Patients’ Lives: Emotional Experience in the Therapeutic Setting Hb: 978-0-88163-443-3: 2008: 336pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-494-5: 2008: 336pp. $34.95

Hirsch: Coasting in the Countertransference: Conflicts of Self Interest between Analyst and Patient Hb: 978-0-88163-455-6: 2008: 240pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-480-8: 2008: 240pp. $34.95

Boulanger: Wounded by Reality: Understanding and Treating Adult Onset Trauma Hb: 978-0-88163-430-3: 2007: 250pp. $39.95

Sex Changes

Stein: Prologue to Violence: Child Abuse, Dissociation, and Crime

Transformations in Society and Psychoanalysis

Brown, Ed.: What Do Mothers Want?: Developmental Perspectives, Clinical Challenges

Mark J. Blechner, William Alanson White Institute, New York, USA In the 1950s, ambitious women were often seen as psychopathological and were told by psychoanalysts that they had penis envy that needed treatment; today, a woman has campaigned for President of the United States. Mark Blechner has lived and worked through these startling changes in society, and Sex Changes collects papers he has written over the last 45 years on sex, gender, and sexuality. Interspersed with these papers are reflections on the changes that have occurred during that time period, both within the scope of society at large as well as in his personal experiences inside and outside of the therapeutic setting. February 2009: 192pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99434-7: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99435-4: $34.95

Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series


The Consulting Room and Beyond Psychoanalytic Work and Its Reverberations in the Analyst’s Life Therese Ragen, New York University Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA Foreword by Donnel Stern

“... Ragen’s blend of therapeutic sophistication, personal candor, and breathtaking writing illuminates the truth of what is most fundamental to being an effective psychotherapist – one’s openness to being a human being.” - Philip M. Bromberg, Author, Standing in the Spaces and Awakening the Dreamer

The Consulting Room and Beyond is not a typical example of clinical writing in the field of psychoanalysis. Therese Ragen, pushing the boundaries of the genre, thoughtfully explores in a very immediate way the intersubjective nature of psychoanalysis, particularly looking at the role of the psychoanalyst’s subjectivity, both how it influences and is influenced by the psychoanalytic relationship. 2008: 168pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-471-6: $80.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-472-3: $29.95

Psychoanalysis in a New Key Book Series

Hb: 978-0-88163-416-7: 2006: 168pp. $31.95

Hb: 978-0-88163-400-6: 2005: 304pp. $59.95

Levenson: The Fallacy of Understanding & The Ambiguity of Change Pb: 978-0-88163-452-5: 2005: 416pp. $49.95

Tauber/Green: Prelogical Experience: An Inquiry into Dreams and Other Creative Processes Pb: 978-0-88163-450-1: 2005: 216pp. $36.00

Buechler: Clinical Values: Emotions That Guide Psychoanalytic Treatment Pb: 978-0-88163-377-1: 2004: 206pp. $34.95

relational perspectives book series Forthcoming!

The Hero in the Mirror From Fear to Fortitude Sue Grand, New York University Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA Recent socio-political conditions have moved psychoanalysis into an ongoing consideration of the nature of terror. In her previous book, The Reproduction of Evil, Sue Grand examined the perpetrator of ‘evil’: the way a history of trauma was transmuted into a repetition of trauma. In this book, she offers a phenomenology of terror – through a look at war, genocide, terrorism, torture, as well as familial abuse – and query the conditions through which an individual (or group) retains its humanity through acts of rescue, resistance and memorial activity. Contents: The Hero in the Mirror. Part I: Heroes and Warriors. Combat Speaks I: Heroic Performance, Civilian Desire. Combat Speaks II: Grief and Tragic Memory. Part II: Childhood and the Heroic Imagination. Fantastic Dangers: Reality Meets the Edge of the World. Strange Bodies in Strange Encounters: Transfiguration and Inquiry. Part III: Analytic Heroes: Finding Courage. False Courage, Analytic Lies. Intrepid Subjects: Rescuing Lost Generations. Part IV: Resisting Demonic Heroes. Restoring Reverence to Sacrificial Bodies: Terrorism, Counter-terrorism, Torture. Dignifying the Abject: Genocide and State Terror. November 2009: 192pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-437-2: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-482-2: $34.95

Relational Perspectives Book Series

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20


relational perspectives book series

New Edition!

jung and analytical psychology

The Analyst in the Inner City Race, Class, and Culture through a Psychoanalytic Lens Second Edition Neil Altman, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA In 1995, Neil Altman did what few psychoanalysts did or even dared to do: He brought the theory and practice of psychoanalysis out of the cozy confines of the consulting room and into the realms of the marginalized, to the very individuals who this theory and practice often overlooked. In doing so, he brought together psychoanalytic and social theory, and examined how divisions of race, class and culture reflect and influence splits in the developing self, more often than not leading to a negative self image of the “other” in an increasingly polarized society. Much like the original, this second edition of The Analyst in the Inner City opens up with updated, detailed clinical vignettes and case presentations, which illustrate the challenges of working within this clinical milieu. Altman greatly expands his section on race, both in the psychoanalytic and the larger social world. October 2009: 384pp. Hb: 978-0-88163-499-0: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-88163-500-3: $36.95

Relational Perspectives Book Series

Dare to Be Human A Contemporary Psychoanalytic Journey

Michael Shoshani Rosenbaum, Bar-Ilan University School of Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy, Israel “A wonderful book, truly a magnificent achievement. This is one of the best integrations of contemporary theory that I have ever come across. I wholeheartedly recommend this book for every teacher and supervisor, as well as student and candidate of psychotherapy and psychoanalysis.” - Lewis Aron, Director, NYU Postdoctoral Program in Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis, USA

Quite simply, this book is an unprecedented achievement, taking the reader into actual psychoanalytic sessions and sharing with the reader Michael Shoshani’s dialogues with Daniel, vividly illustrating his pain and struggle to transcend his existential plight. Furthermore, as the author of two sections of the book, Daniel himself provides a rare, insightful view from the other side of the couch, illuminating the challenge and change experienced within the other half of the therapeutic relationship. February 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99797-3: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99798-0: $34.95

Relational Perspectives Book Series

for further books in this series please visit


Film After Jung Post-Jungian Approaches to Film Theory Greg Singh, Buckinghamshire New University, UK “You will find this book indispensable. Not only does Greg Singh share his comprehensive grasp of theorists from both sides... but he makes more of each of them through his inter-textual discoveries which take Jungian film theorising to a brand new level.” - Christopher Hauke, From the Foreword

Film After Jung provides the reader with an overview of the history of film theory and delves into analytical psychology to consider the reaction that popular film can evoke through emotional and empathetic engagement with its audience. It also considers the potential for Post-Jungian contributions to film studies, and the ways in which these can help to enrich the lives of those undergoing clinical analysis. Film After Jung encourages students of film and psychology to explore the insights and experiences of everyday life that film has to offer by applying Post-Jungian concepts to film, image construction, narrative, and issues in cultural theory. Contents: Hauke, Foreword. Preface: The Image and The Material. Part I: Film Theory: A Critical Historiography. Film Matters, But How? and Why? Film as Film; Film as Art; Film as Authored Artefact. Film and Audience, a ‘Felt’ Relation: The Politics of Cine-subjectivity. The Film as Political: Phenomenology and the Material World of the Film. Part II: Applying Key Jungian Concepts in Film Theory. Refitting the Notion of the Gaze: The ‘I’ That Sees and the ‘Eye’ That is Seen. Contrasexuality and Identification: Difference, Sameness, and Gender in Film. Narrative and Myth, Heroes and Villains, Film and Television. Synchronicity and Space-time Transgression in Film and Video: Three Case Studies in Time Sculpture and Capture.

August 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43089-0: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43090-6: $28.95


Wild/lives Trickster, Place and Liminality on Screen Terrie Waddell, La Trobe University, Australia Wild/lives draws on myth, popular culture and analytical psychology to trace the machinations of ‘trickster’ in contemporary film and television. This archetypal energy traditionally gravitates toward liminal spaces – physical locations and shifting states of mind. By focusing on productions set in remote or isolated spaces, Terrie Waddell explores how key trickster-infused sites of transition reflect the psychological fragility of their willing and unwilling occupants. In differing ways, the selected texts – Deadwood, Grizzly Man, Lost, Solaris, The Biggest Loser, Amores Perros and Repulsion – all play with inner and outer marginality. Waddell’s imaginative interpretation of screen material and her original positioning of trickster, will inspire students of media, cinema, gender and Jungian studies, as well as academics with an interest in the application of Post-Jungian ideas to screen culture. Contents: Introduction. Verging on Wildness: Liminality and Trickster. From the Slime to the Scream: Pigs, Whores and Random Acts of Soiling – Deadwood. Channelling the ‘Inner Warrior’: Bear Whispering as an Extreme Sport – Grizzly

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

jung and analytical psychology Man. Waiting for Godonlyknows: The Island with Agency – Lost. Lost in Space: The Pull of a Sentient Planet and its Avatars – Solaris. Drop and Give Me Ten: The Game, The Shame, The Pain – The Biggest Loser. Dog Day Afternoons: Furbabies and Hellhounds – Amores Perros (Love’s a Bitch). Tell Me about the Rabbits Carol: Fear and Misandry in the Underworld – Repulsion. Conclusion. December 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42042-6: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42043-3: $36.95

Possession Jung’s Comparative Anatomy of the Psyche Craig E. Stephenson, graduate of the C. G. Jung Institute, Zurich, Switzerland This illuminating study, addressed both to readers new to Jung and to those already familiar with his work, offers fresh insights into a fundamental concept of analytical psychology.

Anatomizing Jung’s concept of possession reinvests Jungian psychotherapy with its positive potential for practice. Analogizing the concept – lining it up comparatively beside the history of religion, anthropology, psychiatry, and even drama and film criticism – offers not a naïve syncretism, but enlightening possibilities along the borders of these diverse disciplines. An original, wide-ranging exploration of phenomena both ancient and modern, this book offers a conceptual bridge between psychology and anthropology, it challenges psychiatry to culturally contextualize its diagnostic manual, and it posits a much more fluid, pluralistic and embodied notion of selfhood. Contents: Introduction. The Possessions at Loudun: Tracking the Discourse of Possession. The Anthropology of Possession: Studying the Other. Possession Enters the Discourse of Psychiatry: Recuperation or Epistemological Break? Reading Jung’s Equivocal Language. Jung’s Concept of Possession and the Practice of Psychotherapy. The Suffering of Myrtle Gordon: Cassavetes’s Opening Night and Chaikin’s Open Theatre. Closing.

July 2009: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44651-8: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44652-5: $34.95


On Behalf of the Mystical Fool Jung on the Religious Situation John P. Dourley, Carleton University, Ottawa, Canada Jung’s explanation of the religious tendency of the psyche addresses many sides of the contemporary debate on religion and the role that it has in individual and social life. This book discusses the emergence of a new mythic consciousness and details ways in which this consciousness supersedes traditional concepts of religion to provide a spirituality of more universal inclusion. On Behalf of the Mystical Fool examines Jung’s critique of traditional western religion, demonstrating the negative consequences of religious and political collective unconsciousness, and their consequent social irresponsibility in today’s culture. The book concludes by suggesting that a new religiosity and spirituality is


currently emerging in the West based on the individual’s access to the sense of ultimacy residual in the psyche, and seeking expression in a myth of a much wider compass. Contents: Introduction. Jungian Psychology and Spirituality. The Numinous, The Universal, and A Myth of Supersession. Taking Back Divinity: Jung on the Relativity of God. Martin Buber and The Lunatic Asylum. Jung, White and the End of the Pilgrimage. The Mystical Fool and Why the Killing Must Go On. C. G. Jung, S. P. Huntington and the Search for Civilization. Jung and the Recall of the Gods. Rerooting in the Mother: The Numinosity of the Nothing. Jung, Some Mystics and the Void; Personal and Political Implications.

December 2009: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-55222-6: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55223-3: $36.95

Self and No-Self Continuing the Dialogue Between Buddhism and Psychotherapy

Edited by Dale Mathers, in private practice, UK, Melvin E. Miller, Norwich University, Vermont, USA, and Osamu Ando, Hanazono University, Japan This collection explores the growing interface between Eastern and Western concepts of what it is to be human from analytical psychology, psychoanalytic and Buddhist perspectives. The relationship between these different approaches has been discussed for decades, with each discipline inviting its followers to explore the depths of the psyche and confront the sometimes difficult psychological experiences that can emerge during any in depth exploration of mental processes. Self and No-Self considers topics discussed at the Self and No-Self conference in Kyoto, Japan in 2006. International experts from practical and theoretical backgrounds compare and contrast Buddhist and psychological traditions, providing a fresh insight on the relationship between the two. Contents: Part I: Introduction. Miller, Buddhism and Psychotherapy: A

Dialogue. Ando, Psychotherapy and Buddhism: A Psychological Consideration of Key Points of Contact. Gunn, Two Arrows Meeting in Mid-air. Part II: Buddhist Theory and Practice. Magid, Desire and the Self: Reflections on J. M. Coetzee’s Slow Man. Yasunaga Roshi, Zen and Amaeru: A Psychological Approach to Zen. Pawle, The Ego in the Psychology of Zen: Understanding Reports of Japanese Zen Masters on the Experience of No-Self. Part III: Bridges. Austin, Our Sense of Self: Implications of Recent Brain Imaging Research for its Changes During Absorption and Kensho. Perelman, Similarities, Differences and Implications in the Patient / Analyst and Student / Spiritual Teacher Relationship. Part IV: Psychotherapy Theory. Miller, No Self and the Emptying God: Dwelling in the Emptying Place. Young-Eisendrath, Empty Rowboats: No-blame and Other Therapeutic Effects of No-Self in Long-term Psychotherapy and Psychoanalysis. Tift, Experience of Self in Zen and Christian Mysticism. Part V: Psychotherapy Practice. Van Zyl, Polarity Processing: Self/ No-Self, The Transcendent Function and Wholeness. Mathers, Stop Running. Mace, Mindfulness and the Technology of Healing. Wallace, Dying to be Born: Transformative Surrender within Analytical Psychology from a Clinician’s Perspective. Part VI: Mysticism and Spirituality. Shimizu, Experience of Self in Zen and Christian Mysticism. Kron, Self / No Self in the Therapeutic Dialogue According to Martin Buber’s Dialogue Philosophy. Muramoto, Muso Soseki (1275-1351): The Art of Surviving the World Full of Conflicts. Part VII: Myth and Fairytale. Nakamura, The Image of Mahavairocana-tatha-gata Emerging from the Therapist at a Crucial Point of Therapy. July 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-43605-2: $99.00 Pb: 978-0-415-43606-9: $36.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

jung and analytical psychology


Vision and Supervision Jungian and Post-Jungian Perspectives Edited by Dale Mathers, in private practice, UK

“The articles in this volume are full of zest and imagination, and they manage at once to capture much of the urgency, the excitement, and the challenge of the questions that face the therapy profession in the present multifaceted, multicultural, multidisciplinary world... it is with great pleasure that I recommend these highly instructive and imaginative essays.” - Murray Stein, From the Foreword

This book will be of interest to Jungian analysts as well as psychotherapists and mental health professionals, especially those who are addressing transcultural and multicultural issues including voluntary or enforced migration. It will also appeal to urban planners, architects and those interested in environmental issues. Contents: Introduction: Beginning with One’s Self. Soul, Earth and Migration in Contemporary Society. On Carl Gustav Jung’s “Mind and Earth”. The Place of Origins. Space, Genius Loci and Sacrality of Place. Maps and Geography: Reality and Fantasy. The Journey. Exile, Nostalgia, Return. The Foreign Patient. Bibliography. Angelini, “Animated” Places: Rooting and Impermanence. D’Andreamatteo, The Garden, Psychic Landscape. Buttarini, The Dark Places, or on the Evil of Innocence. Scarpelli, The Earth, The Song, The Symbol. Prameshuber, Exile: An Impossible Return? Mondo, Places of Healing. Tomasi, Body and Psyche: Compenetration of Opposites. Perez, “Every Rose is Telling of the Secrets of the Universal”: Symbols and the Natural World. Peat, “Gentle Action” Environmental Sustainability in Soul and Earth.

Supervision in analytical psychology is a topic that until recently has been largely neglected. Vision and Supervision draws on archetypal, classical, and developmental post-Jungian theory to explore supervision from a variety of different avenues.

February 2009: 344pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46148-1: $107.95 Pb: 978-0-415-46149-8: $41.95

Supervision is a critical issue for therapists in many training programmes. Quality of training and of therapeutic treatment is paramount, and increasingly the therapy profession is having to devise ways of assessing and monitoring themselves and each other. In this book, Dale Mathers and his contributors emphasise a model of supervision based on parallel process, symbol formation and classical Jungian analysis rather than developmental psychology or psychoanalytic theory, to show how respect for diversity can innovate the practice of supervision.

Written by experienced clinicians, Vision and Supervision brings insights from analytical psychology to the supervisory task and encourages the supervisor to pay as much attention to what does not happen in a session as to what does. Contents: Stein, Foreword. D. Mathers, Introduction. Part I: Strange Effects

at Boundaries. Stokes, Boundaries: Separation, Merger, Mutuality. PalmerBarnes, Ethics. D. Mathers, Difficult Patients. Part II: Individuation. Stone, Individuation. Bierschenk, The Spirit of Enquiry. C. Mathers, Mind the Gap: The Symbolic Container, Dreams and Transformation. Wainwright, Representation, Evocation and Witness: Clinical Scenes and Styles of Presentation. Part III: The Collective. Bamber, Working with Organisations. Maitra, Multicultural Perspectives. Heuer, Spooky Action at Distance: Parallel Process in Jungian Analysis and Supervision. Hall, Afterword. January 2009: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41579-8: $98.95 Pb: 978-0-415-41580-4: $34.95

Childhood Re-imagined Images and Narratives of Development in Analytical Psychology Shiho Main, University of Essex, UK

“Shiho Main has given us the most important Jungian work on childhood in recent years. Unlike other writers she manages to bridge the ‘developmental’ and the symbolic archetypal and bring the concept of the child up-to-date socially and politically. Seldom is Jungian writing so comprehensive and informing. This is essential reading for psychotherapists, psychologists, trainees and everyone concerned with what ‘childhood’ means in our time.” - Christopher Hauke, IAAP Jungian

analyst and senior lecturer at Goldsmiths College, University of London, UK

Childhood Re-imagined considers Carl Jung’s psychological approach to childhood and argues that his symbolic view deserves a place between the more traditional scientific and social-constructionist views of development. Divided into four sections this book covers: • Jung on development • theoretical and methodological discussion • the developmental school of analytical psychology

On Soul and Earth The Psychic Value of Place Elena Liotta, Jungian Analyst, in private practice, Italy On Soul and Earth offers an original perspective on the relationship between the environment and the human psyche. Physical spaces contribute to the building of identity through personal experience and memory. Places evoke emotions and carry their own special meanings.

Elena Liotta and her contributors also explore the neglected topics of migration and travel. The author has extensive clinical experience of working with patients from a wide variety of national and cultural backgrounds. Globalization is present in the clinical office as well as in the wider world and the transformations presently being wrought in the areas of cultural and national identity also impact on clinical work.

• towards a Jungian developmental psychology. This book discusses how Jung’s view of development in terms of individuation is relevant to child development, particularly the notion of regression and Jung’s distinction between the child archetype and the actual child. It shows how Jung’s understanding of the historically controversial notion of recapitulation differs from that of other psychologists of his time and aligns him with contemporary, postmodern critiques of development. The book goes on to investigate Fordham’s notion of individuation in childhood, and the significance of this, together with Jung’s approach, to Jungian developmental psychology and to wider interdisciplinary issues such as children’s rights. Main also examines the plausibility and usefulness of both Jung’s and Fordham’s approaches as forms of qualitative psychology. Through its detailed scholarly examination of Jungian texts and concepts Childhood Re-imagined clarifies the notion of development used within analytical psychology and stimulates discussion of further connections between analytical psychology and other contemporary discourses. It will be of particular interest to those involved in analytical psychology, Jungian studies and childhood studies.

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

jung and analytical psychology Contents: Part I: Jung on Development. Psychological Development. Regression. Symbolic Child Psychology. Part II: Theoretical and Methodological Discussions on Development. ‘Recapitulation’ and ‘Development’ in Analytical Psychology. Methodological Issues in Developmental Psychology and Analytical Psychology. Part III: The Developmental School of Analytical Psychology. Jung, Fordham, and the ‘Developmental School’. The Children’s Rights Movement and Fordham’s Work with Children. Part IV: Towards a Jungian Developmental Psychology. Jung as a Qualitative Psychologist. Conclusion.

2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-38495-7: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38496-4: $34.95

The Child That Haunts Us Symbols and Images in Fairytale and Miniature Literature Susan Hancock, National Centre for Research in Children’s Literature, Roehampton University, UK

“In this scholarly and important study of children’s literature, Susan Hancock decisively explores the mysteries and contradictions surrounding the adult perceptions of childhood. The Child That Haunts Us is a brilliant fusion of Jungian criticism and insightful historical analysis. This is an invaluable book for clinicians and the humanities alike.”

- Susan Rowland, University of Greenwich, UK

The Child That Haunts Us focuses on the symbolic use of the child archetype through the exploration of miniature characters from the realms of children’s literature. Jung argued that the child archetype should never be mistaken for the ‘real’ child. In this book Susan Hancock considers how the child is portrayed in literature and fairytale and explores the suggestion from Jung and Bachelard that the symbolic resonance of the miniature is inversely proportionate to its size. We encounter many instances where the miniature characters are a visibly vulnerable ‘other’, yet often these occur in association with images of the supernatural, as the desired or feared object of adult imagination. In The Child That Haunts Us it is emphasised that the treatment by any society, past or present, of its smallest and most vulnerable members is truly revealing of the values it really holds. This original and sensitive exploration will be of particular interest to undergraduate and postgraduate students as well as academics engaged in Jungian studies, children’s literature, childhood studies and those with an interest in socio-cultural constructions of childhood. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Fairytale Manikins. Nineteenth-Century Female Miniatures. Part II: Odysseys and the Motherland. Post-war Britain and Europe. Suffering Children. Conclusion.

January 2009: 168pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44775-1: $98.95 Pb: 978-0-415-44776-8: $29.95

clinical psychology and psychiatry


Staff Support Groups in the Helping Professions Principles, Practice and Pitfalls

Edited by Phil Hartley, Adult Psychotherapist and Group Analyst, NHS UK, and David Kennard, Clinical Psychologist and Group Analyst, UK “I wish this book had been written decades ago, before I started having to learn for myself the pitfalls and advantages of this work. I guess many readers will have the sense that so many of us have had to do this work without turning to an established body of knowledge and experience. We have each had to re-invent the wheel for ourselves. Now – here is the wheel, at last.” - Bob Hinshelwood, From the Foreword Staff burnout and work-related stress in mental health professionals cost the National Health Service not only millions of pounds each year, but also impact upon the welfare of those being cared for. Staff Support Groups in the Helping Professions takes the lead from recent Department of Health initiatives, promoting the use of staff support groups to foster emotional resilience, deal with potential conflict and support reflective practice. In this book Hartley, Kennard and their contributors explore the influences that help and hinder the setting up and running of staff support groups, and attempt to counter the often negative stigma that the term ‘staff support’ can evoke. They demonstrate that such support groups can be a sophisticated and valuable intervention that needs careful preparation and skilful management to succeed, and will in turn not only benefit the individual, but also the department as a whole and those that they care for. Contents: Hinshelwood, Introduction. Hartley, Kennard, Part I: What Staff Support Groups Are For. Why it Can be Difficult to Ask for Support, Especially if You Work in a Caring Profession. Ten Keys to a Successful Staff Support Group. Setting Up a Staff Support Group. The Role of the Facilitator. Common Problems and Ways of Responding to Them. Ending a Staff Support Group. Do Staff Support Groups Work? McGowan, Part II: On Learning From the Short Life of a Staff Support Group in an Acute Admission Inpatient Mental Health Setting. Maher, Authority and Control: Working with Staff Groups in Children’s Homes. Powell, The Insider as Facilitator: Conducting a Group for Hospital Clinical Team Leaders. Wojciechowska, Managing Personal and Professional Boundaries. Humphreys, Working with Disturbed States of Mind. Winship, Working with Staff Dynamics in an Educational Setting: The Staff Support Group that Wasn’t To Be. June 2009: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44773-7: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44774-4: $34.95

Prime Time Maximizing the Therapeutic Experience – A Primer for Psychiatric Clinicians Frederick G. Guggenheim, Brown Medical School, Rhode Island, USA

Prime Time gives pointers from an experienced clinician on how to deal more effectively and efficiently within time constraints. It is designed to assist psychiatrists with medication and evaluation, and to allow for psychotherapy in addition to the requisite psychopharmacology. The primer provides a number of short cuts FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

clinical psychology and psychiatry


and clinical maneuvers in initiating and ending sessions that can help promote positive transference, assist effective flow of information, and aid in closing out the session without falling behind schedule.

Dissociation and the Dissociative Disorders

Contents: Introduction. Part I: Ways to Make the Twenty Minute Hour

Work for You. Beginnings – Not a Moment to Spare. Measuring Symptoms. Setting the Contract. Decisions, Decisions. Psychoeducation/Teaching. Shortcuts: How to End on Time. Early and Later Pitfalls. Terminating Treatment. Part II: QUICK GRAB Answers for Specific Problems. Working with the Depressed Patient. Working with the Bipolar Patient. Working with the Anxious Patient. Working with the Traumatized Patient. Working with the Angry or Violent Patient. Working with the Somatizing Patient. Working with the Patient with Mild Schizophrenia. Working with the Questionably Psychotic Patient. Working with the Adolescent Patient. Working with the Elderly Patient. Working with the Borderline Personality Patient. Working with the Mildly Retarded Patient. Working with the Suicidal Patient. Working with the Pregnant Patient. Working with the Divorcing Patient. When Your patient (or you) are being Stalked. When Tragedy Befalls You, or Your Patient. The Vulnerable Clinician. Part III: Useful References.

DSM-V and Beyond Edited by Paul F. Dell, Trauma Recovery Center, Norfolk, USA, and John A. O’Neil, McGill University, Montreal, Canada “This is the definitive source for information on dissociative topics. The editors have compiled a comprehensive resource that includes the most up-to-date information on theory, research, and clinical practice from the most authoritative experts in the field. Clinicians and academics alike will benefit from having this book on their shelves and will refer to it often.” - Christine A. Courtois,

April 2009: 252pp. Hb: 978-0-415-80203-1: $79.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80109-6: $24.95

Co-editor of Treating Complex Traumatic Stress Disorders: An EvidenceBased Guide

Dissociation and the Dissociative Disorders is a book that has no real predecessor in the dissociative disorders field. It reports the most recent scientific findings and conceptualizations about dissociation, defines and establishes the boundaries of current knowledge in the dissociative disorders field, identifies and carefully articulates the field’s current points of confusion, gaps in knowledge, and conjectures, clarifies the different aspects and implications of dissociation, and sets forth a research agenda for the next decade. In many respects, Dissociation and the Dissociative Disorders both defines and redefines the field.


Reaching Out The Psychology of Assertive Outreach Edited by Caroline Cupitt, consultant clinical psychologist with Oxleas NHS Foundation Trust, UK Assertive outreach is a means of helping people with severe and persistent mental health difficulties who have not engaged with conventional mental health services. Reaching Out examines the application of psychological approaches in assertive outreach – a process which involves forming new relationships and offering hope to people who have been alienated from traditional methods. Reaching Out begins with a discussion of topics including: • engagement • team approaches • assessments • team case formulation • managing stress and burnout for staff. The second half of the book focuses on the task of delivering psychological therapies and considers a range of techniques including psychodynamic therapy, family therapy, cognitive behaviour therapy and community approaches. Reaching Out: The Psychology of Assertive Outreach demonstrates that the relationship between staff and service users can be essential to the process of recovery and personal growth. Contents: Cupitt, Introduction. Part I: Taking a Psychological Approach. Gillespie, Meaden, Psychological Processes in Engagement. Cupitt, Gillham, Law, The Team Approach: Containment or Chaos? Meaden, Making Assessment and Outcomes Meaningful. Whomsley, Team Case Formulation. Gray, Mulligan, Staff Stress and Burnout. Part II: Applying Models of Psychological Therapy. Gillham, Law, Hickley, A Psychodynamic Perspective. Meddings, Gordon, Owen, Family and Systemic Work. Cupitt, Cognitive-Behaviour Therapy. Meddings, Shaw, Diamond, Community Psychology. Gray, Johanson, Ethics and Professional Issues: The Universal and the Particular. Cupitt, Conclusion.

October 2009: 272pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45406-3: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45407-0: $39.95

Routledge Recommends!

selected Contents: Part I: Dissociation: An Overview. Part II: Developmental Approaches to Dissociation. Part III: Normal and Exceptional Dissociation. Part IV: Acute Dissociation. Part V: Chronic Dissociation. Part VI: Neurobiology of Dissociation. Part VII: The DSM-IV Dissociative Disorders. Part VIII: Dissociation in Posttraumatic Stress Disorder. Part IX: Dissociation in Borderline Personality Disorder and Substance Dependence. Part X: Dissociation and Psychosis. Part XI: Assessment and Measurement of Dissociation. Part XII: Treatment of Dissociation. Part XIII: Toward a Clarified Understanding of Dissociation.

April 2009: 898pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95785-4: $95.00

The End of Stigma? Changes in the Social Experience of Long-Term Illness

Gill Green, University of Essex, UK This innovative book investigates the roots of contemporary experiences of stigma, throwing new light on the phenomenon by examining a variety of long term conditions. Behaviour, lifestyle and identity are no longer the results of mass-production by social class and nation, but increasingly the quirky and unique eccentricities of the individual as consumer, reflexive citizen and free agent. But if the hallmark of the post-modern world is endless variety and unlimited sub-cultural freedom, should we not be witnessing “The End of Stigma”? The book takes Fukuyama’s notion of “The End of History” and examines contemporary challenges to the stigma associated with chronic illness. Award-winning author Gill Green examines cases of HIV, mental illness and substance misuse, to provide new insights into stigma in health. She demonstrates that people with long-term conditions refuse to be

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

clinical psychology and psychiatry defined by their condition and highlights their increasingly powerful voice. The End of Stigma? will be of interest to a wide range of students and health professionals in medical sociology, health studies and social care. Contents: Challenging Stigma. Stigma: Changing Conceptual Frameworks. Technological, Personal and Organizational Challenges to Stigma and Exclusion. Technological Challenge to Stigma: HIV and the Advent of HAART. Personal Challenge to Stigma: Substance Misuse and the Construction of the Moral Self. “Reclaiming Bedlam”: Organizational Challenge to the Stigma of Mental Illness. Is the End of Stigma Associated with Long-term Conditions in Sight?

April 2009: 176pp. Hb: 978-0-415-37624-2: $140.00 Pb: 978-0-415-37625-9: $43.95

Imagery for Pain Relief

There are more theories and approaches to psychotherapy today than ever before. Psychodynamic Therapy attests to the fact that psychoanalytic and psychodynamic theory has more to offer clinicians and patients than any other theory. Through this book, readers will gain a greater appreciation for what psychodynamic theory offers and how they may apply these ideas toward effective clinical practice. Contents: Introduction. Part I: Theoretical Underpinnings. Basic Principles of Psychoanalytic and Psychodynamic Theory. The Evolution of Theory I: Drive, Ego, Object, and Self. The Evolution of Theory II: Integration and Expansion. Part II: Treatment Principles and Empirical Support. Basic Principles of Treatment. Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic and Psychodynamic Psychotherapy. Theories and Empirical Studies of Therapeutic Action. Cognitive Neuroscience. Part III: Therapeutic Process. Diagnosis and Assessment. Case Study.

2008: 273pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-6400-7: $89.95 Pb: 978-0-8058-6401-4: $39.95

A Scientifically Grounded Guidebook for Clinicians David Pincus, Chapman University in Orange, California, USA, and Anees A. Sheikh, Marquette University, Wisconsin, USA “Effective treatment of pain still is a challenge, and it is for that reason that this volume will be welcomed by health care professionals. It will unlock the neglected potential of mental imagery for clinicians who are faced with the pervasive and often baffling problem of pain.” - Barbara Dossey, Author: Holistic Nursing: A Handbook for Practice and Florence Nightingale: Mystic, Visionary, Healer

Imagery for Pain Relief, the first book of its kind, familiarizes the reader with basic scientific information about pain and mental imagery and shows why imagery is a valuable tool for pain management. Scientifically grounded and easy-to-read, it provides readers with a wealth of practical information, including imagery techniques that have been successfully used in the past. This is a useful text not only for physicians and clinical psychologists, but also for counselors, social workers, nurses, and graduate students in all health related fields, including sports medicine. Contents: Rossi, Foreword. Pain: A Primer. Imagery: More Than Make-believe.

Imagery for Pain Relief: How Does it Work? The Process of Image Therapy. Pain Management: Simple Techniques. Pain Management: Deeper Techniques. Pain Management: Deepest Techniques. Imagery for Children in Pain. The Gift of Pain and Suffering. March 2009: 310pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99702-7: $59.95

Psychodynamic Therapy Conceptual and Empirical Foundations Steven K. Huprich, Eastern Michigan University, USA

Psychodynamic Therapy reintroduces psychoanalytic and psychodynamic theory to the practice of clinical psychology in ways that are easily understandable, practical, and immediate in their application. Huprich readily demonstrates that, contrary to what is misconstrued and taught as relic and historical artifact, Sigmund Freud’s ideas and their evolution offer a comprehensive, useful framework from which clinical psychology and psychiatry can benefit.


Also of Interest

Asian American Psychology

Current Perspectives Edited by Nita Tewari, and Alvin N. Alvarez “I have taught courses in Asian American Psychology for over 15 years and would have welcomed a textbook such as this... I feel that this book fills a niche that needed to be filled... It has both the breadth and depth necessary to be an excellent resource. Drs. Tewari and Alvarez have done a superb job of bringing together an outstanding group of scholars in the field of Asian American Psychology.” - Mary Ann Takemoto, California State University, Long Beach, USA

2008: 704pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-769-7: $120.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-6008-5: $70.00 Published by Psychology Press

Clinical Tests and Assessments Forthcoming!

Clinical Applications of the Personality Assessment Inventory Edited by Mark A. Blais, Matthew R. Baity, and Christopher J. Hopwood, all at Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, USA Clinical Applications of the Personality Assessment Inventory covers the various uses of a commonly employed multi-scale self-report inventory of psychological functioning. This book has gathered the leading experts in psychological assessment practice and research to describe the uses of this flexible instrument across the settings and applications for which it has been and might be used. Contents: Blais, Baity, Hopwood, Introduction. Kurtz, Outpatient Assessment.

Seifert, Inpatient Assessment. Edens, Forensic Assessment. Calhoun, The Assessment of Veterans. Khadivi, Substance Abuse Settings. Smith, Neuropsychological Assessment. Clark, Medical Settings. Roberts, Personnel Selection. Loving, Parenting Capacity Evaluations. Frank, Personal Injury Evaluations. Rogers, Cross-cultural Applications. Trull, Personality Research. Krishnamurthy, Assessing Adolescents. Case Illustration: PAI Perspectives on a Clinical Case. January 2010: 550pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99323-4: $69.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

International Perspectives on Forensic Mental Health series

forensic psychiatry



Handbook of Violence Risk Assessment Edited by Randy K. Otto, Florida Mental Health Institute, USA, and Kevin Douglas, Simon Fraser University, British Columbia, Canada “This is an important topic that is not covered comprehensively elsewhere. I would buy the book both for myself and for my school’s library.” - Rebecca Jackson, Director of Forensic Psychology Program, Pacific Graduate School of Psychology, USA

This comprehensive Handbook of original chapters serves as a resource for clinicians and researchers alike. Two introductory chapters cover general issues in violence risk assessment, while the remainder of the book offers a comprehensive discussion of specific risk assessment measures. Contents: Heilbrun, Yasuhara, Shah, Violence Risk Assessment Tools: Overview

and Critical Analysis. DeMatteo, Edens, Hart, The Use of Measures of Psychopathy in Violence Risk Assessment. Part I: Juvenile Risk. Augimeri, Enebrink, Walsh, Jiang, Gender-specific Childhood Risk Assessment Tools: Early Assessment Risk Lists for Boys (EARL-20B) and Girls (EARL-21G). Borum, Lodewijks, Bartel, Forth, Structured Assessment of Violence Risk in Youth (SAVRY). Hoge, Youth Level of Service/Case Management Inventory. Part II: Adult Risk. Rice, Harris, Hilton, The Violence Risk Appraisal Guide and Sex Offender Risk Appraisal Guide for Violence Risk Assessment and the Ontario Domestic Assault Risk Assessment and Domestic Violence Risk Appraisal Guide for Wife Assault Risk Assessment. Wong, Olver, Two Treatment and Change Oriented Risk Assessment Tools: The Violence Risk Scale and Violence Risk Scale – Sexual Offender Version. Douglas, Reeves, HCR-20 Violence Risk Assessment Scheme: Rationale, Application, and Empirical Overview. Monahan, The Classification of Violence Risk. Andrews, Bonta, Wormith, The Level of Service (LS) Assessment of Adults and Older Adolescents. Kropp, Gibas, The Spousal Assault Risk Assessment Guide (SARA). Anderson, Hanson, Static-99: An Actuarial Tool to Assess Risk and Sexual and Violent Recidivism among Sexual Offenders. Hart, Boer, Structured Professional Judgment Guidelines for Sexual Violence Risk Assessment: The Sexual Violence Risk-20 (SVR-20) and Risk for Sexual Violence Protocol (RSVP). September 2009: 312pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96214-8: $95.00

Series: International Perspectives on Forensic Mental Health

Also in the Series Learning Forensic Assessment Edited by Rebecca Jackson Hb: 978-0-8058-5922-5: 2007: 632pp. $130.00 Pb: 978-0-8058-5923-2: 2007: 632pp. $75.00

Ethical and Legal Issues for Mental Health Professionals in Forensic Settings Edited by Steven F. Bucky, and Joanne E. Callan, both at Alliant International University, San Diego, USA, and George Stricker, Argosy University, Washington D.C., USA

This unique text is organized around the most current ethical and legal standards as defined by the mental health professionals of psychology, social work, marriage and family therapy, and psychiatry. Respected well-known authorities with diverse backgrounds, expertise, and professional experience offer a far-reaching discussion of ethical and legal issues important for every mental health professional to know. selected Contents: Bucky, Introduction. Part I: The Mental Health Professional and the Legal System: Court Situations. Part II: Forensic Assessment and Techniques. Part III: Mental Health Professionals and Litigation.

April 2009: 232pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3816-6: $85.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3817-3: $29.95

Routledge Recommends!

Psychiatry in Law / Law in Psychiatry Second Edition Ralph Slovenko, Wayne State University, Michigan, USA “A veritable tour de force. Every forensic psychiatric topic is covered and made easily understandable, no matter how complicated. A must read for every aspiring forensic mental health professional.” - Abraham L. Halpern, Professor Emeritus of Psychiatry, New York Medical College, Valhalla, USA

Psychiatry in Law/Law in Psychiatry, Second Edition, is a sweeping, upto-date examination of the infiltration of psychiatry into law and the growing intervention of law into psychiatry. Unmatched in breadth and coverage, and thoroughly updated from the first editon, this comprehensive text and reference is an essential resource for psychiatry residents, law students, and practitioners alike. Contents: Psychiatry in Law. Part I: Expert Testimony. Experts in

the Adversary System. Obligations and Responsibilities of Lawyers and Experts. Restrictions on Expert Testimony. Holding the Expert Accountable. Part II: Evidentiary Issues. Testimonial Privilege. Witnesses and the Credibility of Testimony. Propensity and Other Acts Evidence. Syndrome Evidence. The Role of Psychiatric Diagnosis in the Law. Part III: Criminal Cases. Competency to Stand Trial and Other Competencies. Criminal Responsibility. Diminished Capacity. Juvenile Justice. Imposing and Carrying Out of the Death Penalty. Measurement of Evil. Part IV: Sexual Deviation. Sex Offender Legislation. Homosexuality: From Condemnation to Celebration. Part V: Civil Cases. Tort Liability of the Mentally Incompetent and Their Caretakers. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Workers’ Compensation. Duty to Minimize Damages. Child Custody. Contractual Capacity. Testamentary Capacity. Law in Psychiatry. Part I: Hospitalization of the Mentally Ill. Civil Commitment. Failure to Treat and Related Issues. Part II: Psychiatric Malpractice. Malpractice, Nonmedical Negligence, or Breach of Contract? Establishing Malpractice Liability. An Overview of Psychiatric Malpractice. Admission or Apology in Liability Prevention. Breach of Confidentiality. Informed Consent. Contributory Fault of the Patient in a Malpractice Action. The Boundary Violation of Undue Familiarity. Experimentation and Clinical Trials. Suicide. Duty of Therapists to Third Parties. Regulation of the Practice of Psychotherapy. Indices. March 2009: 618pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99491-0: $195.00

Ethical and Legal Issues for Mental Health Professionals: in Forensic Settings comprehensively focuses on the integration of ethical, legal, and clinical issues for practicing mental health professionals dealing with legal processes in forensic settings. 10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

maudsley monographs series

Clinical problems addictions


The Maudsley Family Study of Psychosis

Responding to Drug Misuse

A Quest for Intermediate Phenotypes

Research and Policy Priorities in Health and Social Care

Edited by Colm McDonald, National University of Ireland, Ireland The Maudsley Family Study of Psychosis investigates the genetically produced markers of abnormal brain structure and function (‘intermediate phenotypes’) which underlie the clinical syndrome of schizophrenia, and more recently bipolar disorder. In this book, key findings of this important research program, and their implications for this field, are discussed in detail. Contributors outline research examining brain structure and functioning in patients with schizophrenia and their unaffected first degree relatives, incorporating detailed clinical assessments, magnetic resonance imaging, electrophysiology, eye tracking measures and neuropsychology. 2008: 248pp. Hb: 978-1-84169-734-5: $43.95

Series: Maudsley Monographs Published by Psychology Press

Also in the Series Marks et al.: Hands-on Help Hb: 978-1-84169-679-9: 2007: 296pp. £44.95

Bhugra: Mad Tales from Bollywood Hb: 978-184169-646-1: 2006: 328pp. £44.95

Jones/Wessely: Shell Shock to PTSD Hb: 978-1-84169-580-8: 2005: 320pp. £44.95

Bhugra: Culture and Self-Harm Hb: 978-1-84169-521-1: 2004: 312pp. £44.95

Freeman/Garety: Paranoia Hb: 978-1-84169-522-8: 2004: 208pp. £44.95

Melzer et al.: Social Inequalities and the Distribution of the Common Mental Disorders Hb: 978-1-84169-385-9: 2003: 256pp. £44.95

Jenkins et al: Developing a National Mental Health Policy Hb: 978-1-84169-295-1: 2002: 232pp. £53.95

Castle et al: Psychosis in the Inner City Hb: 978-0-86377-516-1: 1998: 224pp. £44.95

Goldberg/Thornicroft: Mental Health in our Future Cities Hb: 978-0-86377-546-8: 1998: 304pp. £53.95

Patel: Culture and Common Mental Disorders in Sub-Saharan Africa Hb: 978-0-86377-530-7: 1998: 144pp. £52.95

Bond et al: Aggression Hb: 978-0-86377-482-9: 1997: 160pp. £53.95

Garety/Hemsley: Delusions Pb: 978-0-86377-785-1: 1997: 192pp. £35.95

Buchanan: Compliance with Treatment in Schizophrenia Hb: 978-0-86377-422-5: 1996: 96pp. £44.95

Grubin: Fitness to Plead in England and Wales Hb: 978-0-86377-424-9: 1996: 144pp. £53.95


Edited by Susanne MacGregor, London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine, University of London, UK “This is an excellent collection of relevant empirically-based research which should be used to inform contemporary drugs misuse policy in the UK.” - Elizabeth Ettorre, University of Liverpool, UK Responding to Drug Misuse provides a unique insight into the current shape of the drugs treatment system in England. Reporting findings from research linked to the government’s ten year drugs strategy Tackling Drugs to Build a Better Britain, the book places these in the context of policy, practice, and service development. It goes on to discuss the implications of these findings for the government’s new strategy Drugs: Protecting Families and Communities. Throughout the book contributors reflect on current debates on drug strategies and social policy. Contents: MacGregor, Policy Responses to the Drugs Problem. Duke, The Focus on Crime and Coercion in UK Drugs Policy. Macleod, Drug-taking and its Psycho-social Consequences. Raistrick, Tober, Godfrey, Parrott, Treatment as Usual. Weaver, Goyder, Hart, Fehler, Metrebian, Crawford, Care Co-ordination in Drug Treatment Services. Donmall, Millar, The Effect of Waiting for Treatment. Radcliffe, Stevens, Early Exit: Estimating and Explaining Early Exit from Drug Treatment. Neale, Godfrey, Parrott, Sheard, Tompkins, Barriers to the Effective Treatment of Injecting Drug Users. Metrebian, Sell, Shanahan, Carnwath, Alcorn, Ruben, Mehdikhani, Stimson, Prescribing Injectable Opiates for the Treatment of Opiate Dependence. Kouimtsidis, Drummond, Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Opiate Misusers in Methadone Maintenance Treatment. Crawford, Patterson, Agath, Weaver, Involving Service Users in Efforts to Improve the Quality of Drug Misuse Services. Weaver, Charles, Barnes, Tyrer, Co-morbidity in Treatment Populations. Frisher, Crome, Martino, Bashford, Croft, Epidemiology of Drug Misuse and Psychiatric Co-morbidity in Primary Care. Orford, Copello, Simon, Waheed, Fazil, Graham, Mahmood, McNeil, Roberts, Offering a Service to BME Family Members Affected by Close Relatives’ Drug Problems. Clay, Corlyon, A Review of Services for Children and Young People with Drugs Misusing Carers. Kroll, Taylor, Dilemmas in Intervening Effectively in Families Where There is Parental Drug Misuse. MacGregor, Evidence and New Policy Questions.

December 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-47470-2: $69.95


Social Behaviour and Network Therapy for Alcohol Problems Alex Copello, and Jim Orford, both at the University of Birmingham, UK, Ray Hodgson, Formerly University of Wales College of Medicine, UK, and Gillian Tober, Leeds Addiction Unit, UK “The authors of this manual are the leading practitioners in England in SBNT. The National Treatment Agency (NTA) hopes that this book is used by clinicians to implement evidence-based practice and improve treatment for alcohol and drug users.” - Annette

Dale Perera, Director of Quality, National Treatment Agency (NTA)

Social Behaviour and Network Therapy for Alcohol Problems serves as a manual for clinicians working with people with alcohol problems. The manual is based on previous research in addiction treatment,

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20



including family and social network interventions, as well the author’s own work developing and evaluating Social Behaviour and Network Therapy (SBNT) for example in the United Kingdom Alcohol Treatment Trial (UKATT). Containing a range of ideas the book is guided by a key principle: the development of social support for a positive change in drinking behaviour. Contents: Part I: Background, Evidence Base, Treatment Content

and Format. Manual Format: Theoretical and Research Basis for SBNT. The Therapist. The Treatment. Part II: Core Components of Social Behaviour and Network Therapy. Phase 1: Identifying the Social Network. The First Session: Setting the Scene. Phase 2: Core Topics. Core Topic: Communication. Core Topic: Coping. Core Topic: Enhancing Social Support. Core Topic: Network Based Relapse Management. Phase 3: Final Meeting. Planning for the Future and Termination. Part III: Elective Topics, Training and Common Questions. Elective Topics. Appendices: Handouts/Prompt Sheets. August 2009: 176pp. Pb: 978-1-58391-803-6: $39.95 Forthcoming!

Working Together to Reduce Harmful Drinking Edited by Marcus Grant, President of the International Center for Alcohol Policies, and Mark Leverton, Director of Alcohol Policy and Industry Issues at Diageo, London, UK This book is intended to contribute to the World Health Organization’s (WHO) global strategy to reduce the harmful use of alcohol and lays out for the international community a coherent view of what it is that beverage alcohol producers can do. While governments, health professionals, and civil society must occupy center stage in developing and implementing balanced alcohol policies, alcohol producers also have a role to play. This book demonstrates just how positive that role can be by focusing on key areas of reducing harmful drinking where the producers show particular competence and technical strength and where industry input has been welcomed by WHO: responsible production of beer, wine, and spirits; addressing availability of noncommercial beverages; pricing, marketing, and selling beverage alcohol; encouraging responsible choices; and working with other sectors. Contents: Grant, Leverton, Introduction. Martinic, Targeted Intervention. Simpson, Alcohol Production. Willersdorf, Alcohol Distribution. Botha, Alcohol Availability. Robson, Pricing of Beverage Alcohol. Sinclair, Alcohol Marketing. Bivans, Orley, Partnerships. Grant, Leverton, Annex: Recommendations for the WHO Global Strategy – The Producers’ Contribution.

October 2009: 218pp. Hb: 978-0-415-80087-7: $69.95

Swimming with Crocodiles The Culture of Extreme Drinking Edited by Marjana Martinic, Vice President for Public Health, International Center for Alcohol Policies (ICAP), Washington, USA, and Fiona Measham, Lancaster University, UK

Swimming with Crocodiles is the ninth volume in the ICAP Book Series on Alcohol in Society. The authors discuss the factors that motivate extreme drinking, address the developmental, cultural and historical contexts that have surrounded it, and offer a new approach to addressing this behavior through prevention and policy. The centerpiece of the book is a series

of focus groups conducted with young people in Brazil, China, Italy, Nigeria, Russia, South Africa, and the United Kingdom, which examines their views on extreme drinking, motivations behind it and the cultural similarities and differences that exist, conferring at once risk and protective factors. 2008: 296pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95548-5: $60.00

International Center for Alcohol Policies Series on Alcohol in Society

Solution-Focused Substance Abuse Treatment

Teri Pichot, Jefferson County Department of Health and Environment, Missouri, USA, with Sara A. Smock, Texas Tech University, USA Solution-Focused Substance Abuse Treatment describes the standard of care for substance abuse treatment, and clearly demonstrates how Solution-Focused Brief Therapy exceeds this standard. It then shows how this approach can be effectively used in substance abuse evaluation, case management, as well as individual and group treatment. Applications to adolescence as well as cultural relevance are addressed. It provides both beginning and advanced concepts to address the questions of even the most advanced clinician. This informal and easy reading style is inviting to readers of all levels of sophistication. Contents: Substance Abuse Treatment: An Overview. Solution-Focused Brief Therapy: The Basics. Beyond the Solution-Focused Basics. Assessment and Evaluation. Case Management and Individual Work With Clients. SolutionFocused Group Therapy. A More In-depth Look at Working With Groups. Additional Applications and Practice Issues. Forms and Handouts. Appendix.

March 2009: 254pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3722-0: $69.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3723-7: $34.95

60 day examination copy available

Handbook of the Medical Consequences of Alcohol and Drug Abuse Second Edition

Edited by John Brick, Fellow, American Psychological Association Executive Director Intoxikon International The Handbook of the Medical Consequences of Alcohol and Drug Abuse, Second Edition is the newly-updated classic reference text that provides even more detailed and expanded information on the pharmacological, toxicological, and neuropsychological consequences of alcohol and drug abuse. Eight new chapters of crucial information have been added. Written by leading experts in the fields of medical physiology, psychopharmacology, and neuropsychology, this valuable resource provides the detailed alcohol and drug information health professionals in all fields need to know. This text provides reviews of the cardiovascular, neurological, pulmonary, gastrointestinal, psychological, and hepatic effects of commonly abused drugs. 2008: 642pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3573-8: $160.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3574-5: $89.95

60 day examination copy available

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at


Women, Girls, and Addiction Celebrating the Feminine in Counseling Treatment and Recovery Cynthia A. Briggs, Winona State University, Minnesota, USA, and Jennifer L. Pepperell, Minnesota State University, Mankato, USA

Women, Girls, and Addiction is the first book on the efficacy of treatment approaches and interventions that are tailored to working with addicted women, and the first publication of any kind to provide a feminist approach to understanding the experience of addiction from the female perspective. Part I of the book provides an overview of feminist theory and addiction counseling, followed by an historical look at women and addiction (research, treatment, demographics). The three chapters in Part II give an in-depth look at the biological, psychological, and social factors of the experience of addiction as unique in women. The final part of the book presents a series of chapters spanning the lifespan, which each feature age-specific special issues, treatment strategies, interventions, and commonly encountered topics in therapy with the population. Contents: Part I: Overview of Women, Girls and Addiction. Feminist

Theory and Addiction Counseling. Women, Girls, and Addiction: An Historical Perspective. Part II: Biopsychosocial Influences. Biological Factors. Psychological Factors. Social Factors. Part III: Prevention, Treatment, and Relapse Prevention Across the Lifespan. Children and Adolescents. Adult Women. Women in Late Adulthood. June 2009: 220pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99352-4: $32.95

for books on Child & Adolescent Addictions please see page 37 Also of Interest Rassool: Alcohol and Drug Misuse: A Handbook for Students and Health Professionals Hb: 978-0-415-40965-0: 2008: 480pp. $150.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40967-4: 2008: 480pp. $51.95



The Clinician’s Guide to Collaborative Caring in Eating Disorders The New Maudsley Method Edited by Janet Treasure, Guy’s Hospital, King’s College London, UK, Ulrike Schmidt, Maudsley Hospital and the Institute of Psychiatry, London UK, and Pam Macdonald, PhD student, Institute of Psychiatry, Kings College, London, UK “This book is a valuable companion piece to Treasure et al.’s existing volume, providing useful information, resources and skills for clinicians. However, this book’s biggest contribution is the way in which it stresses

eating disorders


that clinicians should see the family as a resource (rather than a nuisance or an irrelevance).” - Professor Glenn Waller, Vincent Square Eating Disorders Service, CNWL NHS Foundation Trust

Caring for a loved one with an eating disorder is a difficult task; carers often find it hard to cope, and this can contribute to the maintenance of the disorder. The Clinician’s Guide to Collaborative Caring in Eating Disorders shows how active collaboration between professional and non-professional carers can maximise the quality of life for both the sufferer and all other family members. The book provides straightforward guidance for clinicians who work with families and carers. It suggests ways of ensuring that interpersonal elements that can maintain eating disorders are minimised and indicates skills and knowledge that can be taught to the carer for both managing their personal reaction to the illness, and for providing a practically and emotionally supportive environment that is conducive to change. Contents: Part I: Introduction to Collaborative Care Between Carers

of People with Eating Disorders and Professional Services. Treasure, Introduction. Treasure, Schmidt, Eating Disorders and the Concept of Working with Families and Other Carers. Kamerling, Smith, The Carers’ Perspective. Baldock, An Ethico-legal Account of Working with Carers in Eating Disorders. Part II: Introduction to the Theoretical Underpinning. Treasure, How Do Families Cope When a Relative has an Eating Disorder. Treasure, Williams, Schmidt, Family Processes as Maintaining Factors for Eating Disorders. Treasure, Understanding Models of Health Behaviours and the Processes Used to Facilitate Change. Treasure, Changing Behaviours in the Family. Part III: Different Forms of Intervention. Treasure, Working with Carers on an Outpatient Basis: The Assessment of the Family. Treasure, Whitney, Writing as a Tool for Developing Reflective Capacity and Emotional Processing. Treasure, Sepulveda, Whittaker, Todd, Lopez, Family and Carer Workshops. Whitaker, Treasure, Todd, An Intensive Three-day Programme with Families Preparing for Transition from Inpatient to Outpatient Care. Macdonald, Grover, Coaching Methods of Supportive Skillsbased Training for Carers. Part IV: Special Cases. Treasure, Micali, Monneyron, Reproductive Function and Parenting in People with an Eating Disorder History. Kyriacou, Treasure, Raenker, The Influence and Importance of Parents in Care and Treatment of an Eating Disorder. Part V: Conclusion and Appendices. Treasure, Macdonald, Goddard, What the Patients Say: An Examination of What Patients Think about Family Interventions. Todd, Whitaker, Macdonald, The Professional Perspective. Appendices. November 2009: 304pp. Hb: 978-0-415-48424-4: $110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48425-1: $42.95

The Invisible Man A Self-help Guide for Men With Eating Disorders, Compulsive Exercise and Bigorexia

John F. Morgan, Yorkshire Centre for Eating Disorders, Leeds, UK “In ‘The Invisible Man’, John Morgan makes a powerful case for meeting the particular needs of men affected by eating disorders. It can be difficult for anyone to seek help – but the problem is so much greater for young men who develop what many people mistakenly consider is a female problem. Morgan combines theory and practical help in a highly readable style.” - Susan Ringwood, Chief Executive Officer of BEAT Increasingly boys and men are suffering with eating disorders and related body image problems. Some have full-blown conditions such as anorexia nervosa, bulimia, binge eating, compulsive exercising or bigorexia. The Invisible Man applies the latest research to produce a practical, problem-focused self-help manual for men with eating disorders and body image problems. 2008: 184pp. Hb: 978-1-58391-149-5: $98.95 Pb: 978-1-58391-150-1: $23.95

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20


eating disorders

Effective Clinical Practice in the Treatment of Eating Disorders The Heart of the Matter

Edited by Margo Maine, Founding Member, Academy for Eating Disorders, William N. Davis, in private practice, New York and Pennsylvania, USA, and Jane Shure, Kripalu Center, Lenox, USA This book is the first to address what really happens behind closed doors during eating disorders treatment, as most writing has only addressed theoretical approaches and behavioral strategies. The field has long needed a book that describes the heart of the matter: the therapeutic interventions and interactions that comprise life-changing treatment for this life-threatening disorder.

gerontology Contents: Introduction: History and Philosophy of Treatment in Dementia. Diagnosis of Dementia: Clinical and Pathophysiological Signs of Various Etiologies. Cognitive, Language, and Behavioral Characteristics across the Stages of Dementia. Assessment: Cognitive, Communicative and Behavioral Characteristics. Treatment: Solutions to Cognitive- and Communication-based Problems. Management: A Multidisciplinary Focus. Management of Eating and Swallowing Challenges. Quality of Life Issues. Caregiver and Family Issues. Impact on Staff: Training and Supervision Issues. Treatment Settings, Goals, and Documentation Issues.

February 2009: 432pp. Hb: 978-0-8058-5606-4: $75.00 Published by Psychology Press

60 day examination copy available

An Active Learning Experience Second Edition

2008: 288pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96461-6: $39.95

Critical Feminist Approaches to Eating Dis/Orders Edited by Helen Malson, Centre for Appearance Research, University of the West of England, Bristol, UK, and Maree Burns, Eating Difficulties Education Network, New Zealand

Over the past decade there have been significant shifts both in feminist approaches to the field of eating disorders and in the ways in which gender, bodies, body-weight, body-management and food are understood, represented and regulated within the dominant cultural milieu of the early twenty-first century. Critical Feminist Approaches to Eating Dis/Orders addresses these developments, exploring how eating disordered subjectivities, experiences and body-management practices are theorised and researched within post-modern and post-structuralist feminist frameworks. July 2009: 280pp. Hb: 978-0-415-41811-9: $80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41810-2: $28.95

Chandra M. Mehrotra, College of St. Scholastica, Minnesota, USA, and Lisa S. Wagner, University of San Francisco, USA This new edition has been completely rewritten and includes chapters that address key topics in diversity and aging: research methods, psychological aging; health beliefs, behaviors, and services; health disparities; informal and formal care for older persons; work and retirement; religious affiliation and spirituality; and death, dying, and bereavement. 2008: 432pp. Hb: 978-0-415-95213-2: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-95214-9: $39.95

60 day examination copy available Mood Disorders New Edition!

The Other Depression Bipolar Disorder Second Edition


Aging and Diversity

Dementia From Diagnosis to Management – A Functional Approach Michelle S. Bourgeois, Florida State University, USA, and Ellen Hickey, Dalhousie University, Nova Scotia, Canada

This timely volume aims to serve as a reference manual and the starting point for those who want to provide life-enhancing services to persons with dementia, and to inspire the continued generation of quality research to demonstrate the value of cognitive-communication intervention. Students, researchers, and practitioners in communication sciences and disorders will find this book immensely important.

Robert Grieco, Trinity Family Practice, a Division of Tri-State Medical, Heritage Valley Health System, USA, and Laura Edwards, writer and a graduate of Bryn Mawr College, Pennsylvania, USA In The Other Depression, Grieco and Edwards help people understand and destigmatize those afflicted with bipolar disorder. Topics discussed include the genetic signature and environmental stresses and underpinnings of this disease, along with how it alters the functioning of the brain, and how it can be treated. Contents: Introduction. Discovering Bipolar Disorder. A Different Kind of

Depression. The Bipolar Spectrum. Five Keys to Diagnosing Bipolar Disorder. The Bipolar Personality. Depression. Mania. Mixed States. Bipolar II. Could My Depression Be Bipolar? Associated Physical and Psychiatric Illness. Bipolar Disorder in Children. Bipolar Disorder in Adolescents. Bipolar Disorder in the Elderly. Seasonal Depression. Suicide. Drug Therapy for Bipolar Disorder. Winning the Peace. Do Antidepressants Cause Suicide? The Science of Bipolar Disorder. Bipolar Disorder and Creativity. The Epidemiology of Bipolar Disorder. When a Loved One has Bipolar Disorder. Living with Bipolar Disorder. Appendices. January 2010: 191pp. Hb: 978-0-415-99876-5: $89.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99877-2: $24.95

60 day examination copy available

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

mood disorders

Routledge Recommends!

personality disorders

Bipolar Disorder

Therapy and the Postpartum Woman Notes on Healing Postpartum Depression for Clinicians and the Women Who Seek their Help

A Clinician’s Guide to Treatment Management Second Edition Edited by Lakshmi N. Yatham, University of British Columbia, Canada, and Vivek Kusumakar, Dalhousie University, Nova Scotia, Canada Bipolar disorder is one of the most common and potentially devastating psychiatric illnesses. This essential textbook provides clinicians with an extraordinarily wellbalanced and comprehensive overview of rational and researchinformed contemporary clinical practice in the assessment and medical management of patients with bipolar disorder. With a focus on pharmacotherapy, the foundation of symptomatic treatment, Bipolar Disorder provides the most recent analysis of the data regarding efficacy and safety of medications.

Karen Kleiman, Founder, Postpartum Stress Center, USA “Therapy and the Postpartum Woman is an essential resource for clinicians who work with postpartum women and the clients they serve... Kleiman’s book creates a stellar benchmark for treatment quality and more efficacious outcomes.”

Contents: Kusumakar, Yatham, Diagnosis and Treatment of Hypomania and Mania. Muzina, Kemp, Yatham, Calabrese, Bipolar Depression: Diagnosis and Treatment. Kupka, Frye, Diagnosis and Treatment of Rapid Cycling Bipolar Disorder. Ng, Cahill, Malhi, Berk, Bipolar II Disorder: Assessment and Treatment. Estevez, Suppes, Maintenance Treatment in Bipolar I Disorder. Taylor, Steiner, Soares, Bipolar Disorders in Women: Special Issues. Berwaerts, Kutcher, Kusumakar, Bipolar Disorder in Children and Adolescents. Singh, Kusumakar, Sajtovic, Bipolar Disorder in the Elderly. Goldberg, Comorbidity in Bipolar Disorder: Assessment and Treatment. Levine, Chengappa, Lithium in the Treatment of Bipolar Disorder. Bond, Vieta, Tohen, Yatham, Antipsychotic Medications in Bipolar Disorders: A Critical Review of Randomized Controlled Trials. Gijsman, Nolen, Antidepressants for Bipolar Disorder: A Review of Efficacy. Yatham, Kusumakar, Anticonvulsants in Treatment of Bipolar Disorder: A Review of Efficacy. Lam, Chan, Howard, Somatic Treatments for Bipolar Disorder. Ketter, Wang, Psychotropic Medications in Bipolar Disorder: Pharmacodynamics, Pharmacokinetics, Drug Interactions, Adverse Effects and their Management. Scott, Colom, Practical Issues in Psychological Approaches to Individuals with Bipolar Disorder. Miklowitz, Psychosocial Interventions for Bipolar Disorder: A Critical Review of Evidence for Efficacy. Quiroz, Post, Novel Treatments in Bipolar Disorder: Future Directions. March 2009: 644pp. Hb: 978-0-415-96136-3: $74.95

2008: 360pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98996-1: $41.95

60 day examination copy available


Women and Depression Recovery and Resistance

Michelle N. Lafrance, St. Thomas University, New Brunswick, Canada Women and Depression: Recovery and Resistance takes a welcome look at women’s experiences of living well after depression. Lafrance argues that the social construction of femininity is dangerous for women’s health, and ultimately, central to their experiences of depression. Beginning with a critical examination of the ways in which women’s depression is a product of the social, political, and interpersonal realities of their everyday lives, the analysis moves on to explore an often ignored aspect of women’s experience – how women manage to ‘recover’ and be well after depression. February 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40430-3: $70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-40431-0: $27.95

Series: Women and Psychology

for further books in this series please see pages 51, 68

- Susan Stone, president, Postpartum Support International, and psychotherapist specializing in women’s reproductive mental health

This book takes the reader into the private world of therapy with the postpartum woman. This book offers much more than a manual on how to treat women with postpartum depression. It is a companion tool for the clinician and client, one that will enlighten and embrace the process of therapy for both of them.

Personality Disorders

Borderline Personality Disorder Meeting the Challenges to Successful Treatment Edited by Perry D. Hoffman, President of the National Education Alliance for Borderline Personality Disorder, Inc., New York, USA, and Penny Steiner-Grossman, Albert Einstein College of Medicine, New York, USA

Borderline Personality Disorder brings together over two dozen of the field’s leading experts in one enlightening text. The book also offers mental health providers a view of BPD from the perspectives of sufferers as well as family members to foster an understanding of the experiences of relatives who are often devastated by their loved ones’ struggles with this common disorder. Borderline Personality Disorder provides social workers and other mental health clinicians with practical access to the knowledge necessary for effective treatment in a single volume of the most current research, information, and management considerations. 2008: 275pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3233-1: $85.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3234-8: $40.00

Integrated Treatment for Co-Occurring Disorders Personality Disorders and Addiction Sharon C. Ekleberry, Community Services Board, Transformation Initiatives, USA Integrated Treatment for Co-Occurring Disorders addresses a complex client population, which presents service providers

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

physical and sexual abuse


with significant professional challenges. Underlying personality disorders compromise treatment effectiveness for medical, other psychiatric, or trauma services, as well as the ability these individuals have in adhering to probation, parole, or court-ordered treatment requirements. This book brings focus to the specifics of assessment and treatment for this type of co-occurring disorder and suggests that greater adaptability, fewer self-sabotaging behaviors, and an abstinent lifestyle are all possible. 2008: 202pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3692-6: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3693-3: $34.95

60 day examination copy available Physical and Sexual Abuse

Moving On After Childhood Sexual Abuse

The Partners of Child Sex Offenders Tell Their Stories Terry Philpot, Freelance journalist Drawing on extensive interviews and written testimonies, Understanding Child Abuse focuses on the stories and voices of partners of child sex offenders, highlighting how mothers feel about the situation they are in, how they cope with it and how they can remake their family life. January 2009: 150pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40949-0: $140.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45600-5: $43.95

Understanding the Effects and Preparing for Therapy

selected Contents: Part I: Childhood Sexual Abuse, An Introduction and Overview. Part II: Childhood Sexual Abuse and Child Development. Part III: Childhood Sexual Abuse and Adulthood. Part IV: Psychological Therapy.

2008: 200pp. Hb: 978-0-415-42482-0: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42483-7: $23.95

Understanding the Effects of Child Sexual Abuse Feminist Revolutions in Theory, Research and Practice

Sam Warner, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK “An elegantly written and practically useful text for students of gender and welfare in a variety of disciplines... Its conclusions and recommendations for ethical practice in the area of sexual abuse show considerable sagacity and are practical, pragmatic and compassionate.” - Professor Sue White, Lancaster University, UK This book offers a re-evaluation of mainstream and feminist approaches to understanding the theories and research issues relating to women and child sexual abuse. February 2009: 304pp. Hb: 978-0-415-36027-2: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-36028-9: £27.95

Series: Women and Psychology

for further books in this series please see pages 51, 67

Sex-Offender Therapy A “How-To” Workbook for Therapists Treating Sexually Aggressive Adults, Adolescents, and Children

Jonathan Willows, Sussex Partnership NHS Trust, UK This self-help guide allows those who have experienced childhood sexual abuse to consider the impact that it has had on their adult lives from a new perspective, helping them to understand the effects, and prepare for therapy. Based on known reactions to physical and emotional trauma, the book explains how a broad range of difficulties in adulthood can result from sexual abuse in childhood. The reader is invited to think about how psychological therapy can be particularly helpful in reducing these difficulties and promoting change.

Understanding Child Abuse

Rudy Flora, in private practice, Virginia, USA, Joseph T. Duehl, Veterans Administration, Virginia, USA, Wanda Fisher, Smyth County Counseling Center, Virginia, USA, Sandra Halsey, in private practice, Virginia, USA, Michael Keohane, The Highland Community Services Board, Virginia, USA, Barbara L. Maberry, and Jeffery A. McCorkindale, both in private practice, and Leroy C. Parson, School Guidance Counselor, Virginia, USA Sex-Offender Therapy is a practical workbook for clinicians who deal with sexually aggressive adults, adolescents, and children. This invaluable professional resource focuses on how to treat patients – male and female – impaired by sexual addiction, sexual disorders, sex offending, and other sexual misconduct behaviors. Designed as an accessible step-by-step guide, Sex-Offender Therapy features case studies, work exercises, and clinical suggestions that help to walk the reader through a sexual disorders program. 2008: 304pp. Pb: 978-0-7890-3123-5: $49.95

60 day examination copy available

Domestic Violence Treatment for Abusive Women A Treatment Manual

Ellen L. Bowen, in private practice, USA In Domestic Violence Treatment for Abusive Women, Bowen challenges us to re-think our gender and violence constructs and guides clinicians through the emerging field of treatment of female abusers. Unlike other books designed for male clients that may be adapted to women, this book is specifically written for use with women, with handouts and exercises created from the author’s own clinical experience. 2008: 214pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3810-4: $130.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3811-1: $39.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

ISPS series

schizophrenia and psychosis


Violence and Abuse Issues

Cross-Cultural Perspectives for Health and Social Services Edited by Lee Ann Hoff, Life Crisis Institute, USA Health and social service providers are in pivotal positions to provide preventive and restorative services to those affected by violent and abusive behaviour. This comprehensive textbook presents theoretical background and practical strategies for doing so, providing a solid knowledge base for good practice in this area. August 2009: 264pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46571-7: $135.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46572-4: $39.95

60 day examination copy available for books on Child and Adolescent Abuse please see page 38


Psychotherapeutic Approaches to Schizophrenic Psychoses Past, Present and Future

Edited by Yrjö O. Alanen, University of Turku, Finland, Manuel González de Chávez, Complutense Madris University, Spain, Ann-Louise S. Silver, University of the Health Sciences, Bethesda, Maryland, USA, and Brian Martindale, South Tyne and Wearside, Mental Health NHS Trust, UK “I am delighted to bring to the attention of psychiatrists and other mental health professionals across the world the work reflected in this book, as I am convinced that these approaches with their humanistic core have much to offer for upgrading person-centered clinical care for people experiencing psychoses.” - Professor Juan E. Mezzich, President of the World Psychiatric Association

Schizophrenia and Psychosis

Schizophrenia: The Positive Perspective Explorations at the Outer Reaches of Human Experience Second Edition

Peter K. Chadwick, Retired, formerly of Birkbeck College Faculty of Continuing Education and The Open University, UK “This excellent book is written by a psychologist who has experienced psychosis. His own case history and that of others should be essential reading for both trainees and graduates in the Mental Health Field.” - Brian Martindale, Early Intervention in Psychosis Service, Northumberland Tyne and Wear NHS Trust, UK

This fully revised second edition of Schizophrenia: The Positive Perspective uses biographical sketches and essays to discuss schizophrenia and related conditions, providing advice on methods of coping, routes to growth, recovery and well-being, and how schizophrenia can be viewed in a positive light. It also explores the insights of R.D. Laing and discusses how they can be applied to contemporary ideas and research. Contents: Introduction: In Defence of Spirituality, Mysticism and Madness.

Demystifying Madness and Mystifying Sanity. Parker, Cannabis and Altered States – A Positive View. Hammond, Cannabis and Altered States – The Dark Side. Getting in to Psychosis: The Story from the Inside. Getting Out of Psychosis: Hints and Strategies. Thinking at The Borderline: The ‘Deep Music’ Theory of Reality. Desmond: Comedian Mystic. Ivo: Fugitive from Crassness. Denys: Adventures in Meaning. Reflections on the Biographical Sketches. On the Acceptance and Emotional Understanding of Psychotic Thought. Issues in Diagnosis, Therapy and Understanding. Conclusions and Overview. 2008: 224pp. Hb: 978-0-415-45907-5: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45908-2: $34.95

Psychotherapeutic Approaches to Schizophrenic Psychoses brings together professionals from around the world to provide an extensive overview of the treatment of schizophrenia and psychosis. Divided into three parts – past, present and future – the book begins by examining the history of the treatment of schizophrenia and psychosis, with reference to Freud, Jung, Harry Stack Sullivan and Adolf Meyer, amongst others. Part II then takes a geographical look at treatment and its evolution in different parts of the world including the UK, USA, Northern Europe and Eastern Asia. Finally, Part III covers the range of interventions, from pharmacological treatments to psychoanalytic psychotherapy to CBT, with the aim of helping to shape the future integration of treatment. With contributions from leading figures in the field, this book will provide a varied examination of treatment, and spark much-needed debate about its future. July 2009: 420pp. Hb: 978-0-415-44012-7: $110.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44013-4: $43.95

Series: The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses

Making Sense of Madness Contesting the Meaning of Schizophrenia

Jim Geekie, clinical psychologist for Auckland District Health Board, New Zealand, and John Read, University of Auckland, New Zealand “Jim Geekie and John Read have written a fascinating book about what psychiatrists call ‘schizophrenia’... This is a ‘must read’ for all mental health professionals and everyone else interested in madness.” - Professor Paul J. Fink, Past President American Psychiatric Association, Temple University School of Medicine, USA

The experience of madness – which might also be referred to more formally as ‘schizophrenia’ or ‘psychosis’ – consists of a complex, confusing, and often distressing collection of experiences, such as hearing voices or developing unusual, seemingly unfounded beliefs. Madness, in its various forms and guises, seems to be a ubiquitous

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

isps series


feature of being human, yet our ability to make sense of madness, and our knowledge of how to help those who are so troubled is limited. Making Sense of Madness explores the subjective experiences of madness. Using clients’ stories and verbatim descriptions, it argues that the experience of ‘madness’ is an integral part of what it is to be human, and that greater focus on subjective experiences can contribute to professional understandings and ways of helping those who might be troubled by these experiences.

Also in the Series Gale et al., Eds.: Therapeutic Communities for Psychosis: Philosophy, History and Clinical Practice Hb: 978-0-415-44053-0: 2008: 296pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44054-7: 2008: 296pp. $35.95

Gleeson et al., Eds.: Psychotherapies for the Psychoses: Theoretical, Cultural and Clinical Integration

Contents: Introduction. The Subjective Experience of Madness. Making

Sense of Madness I: Subjective Experience. Making Sense of Madness II: Lay Understandings. What Does the Public Think About ‘Schizophrenia’? Making Sense of Madness III: Scientific/Professional Understandings of ‘Madness’. Bringing It All Together. What ‘Schizophrenia’ Really Is. Where to From Here? July 2009: 208pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46195-5: $95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46196-2: $34.95

Hb: 978-0-415-41191-2: 2008: 288pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41192-9: 2008: 288pp. $35.95

Hardcastle et al., Eds: Experiences of Mental Health In-patient Care: Narratives from Service Users, Carers and Professionals Hb: 978-0-415-41081-6: 2007: 248pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-41082-3: 2007: 248pp. $35.95

Series: The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses

Bloch Thorsen et al.: Family and Multi-Family Work with Psychosis: A Guide for Professionals

Beyond Medication

Hb: 978-1-58391-726-8: 2006: 152pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-727-5: 2006: 152pp. $35.95

Therapeutic Engagement and the Recovery from Psychosis

Cullberg: Psychoses: An Integrative Perspective Hb: 978-1-58391-992-7: 2006: 368pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-993-4: 2006: 368pp. $37.95

Edited by David Garfield, Rosalind Franklin University of Medicine and Science, USA, and Daniel Mackler, in private practice, New York, USA “This superbly executed work is as courageous as it is timely. At last psychoanalytically informed psychotherapy is being recommended and justified for the treatment of psychotic patients – over and above – and often instead of – psychopharmacology!”

Johannessen et al., Eds.: Evolving Psychosis: Different Stages, Different Treatments Hb: 978-1-58391-722-0: 2006: 320pp. $90.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-723-7: 2006: 320pp. $37.95

Read et al., Eds.: Models of Madness: Psychological, Social and Biological Approaches to Schizophrenia Pb: 978-1-58391-906-4: 2004: 400pp. $37.95

- James Grotstein, David Geffen School of Medicine, UCLA, USA

Beyond Medication focuses on the creation and evolution of the therapeutic relationship as the agent of change in the recovery from psychosis. Organized from the clinician’s point of view, this practical guidebook moves directly into the heart of the therapeutic process with a sequence of chapters that outline the progressive steps of engagement necessary to recovery. Both the editors and contributors challenge the established medical model by placing the therapeutic relationship at the centre of the treatment process, thus supplanting medication as the single most important element in recovery. Contents: Karon, Silver, Foreword. Part I: Engaging the Patient. Garfield,

Dorman, Strengthening the Patient. Faulconer, Silver, The Initial Engagement in the Psychotherapy of Psychosis, With and Without an Asylum. Prouty, Making Contact with the Chronically Regressed Patient. Schwartz, Summers, The Role of the Therapeutic Alliance in the Treatment of Seriously Disturbed Individuals. Part II: The Elements of Change. Summers, Sustaining Relationships: Cure, Care, and Recovery. Kipp, Sustaining Relationships in Milieu Treatment: A Corollary to Summers. Koehler, The Process of Therapeutic Change: Trauma, Dissociation, and Therapeutic Symbiosis. Gibbs, Technical Challenges in the Psychoanalytic Treatment of Psychotic Depression. Mackler, Practicing the “Impossible Profession” in Impossible Places. Part III: Listening to the Patient: Stories of What Really Works. Penney, Leaving Schizophrenia: The Returning Home of the Awakened Mind. Greenberg, Life in the Mines: A Retrospective on my Therapy. Foltz, The Experience of Being Medicated in Schizophrenia: A Subjective Inquiry and Implications for Psychotherapy. Part IV: Concluding Chapter. Steinman, Sustaining the Therapeutic Approach: Therapists May Need Help Too! 2008: 216pp. Hb: 978-0-415-46386-7: $90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-46387-4: $35.95

Series: The International Society for the Psychological Treatments of the Schizophrenias and Other Psychoses

Narrative CBT for Psychosis John Rhodes, Consultant Psychologist, Brent, CNWL Trust, UK, Simon Jakes, Consultant Clinical Psychologist, Campbelltown Hospital, South West Sydney, Australia “Narrative CBT for Psychosis is a clearly written text describing the potential for integrating solution-focused and narrative-based approaches with CBT for psychosis.”

- David Kingdon, Professor of Mental Health Care Delivery, University of Southampton, UK

Designed to meet the complex needs of patients with psychosis, Narrative CBT for Psychosis combines narrative and solution-focused therapy with established techniques from CBT into one integrated flexible approach. In this book John Rhodes and Simon Jakes bring the practitioner up to date, as treatment and practice evolve to draw on other therapeutic approaches, creating an approach which is client centred and nonconfrontational. The book contains many tried and tested practical ideas for helping clients, with several chapters including detailed and illuminating case studies. Contents: Narrative CBT for Psychosis. Understanding Psychosis and Implications for Therapy. Assessment, Engagement and Case-conceptualisation. Finding Solutions. Working with Personal Meaning. Narrative and Trauma. Alternative Perspectives. Voices and Visions. Movement to Recovery and Ending Therapy. March 2009: 240pp. Hb: 978-0-415-40730-4: $100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47572-3: $43.95

10% DISCOUNT! Order online at

self-harm and suicide


stress and trauma

Managing Self-Harm Psychological Perspectives Edited by Anna Motz, Consultant Clinical and Forensic Psychologist with the Thames Valley Forensic Services, UK “Caring for people who harm themselves is hard work. This excellent collection of papers, ably edited by Anna Motz, will help those of us who do this difficult work to do it better.” - Dr Gwen

Adshead, Consultant Forensic Psychotherapist, Broadmoor Hospital, UK

Self-harm often arises at moments of despair or emotional intensity, and its reasons are not necessarily available to the conscious mind. Managing Self-Harm explores the meaning and impact of self-harm, and the sense in which it is a language of the body. It is designed to help clinicians, people who self-harm and their families and carers to understand its causes, meaning and treatment. Each chapter integrates theory with clinical illustration, enabling the direct experiences of those who self-harm to be heard and reflecting the populations that are most likely to self-harm. The contributors are drawn from a wide range of backgrounds, including clinical psychology, psychotherapy, group analysis and psychiatric nursing. Contents: Motz, Introduction. Part I: Understanding Self-Harm. Motz, Self-

Harm as a Sign of Hope. Motz, Jones, The Paradox of Self-Harm. Part II: The Wider Context: Systemic Issues and Self-Harm. Scanlon, Adlam, “Why Do You Treat Me This Way?” Reciprocal Violence and the Mythology of Self-Harm. Norris, Maher, The Trap: Self-Harm and Young People in Foster Care and Residential Settings. Grocutt, Self-Harm and Attachment. Part III: Women, Self-Harm and Treatment Issues. Kleinot, Speaking with the Body. Greenwood, Absences, Transitions and Endings: Threats to Successful Treatment. Lawday, Self-Harm in Women’s Secure Services: Reflections and Strategies for Treatment Design. Grocutt, Self-Harm Cessation in Secure Units. Motz, Conclusion: “If You Prick Us Do We Not Bleed?” The Meaning and Management of Self-Harm. September 2009: 248pp. Hb: 978-1-58391-704-6: $95.00 Pb: 978-1-58391-705-3: $34.95

to download the free podcast with Anna Motz please visit

Hope in Action Solution-Focused Conversations About Suicide

Heather Fiske, University of Toronto, Canada Hope in Action is a unique resource providing fresh approaches to treating individuals and families where suicide is an issue. This comprehensive book provides a thorough grounding in using a solution-focused therapy approach to elicit and reinforce hope and reasons for living. Strategies are demonstrated with stories, case vignettes, and transcripts. Special applications include some of the most challenging high-risk clients that therapists treat, including people who make repeated attempts. This powerful resource offers a set of practice principles based on the existing empirical evidence in the context of clinical utility and client expertise. 2008: 368pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3393-2: $75.95 Pb: 978-0-7890-3394-9: $49.95


Living and Surviving in Harm’s Way A Psychological Treatment Handbook for Pre- and PostDeployment of Military Personnel

Edited by Sharon Morgillo Freeman, Director of The Center for Brief Therapy, Indiana, USA, Bret A. Moore, Captain of Medical Service Corps, United States Army, USA, and Arthur Freeman, Philadelphia College of Osteopathic Medicine, USA In Living and Surviving in Harm’s Way, experts investigate the psychological impact of how warriors live and survive in combat duty. They address the combat preparation of service men and women, their support system, and their interpersonal and intrapersonal experiences. The book maintains a focus on cognitive behavioral interventions for treating various combat related disorders, and addresses psychological health and adjustment after leaving the battlefield. June 2009: 543pp. Hb: 978-0-415-98868-1: $44.95

Trauma and Serious Mental Illness

Edited by Steven N. Gold, Nova Southeastern University, Center for Psychological Studies, Florida, USA, and Jon D. Elhai, University of South Dakota, USA For decades, the idea that serious mental illnesses (SMIs) are almost exclusively biologically-based and must be treated pharmacologically has been commonplace in psychology literature. As a result, many mental health professionals have stopped listening to their clients, categorizing their symptoms as manifestations of neurologicallybased disturbed thinking. Trauma and Serious Mental Illness is the groundbreaking series of works that challenge this standard view and provides a comprehensive introduction to the emerging perspective of SMIs as trauma-based. Contents: Gold, Trauma and Serious Mental Illness: Is the Pendulum About to Swing? Conceptual Frameworks. Hammersley, Read, Woodall, Dillon, Childhood Trauma and Psychosis: The Genie is Out of the Bottle. Ross, Dissociation and Psychosis: Conceptual Issues. Moskowitz, Corsten, Auditory Hallucinations: Psychotic Symptom or Dissociative Experience? Empirical Studies. Faust, Stewart, Impact of Child Abuse Timing and Family Environment on Psychosis. Grubaugh, Cusack, Yim, Knapp, Frueh, Gender Differences in Relationship Patterns Between Adverse Psychiatric Experiences, Lifetime Trauma, and PTSD. Clinical Applications. Levy, The Broad Relationship Between Bipolar Disorder and Disorders of Psychological Trauma: Time-limited to Life-long Need for Mood Stabilizers. Karon, Trauma and Schizophrenia.

2008: 170pp. Hb: 978-0-7890-3650-6: $40.00 Pb: 978-0-7890-3651-3: $25.95

for books on Child and Adolescent Self-Harm and Trauma please see page 39

60 day examination copy available FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

AUTHOR INDEX A Alanen, Y. O., Ed. ...................... 69 Altman, N. .................................. 56 Anderson, J., Ed. ...................... 34 Ando, O., Ed. . ............................ 57 Aten, J. D., Ed. ........................... 10 Averill, R. . ................................... 40

Douglas, K., Ed. ........................ 62 Dourley, J. P. .............................. 57 Draguns, J.G., Ed. .................... 12 Dryden, W. .......................... 25, 26 Duehl, J. T. .................................. 68 Dunbar, A. .................................. 15

Routledge Recommends...

Title Title

Hoff, L. A. ............................. 19, 69 Hoff, M. . ...................................... 19 Hoffman, P. D., Ed. . ................. 67 Hofmann, S. G. ......................... 26 Holden, J. M. ................................ 5 Hopwood, C. J., Ed. . ............... 61 Horne, A., Ed. ............................ 33 Hughes, T. ........................... 42, 43 Huprich, S. K. . ........................... 61

E Edwards, L. ................................ 66 B I Ekleberry, S. C. . ........................ 67 Bailey, J. S. .................................. Iwamoto, D. K., Ed. . ................ 12 Elhai, J. D., Ed. ........................... 71 Edited by16 Editor Name Baity, M. R., Ed. ......................... 61 Ellis, C. M., Ed. ........................... 15 Editor Name . ...................................................................... X J Banks, J. B. . ................................ 45 Erickson, M. H. . ........................ 16 Jakes, S. ....................................... 70 Baraitser, L. ................................ 51 Jennings, S., Ed. ....................... 32 F Barlow, J., Ed. ............................ 34 Fall, K. A. ........................................ 5 Johnson, D. R. .............................. 8 Barnett, L., Ed. .......................... 23 Feit, M. D., Ed. ........................... 38 Jones, P., Ed. .............................. 30 Basseches, M. .............................. 7 Feldman, M. .............................. 53 Joseph, B., Ed. . ......................... 53 Bertolino, B. . ................................ 8 Author Name .Ferro, .................................................................. XX A. ...................................... 53 Birksted-Breen, D., Ed. .......... 52 K Finn, S. ......................................... 10 Black, D. R. ................................. 42 Kaminer, Y., Ed. . ....................... 37 Fish, J. M., Ed. ............................ 12 Blagen, M. .................................. 14 Kanan, L. M. ............................... 41 Fisher, P. ...................................... 25 Blais, M. A., Ed. ......................... 61 Kanter, J. W. ............................... 24 Fisher, W. .................................... 68 Blechner, M. J. .......................... 55 Kapalka, G. . ............................... 12 Fiske, H. ....................................... 71 Blevins, D., Ed. .......................... 21 Karis, T. A., Ed. . ......................... 47 Fitzpatrick, M. . ......................... 37 Bloomgarden, A., Ed. . .............. 7 Kaufman, J., Ed. . ...................... 43 Fiumara, G. C. ........................... 49 Bollas, C. ..................................... 48 Keen, S. M. ................................. 38 Flanders, S., Ed. ........................ 52 Author Name . .................................................................. XXB. . .................................... 7 Bourgeois, M. S. ....................... 66 Keeney, Flora, R. ....................................... 68 Bowen, E. L. ............................... 68 Kellam, T. .................................... 45 Ford, J. D., Ed. . .......................... 39 Boylan, J. C. ............................... 17 Kelly, J. G., Ed. ........................... 20 Frank, C. ...................................... 53 Brehm, K. .................................... 41 Kennard, D., Ed. . ...................... 59 Freeman, A., Ed. . ..................... 71 Brenner, G. H., Ed. ................... 19 Keohane, M. .............................. 68 Freeman, S. M., Ed. . ................ 71 Brick, J., Ed. ................................ 64 Keys, D. . ...................................... 40 Frie, R., Ed. . ................................ 50 Briggs, C. A. ............................... Flash 65 Kiener, M. ...................................... 8 Brom, D., Ed. . ............................ 39 G Killian, K. D., Ed. ....................... 47 Brown, L., Ed. ............................ 17 Gabriel, L., Ed. . ......................... 17 Kleiman, K. . ............................... 67 Bucky, S. F., Ed. ......................... 62 Gallardo, M. E., Ed. .................. 11 Kusumakar, V., Ed. ................... 67 Bukstein, O. G., Ed. . ................ 37 Gambescia, N., Ed. .................. 46 L Burch, M. R. . .............................. 16 Garcia-Vazquez, E., Ed. . ........ 43 Lachkar, J. . ................................. 50 Burns, M., Ed. ............................ 66 Garfield, D., Ed. ........................ 70 Author Name . ................................................................. XX M. N. ......................... 67 Lafrance, Burr, K. ......................................... 20 Geekie, J. .................................... 69 Lanyado, M., Ed. ...................... 33 Busch, A. M. ............................... 24 Gerson, M. J. . ............................ 51 Leach, M. M., Ed. ...................... 10 Bush, D. H., Ed. . ........................ 19 Gibeault, A., Ed. ....................... 52 Leahy, R. L., Ed. ......................... 27 Gielen, U. P., Ed. ....................... 12 C Leavitt, J. P. ................................ 47 Gilbert, P., Ed. . .......................... 27 Callan, J. E., Ed. ......................... 62 Leffingwell, T. R., Ed. .............. 10 Glickman, N. . ............................ 11 Caper, R. . .................................... 50 Leverton, M., Ed. . .................... 64 Gold, S. N., Ed. .......................... 71 Carlson, J., Ed. . ......................... 15 Liotta, E. . .................................... 58 Golden, G. H. . ........................... 46 Carr, A. ............................................ 5 Name of Lisiecki, J. . ..................................... 5 Gowers, S. G. ............................. 35 Cartwright, D. ........................... 49 Liu, W., Ed. .................................. 12 Series Grainger, E., Ed. . ...................... 34 Casemore, R., Ed. . ................... 17 Lubin, H. ........................................ 8 Grand, S. ..................................... 55 Chadwick, P. K. ......................... 69 Lucas, R. ...................................... 53 Grant, M., Ed. . ........................... 64 Chae, M. H., Ed. ........................ 12 Green, G. . ................................... 60 Chaiklin, S.,of Ed. ......................... name Series 31 Green, L. ..................................... 35 M Maberry, B. L. ............................ 68 Chiari, G. ........................................ 6 Greenwald, R. ........................... 38 Macdonald, P., Ed. . ................. 65 Christner, R. W. ......................... 42 Grey, N., Ed. ............................... 29 MacGregor, S., Ed. . ................. 63 Clark, D. M. . ............................... 35 R. .................................... 66 Mackler, D., Ed. ......................... 70 Clarke, I., Ed. .............................. name of Series 28 Grieco, Grossmark, R., Ed. ................... 54 Main, S. . ...................................... 58 Cohen, D. . .................................. 44 Guggenheim, F. G. .................. 59 Maine, M., Ed. ........................... 66 Cohen, L. M., Ed. ...................... 10 Guindon, M., Ed. ...................... 14 Mallet, S. ..................................... 40 Collins, F. L., Ed. ........................ 10 Connor, S. R. .............................. name of Series 22 Gyler, L. ....................................... 51 Malson, H., Ed. .......................... 66 Manassis, K. ............................... 28 Cook, K. L., Ed. .......................... 10 H Mann, D., Ed. ................................ 9 Cooper, P. C. .............................. 50 Haaken, J., Ed. . ......................... 39 Marbley, A. . ............................... 15 Copello, A. ................................. 63 Hallisey, B. J. .............................. 19 Crane, R. ..................................... name of Series 25 Hall, L. K. ..................................... 13 Marquis, A. . .................................. 5 Martindale, B., Ed. ................... 69 Crespi, T., Ed. ............................. 43 Hall, S. P. . .................................... 14 Martinic, M., Ed. ....................... 64 Crothers, L. M. .......................... 42 Halsey, S. . ................................... 68 Mascolo, M. F. .............................. 7 Culbreth, J., Ed. ........................ 17 Hancock, S. ................................ 59 Cullington,of D. . .......................... name Series 47 Hartley, L., Ed. .............................. 9 Mathers, D., Ed. .................. 57, 58 Matteson, D. R. . ....................... 20 Cunningham, V., Ed. . ................ 9 Hartley, P., Ed. ........................... 59 McCarthy, B. W. ........................ 45 Cupitt, C., Ed. ............................ 60 Heard, H. L. ................................ 25 McCarthy, E. .............................. 45 Heath, N. L., Ed. ........................ 39 D McChargue, D. E., Ed. . ........... 10 Hecker, L. L. .................................. 8 Dallos, R. ..................................... 44 McCloskey, G. ........................... 41 Heller, M. B., Ed. ....................... 50 Davis, W. N., Ed. . ...................... 66 McCorkindale, J. A. ................. 68 Hennon, C. B., Ed. . .................. 44 Day, R. D. . ................................... 44 McCoy, M. L. .............................. 38 Hertlein, K. M.. . .......................... 46 De Chavez, M. G., Ed. ............. 69 McDonald, C., Ed. . .................. 63 Hickey, E....................................... 66 DeGangi, G. A. .......................... 34 McMahon, L. ............................. 32 Hilarski, C., Ed. .......................... 38 Dell, P. F., Ed. . ............................ 60 McNeill, B. W. ...................... 11, 18 Hilt, L. M., Ed. ............................ 38 Dixon, Jr., W. E. ......................... 45 Measham, F., Ed. ...................... 64 Hinz, L. D. . .................................. 31 Dokter, D., Ed. ........................... 30 Mehrotra, C. M. ........................ 66 Hodgson, R. . ............................. 63 Doll, B. ......................................... 41



Title Title

series websites

Mennuti, R. B. ....................... 7, 42 Midgley, N., Ed. ........................ 34 Miller, M. E., Ed. ........................ 57 Milliren, A. . ................................ 14 Moon, C. H., Ed. . ...................... 31 Moore, B. A., Ed. . ..................... 71 Morgan, J. F. .............................. 65 Morine, K. A. . ............................ 42 Moses, J., Ed. ............................. 19 Motz, A., Ed. .............................. 71 Mozdzierz, G. J............................. 5 N Neenan, M.................................. 23 Neimeyer, R. A. . ....................... 24 Nemiroff, M. A. ......................... 34 Nesic-Vuckovic, T., Ed. ........... 34 Nixon, M. K., Ed. ....................... 39 Nolen-Hoeksema, S., Ed. . .... 38 Nuzzo, M. L. .................................. 6 O Odell-Miller, H., Ed. . ............... 30 Ogden, T. H. . ............................. 54 Olsen, D. C. ................................ 47 O’Neil, J. A., Ed. . ....................... 60 Orange, D. . ......................... 49, 50 Oren, C. Z., Ed. .......................... 13 Oren, D. C., Ed. . ........................ 13 Orford, J. . ................................... 63 Otto, M. W. ................................. 26 Otto, R. K., Ed. ........................... 62 Otwell, P. . ................................... 21 P Parkes, C. M. .............................. 22 Parson, L. C. ............................... 68 Pat-Horenczyk, R., Ed. ........... 39 Patterson, R. . ............................... 8 Pazaratz, D. . .............................. 38 Pearce, J. ..................................... 39 Peltier, B. . ................................... 15 Peluso, P. R. ................................... 5 Pepperell, J. L. .......................... 65 Perkins, L. A. .............................. 41 Perrin, S. . .................................... 35 Philpot, T. ................................... 68 Pichot, T....................................... 64 Pincus, D. . .................................. 61 Plog, A. E. ................................... 41 Pollet, S., Ed. . ............................ 50 Prigerson, H. G. ........................ 22 Pyles, L. ....................................... 19 Q Quinodoz, D. . ........................... 51 R Ragen, T. ..................................... 55 Rasmussen, P. R. . ..................... 13 Read, J. ........................................ 69 Reavey, P., Ed. . .......................... 39 Reeves, M. A. . ........................... 41 Reis, B., Ed. ................................. 54 Rhodes, J. ................................... 70 Riccio, C., Ed. ............................. 43 Richards, E., Ed. ........................ 30 Rivett, M. .................................... 43 Rogers, J. .................................... 36 Rosenbaum, M. S. ................... 56 Rosenberg, J. ............................ 18 Rosenfeld, G. W. . ..................... 11 Rosenthal, D. . ........................... 40 Rosenthal, H. . ........................... 18 Rossi, E. L. ................................... 16 Rowe, D. . ....................................... 9 Rubin, J. A. ................................. 30 Rusch, L. C. . ............................... 24 S Samons, S. L. ............................. 48 Sandberg, E. H., Ed. ................ 40 Scaife, J. ...................................... 17 Schmidt, U., Ed. ........................ 65

Scott, J. . ...................................... 17 Scott, M. J. . ................................ 28 Selig, M. ......................................... 4 Sendak, S. K. . ............................ 46 Sexton, T. . .................................. 43 Shakoor, M. . .............................. 18 Sheikh, A. A. .............................. 61 Shure, J., Ed. .............................. 66 Silver, A. L. S., Ed. ..................... 69 Simos, G., Ed. ............................ 27 Singh, G. ..................................... 56 Skovholt, T. ................................ 10 Slovenko, R. . ............................. 62 Smith, P. ...................................... 35 Smock, S. A. ............................... 64 Song, A. V., Ed. . ........................ 20 Sookman, D., Ed. ..................... 27 Sori, C. F. ........................................ 8 Sperry, L. . ........................ 7, 16, 20 Spillius, E., Ed. ........................... 53 Spritz, B. L., Ed. ......................... 40 Staemmler, F. M. ...................... 52 Stallard, P. . ................................. 36 Steere, D. A. ............................... 21 Steiner-Grossman, P., Ed. ..... 67 Stephenson, C. E. .................... 57 Stern, D. B. . ................................ 54 Stoltenberg, C. D. . .................. 18 Stopa, L., Ed. . ............................ 29 Strahan, E. Y. . ............................ 45 Street, E. . .................................... 43 Stricker, G., Ed. . ........................ 62 Strock, C. .................................... 48 Svanberg, P. O., Ed. ................. 34 Swales, M. A. ............................. 25 Sweeney, T. J. ............................ 14 T Tindall, J. A. ............................... 42 Tober, G. ..................................... 63 Treasure, J., Ed. ......................... 65 U Ullman, D., Ed. .......................... 52 Urwin, C., Ed. . ........................... 34 V Van Divner, B. ........................... 41 Verduyn, C. ................................ 36 Vetere, A. .................................... 44 W Waddell, T. ................................. 56 Wagner, L. S. . ............................ 66 Waite, P., Ed. .............................. 36 Waldinger, M. ........................... 46 Walsh, W. B. ............................... 13 Warner, S. ................................... 68 Weeks, G. R. . ............................. 46 Wells, A. ...................................... 25 Wengrower, H., Ed. ................. 31 Werth, Jr., J. L., Ed. . ................. 21 Wheeler, G., Ed. . ...................... 52 Whitbeck, L. B. ......................... 40 Widdowson, M. . ......................... 6 Williams, T., Ed. . ....................... 36 Willows, J. . ................................. 68 Wills, F. . ....................................... 24 Wilmshurst, L. . ......................... 35 Wilson, H., Ed. ........................... 28 Wilson, S. M., Ed. . .................... 44 Wimpenny, P. ............................ 22 Wodarski, J. S., Ed. . ................. 38 Wood, A. ..................................... 36 Wright, K. ................................... 51 Y Yang, J. ........................................ Yatham, L. N., Ed. . ................... Yokley, J. M. ............................... Young, A., Ed. . .......................... Yule, W. . ......................................

14 67 37 10 35

DISTRIBUTION, INTERNATIONAL REPRESENTATIVES AND AGENTS Milton Park Sales Office Search Taylor & Francis Group (Books Ltd) 2 Park Square Milton Park Abingdon, Oxon, OX14 4RN Group Sales Director Christoph Chesher Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6194 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: Director of International Sales Graham Crossley Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6048 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: Head of UK Sales Nick Perry Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6132 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6732 Email: Corporate and Institutional Sales Alfred Lea Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6273 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6732 Email: UK Sales Administrator Judith Cavell Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6191 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6732 Email:


Peter Havinga, European Sales Manager Tel: +31 (0) 23 750 5730 Fax: +31 (0) 23 750 5701 Mobile: +31 (0) 6 515 69560 Email: Belgium, The Netherlands, France and Luxembourg Liza Walraven Sales Representative A. Hofmanweg 5a, 2031 BH Haarlem, The Netherlands Tel: 0031 (0) 23 7505731 Fax: 0031 (0) 23 7505701 Mobile: 0031 (0) 623849668 Email: Greece Ryan Cooper, Area Sales Manager Milton Park Sales Office Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6113 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: Nordic Countries Keith Gray, Sales Representative Tel: +45 (0)4195 1428 Mobile: +45 6064 8041 Email: Germany, Austria and Switzerland Eva Kneissl, Area Sales Representative (Maternity leave cover for Gabriela Mauch) Mobile: +49 (0) 17 3905 9469 Email: Middle East and North Africa Spain, Portugal and Italy Jasmina Basic Philip Veysey, Area Sales Manager Area Sales Manager – Middle East and Africa +34 91 700 secure 0688 Milton Park Sales Office All books are available to buy online Tel: using our Fax: +34 91 141 2304 Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6187 e-commerce system, and as an aid to your online Mobile: +34 68 777purchases, 3678 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: E-mail: we have available subject specific Arenas. The Arenas are very and Zoe Kaviani Eastern Europe easy to navigate know that you Sciences) want to find IPS (Middle East) Ltd, P. O.around, Box 27533, because Dubai, UAE we(Humanities and Social Tel: +971-4-282 8801 you’re after quickly, whether Marek Lewinson the information it’s the ‘buy now’ Fax: +971-4-282 8804 Bohaterewicza 3/45, 03-982 Warsaw, Poland link a particular book, the date and venue of a forthcoming Email:for Tel/Fax: + 48 (0) 22 6714819 Website: +48 (0) 602 707 037 journal conference, or the online version of aMobile: specific academic Email: Africa article. and (Science and Technology) Jasmina Basic, Area Sales Manager Radek Janousek We also three new Arenas: Middle East have and Africa Pod Nouzovem 972/21 Milton Park Sales Office 19700 Prague, Czech Republic Health Psychology Arena Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6187 Tel: + 42 (0) 286 584 9888 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Mobile: +42 (0) 602 294 014 Email: Email: Nigeria European Enquiries Gerontology Chinke Ojiji Lucy Astone Publishers Support Services Ltd International Sales Support Coordinator Plot 2 Adewunmi Estate, Oregun Road Milton Park Sales Office Forensic Psychology and Psychiatry (Near First Bank Oregun) Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6149 PO Box 9270, Ikeja, Lagos State Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Tel: +234 1 7741073 Email: Fax: +234 1 493 0419 For a full list of all our Arenas and series websites, South Asia please visit the email: resources page at: Ryan Cooper Botswana Area Sales Manager Arthur Oageng, Sales Manager Milton Park Sales Office Book Promotions/Horizon Books, Botswana Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6113 Gaborone International Finance Park And if you do find a particular Arena useful, don’t forget to Fax: +44 (0)please 20 7017 6748 Plot 113-114, Unit 33, Kgale Mews 2, Suite 3 Gaborone, Botswana bookmark it and tell your friends andEmail: colleagues about it! Tel: +267 393 1194 India Fax: +267 392 4908 Pankaj Bhardwaj Email: Taylor & Francis Books India Pvt Ltd South Africa, Namibia, 912 Tolstoy House, 15-17 Tolstoy Marg Lesotho and Swaziland New Delhi – 110001 Michelle Symington Tel: +91 (0) 11 23712131 / 23351453 Book Promotions Ltd Fax: +91 (0) 11 23712132 BMD Office Park, 108 De Waal Road has been reconstructed Our email alerting service and the new Email: Diep River, 7800 Cape Town Pakistan improved South Africa service is now available to provide new title updates, M. Anwer Iqbal Tel: +27 21 707 5700 and conference news. special offers Book Bird, Mian Chambers, 3 Temple Road General Fax: + 27 21 707 5795 PO Box 518, Lahore, Pakistan Orders +27 21 707 If youFax: would like5794 to receive these bulletins, Tel: +92 42simply 636 7275sign up at: Email: Fax: +92 42 636 1370 E-mail: Israel and the Palestinian Territories Sri Lanka Ryan Cooper, Area Sales Manager of our customers: We respect the privacy we will always include Nirosha Saravanapavan Milton Park Sales Office aTel:link to leave the list in any communication and will never pass Mobile: 0094 714 750911 +44 (0) 20 7017 6113 Email: Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748


Email Alerting Service

your email address to a third party. Email: and Rodney Franklin, Franklin’s International PO BOX 3772 7 Tel Aviv 61376, Israel Tel: +972 3 5600724 Fax: +972 3 5600479 Email:

Japan Hans Van Ess, Book Sales and Marketing Executive Taylor and Francis Group 7F Koshin Bldg. 2-23-4 Kanda-Jimbocho, Chiyoda, Tokyo 101-0051, Japan Tel: +81 (0) 35848 7061 Mobile: +81 (0) 80 5426 3552 Email: United Publishers Services Limited Tel: +81 (0) 3 5479 7251 Fax: +81 (0) 3 5479 7307 Email: Editorial Office: Takahiko Kaneko Tel: +81 (0) 3 5296 9186 Fax: +81 (0) 3 3252 1822 Email:

Korea Se-Yung Jun ICK (Information & Culture Korea) 473-19 Seokyo-Dong, Mapo-Ku, Seoul, Korea 121-842 Tel: +82 2 3141 4791 Fax: +82 2 3141 7733 Email:

New Zealand Macmillan Publishers NZ Ltd Victoria Johnson Tel: +64 9414 0350 Fax: +64 9414 0357 Email: Australia and New Zealand CRC Press and Marcel Dekker only Libraries may wish to order from their local bookseller, Palgrave Macmillan or DA Information Services Pty Ltd Tel: +61 3 9210 7804 Fax: +61 3 9210 7788 Australia Europa Publications (non-exclusive) James Bennett Tel: +02 9986 7064 Fax: +02 9986 7030

Caribbean and The West Indies Jasmina Basic, Area Sales Manager Milton Park Sales Office Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6187 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email:

East and South East Asia

North America

For all Taylor & Francis Group imprints please order from Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific, Singapore Sales Office Singapore Sales Office Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific 240 Macpherson Road #08-01 Pines Industrial Building Singapore 348574 Tel: +65 6741 5166 Fax: +65 6742 9356 Email: Hong Kong and Vietnam Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Singapore Sales Office Email: Singapore, Philippines and Indonesia Francis Chua, Sales Manager Singapore Sales Office Email: Thailand Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific Tel: +66 (2) 642 7954-6 ext. 406 Fax: +66 (2) 642 7677 Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Email: and Nonglak Sawaithong, Sales Executive Email: Malaysia and Brunei David Yeong, General Manager Taylor & Francis Publishing Services Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific Tel: +60 (3) 5630 1361 Fax: +60 (3) 5630 1732 Mobile: +60 (0)16 331 9912 Email: China Taylor & Francis Room 903, Resource Building No.151 North Street Zhongguancun, Beijing, China 100080 Tel/Fax: +86 (10) 58876523 Sales: Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Email: and Cynthia Ji, Sales and Marketing Executive Email: Taiwan Taylor & Francis Asia Pacific Tel: +886 (2) 2578 6106 ext.125 Fax: +886 (2) 2578 6507 Mobile: +886 (9) 7216 9672 Jeffrey Lim, Book Sales Director Email: and Raymond Hsu, Sales Executive Email:

Sales Office Dennis Weiss, Vice President Sales Taylor and Francis 6000 Broken Sound Parkway NW, Suite 300, Boca Raton, FL 33487, USA Within the Continental USA: Tel: 800-272-7737 Fax: 800-374-3401 E-mail: Outside USA: Tel: +1 561-994-0555 Fax: +1 561-361-6018 Email:

Australasia Kate Pearce Milton Park Sales Office Tel: +44 (0)207 017 6053 Fax: +44 (0)207 017 6748 Email: Australia Palgrave Macmillan Tel: +61 (0) 39825 1111 Fax: +61 (0) 39825 1010 Email:

Central and South America and Mexico Michael Dulisse, Sales Office, Boca Raton, FL Taylor & Francis Tel: +1 561 998 2582 Fax: +1 561 361 6049 E-mail: and Ethan E. Atkin Cranbury International LLC, 7 Clarendon Ave, Suite 2, Montpelier, VT 05602, USA Tel: +1 802 223 6565 Fax: +1 802 223 6824 Email: International Enquiries Kate Pearce International Sales Support Manager (Books) Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6053 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: South Asian, Middle Eastern and African Enquiries Reanna Young International Sales Support Coordinator Tel: +44 (0) 20 7017 6114 Fax: +44 (0) 20 7017 6748 Email: Foreign Rights Adele Parker Email: China Liaison Office Yan Pei, Manager Taylor & Francis Tel/Fax: +86 (10) 58876523 Email: International Customer Services, Orders and Distribution Taylor and Francis Customer Services Bookpoint 130 Milton Park Abingdon Oxon OX14 4SB, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1235 400 524 Fax: +44 (0) 1235 400 525 email (UK): email (International):

FREE SHIPPING! Postage and packing free for US, Canadian and UK online orders over $35/£20

PRSRT STD U.S. Postage PAID Clifton, NJ Permit No. 1104

Routledge c/o CMFS 31 Styertowne Road Clifton, NJ 07012 RETURN SERVICE REQUESTED

Routledge Psychology Press 270 Madison Avenue New York, NY 10016, USA 27 Church Road Hove East Sussex BN3 2FA, UK page 60

page 23

page 18

page 52

TO ORDER A BOOK: Customer Services Taylor and Francis, 7625 Empire Drive, Florence, Kentucky, KY 41042, USA Toll Free Phone: 1-800-634-7064 Toll Free Fax: 1-800-248-4724 Phone RoW: +1 859-525-2230 Fax RoW: +1 859-647-5027 email:

page 62

page 33

page 67

page 13

Routledge is part of the Taylor & Francis group, a trading division of Informa UK Ltd. Registered in England under no. 3099067 Registered Office: Mortimer House, 37-41 Mortimer Street, London W1T 3JH

Routledge Mental Health - New Books Catalogue 2009  

Psychotherapy and Counselling, Cognitive Behaviour Therapy, Creative Arts Therapies, Child and Adolescent Mental Health, Clinical Problems,...

Routledge Mental Health - New Books Catalogue 2009  

Psychotherapy and Counselling, Cognitive Behaviour Therapy, Creative Arts Therapies, Child and Adolescent Mental Health, Clinical Problems,...